Setup guide | Garmin DA40 GPS Receiver User Manual

Technical Reference
August 2004
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
© 2004 Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, Kentucky 40550
www.lexmark.com
Edition: August 2004
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK
INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not
apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these
changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.
Comments about this publication may be addressed to Lexmark International, Inc., Department F95/032-2, 740 West New Circle Road,
Lexington, Kentucky 40550, U.S.A. In the United Kingdom and Eire, send to Lexmark International Ltd., Marketing and Services
Department, Westhorpe House, Westhorpe, Marlow Bucks SL7 3RQ. Lexmark may use or distribute any of the information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. You can purchase additional copies of publications related to this
product by calling 1-800-553-9727. In the United Kingdom and Eire, call +44 (0)8704 440 044. In other countries, contact your point of
purchase.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all
countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual
property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except
those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, MarkVision, and Optra are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the
United States and/or other countries. ColorGrade, PerfectFinish, and PictureGrade are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies:
Albertus
Antique Olive
Apple-Chancery
Arial
Candid
CG Omega
CG Times
The Monotype Corporation plc
Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple Computer, Inc.
The Monotype Corporation plc
Agfa Corporation
Product of Agfa Corporation
Based on Times New Roman under license
from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a
product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago
Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile
Nebiolo
Geneva
Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans
The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler
Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman
ITC Lubalin Graph
ITC Mona Lisa
ITC Zapf Chancery
Joanna MT
Marigold
Monaco
New York
Oxford
Palatino
Stempel Garamond
Taffy
Times New Roman
TrueType
Univers
Wingdings
International Typeface Corporation
International Typeface Corporation
International Typeface Corporation
International Typeface Corporation
The Monotype Corporation plc
Arthur Baker
Apple Computer, Inc.
Apple Computer, Inc.
Arthur Baker
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Agfa Corporation
The Monotype Corporation plc
Apple Computer, Inc.
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Microsoft Corporation
AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL 3, PCL 5, and PCL 6 are Hewlett-Packard Company’s designations
of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. These printers are intended to be compatible with
the PCL 3, PCL 5, and PCL 6 languages. This means these printers recognize PCL 3, PCL 5, and PCL 6 commands used in various
application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript is Adobe Systems’ designation of a set of printer
commands (language) and functions included in its software products. These printers are intended to be compatible with the PostScript
language. This means these printers recognize PostScript commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates
the functions corresponding to the commands.
Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Safety Information
• If your product is not marked with this symbol
, it must be connected to an electrical outlet that is properly grounded.
CAUTION: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections,
such as the power cord or telephone, during a lightning storm.
• The power cord must be connected to an electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
• Refer to the Setup Guide for additional safety information, and for setting up the equipment.
• Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the operating instructions, to a professional service person.
© 1998, 2004 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation
developed exclusively at private expense.
TOC-1
Contents
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................1-1
Overview............................................................................................................. 1-1
Navigational Tips ................................................................................................ 1-4
Printing the File................................................................................................... 1-4
Bibliography........................................................................................................ 1-5
PCL Emulation..................................................................2-1
Selecting PCL Emulation....................................................................................2-1
Using SmartSwitch........................................................................................ 2-1
Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional.................................. 2-1
Using Your Software Program ......................................................................2-2
Page Formatting ................................................................................................. 2-3
Printable Areas.............................................................................................. 2-3
Lexmark C510(n) .......................................................................................... 2-4
Lexmark X422 ............................................................................................... 2-5
Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n ...............................................2-6
Print Area Menu Item.......................................................................................... 2-7
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark X422 ......................................... 2-9
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark X422 .......... 2-10
Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark X422.............................................2-15
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C510(n) .................................. 2-19
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark C510(n)...... 2-20
Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark C510(n) ........................................2-25
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E230, E232............................. 2-29
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark E230, E232 2-30
Selecting Symbol Sets for Lexmark E230, E232 ........................................2-32
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, E332n............2-37
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, and
E332n.......................................................................................................... 2-38
Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, and E332n........... 2-43
Command Structure ......................................................................................... 2-59
Control Codes ............................................................................................. 2-59
Commands.................................................................................................. 2-59
TOC-2
Contents
PCL Emulation Commands .............................................................................. 2-62
PCL Emulation Commands by Function ..................................................... 2-62
GL/2 Commands .............................................................................................. 2-84
Raster Image Graphics..................................................................................... 2-88
Raster Compression Mode .........................................................................2-88
Macros..............................................................................................................2-95
Printer Job Language ......................................................3-1
PJL Command Notation ..................................................................................... 3-1
Kernel Commands.............................................................................................. 3-2
Job Separation Commands ................................................................................ 3-4
Environment Commands and Variables .............................................................3-7
Status Readback Commands........................................................................... 3-54
Status Message Format ................................................................................... 3-61
Information Messages................................................................................. 3-61
Auto-Continuable Conditions ...................................................................... 3-63
Attendance Conditions ................................................................................ 3-67
Operator Intervention - Paper Handling ......................................................3-72
Operator Intervention - Paper Jams............................................................ 3-75
Service Errors ............................................................................................. 3-80
Device Attendance Commands ........................................................................ 3-80
Unique PJL Commands.................................................................................... 3-82
File Commands for Flash or Disk................................................................ 3-86
File and Device Protection Commands ............................................................ 3-93
Protecting a File or Device .......................................................................... 3-93
Unlocking a Protected File or Device .......................................................... 3-95
Re-Locking a Protected File or Device........................................................ 3-96
Unlocking a Protected File or Device for the Current Job ........................... 3-97
Recovering Lost Passwords........................................................................ 3-98
PostScript Emulation .......................................................4-1
Selecting PostScript Emulation .......................................................................... 4-1
Using SmartSwitch........................................................................................ 4-1
Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional.................................. 4-1
Using Your Software Program ......................................................................4-2
Page Formatting ................................................................................................. 4-3
TOC-3
Contents
Printable Areas.............................................................................................. 4-3
Logical Page Size .........................................................................................4-4
PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark X422............................................. 4-7
PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark C510(n) ........................................ 4-9
PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, E332n................ 4-12
Supplemental Operators................................................................................... 4-14
Command Format .......................................................................................4-14
Paper Size Support ..................................................................................... 4-15
Paper Tray Support..................................................................................... 4-18
Envelope Size Support................................................................................ 4-23
Envelope Tray Support ............................................................................... 4-25
Supplemental Operator Summary............................................................... 4-27
Page Device Parameters..................................................................................4-62
Interpreter Parameters ..................................................................................... 4-76
User Parameters ......................................................................................... 4-76
System Parameters..................................................................................... 4-79
Device Parameters...................................................................................... 4-85
Status and Error Messages ............................................................................ 4-106
Tagged Binary Not Active ......................................................................... 4-106
Tagged Binary Active ................................................................................4-106
Status Messages....................................................................................... 4-107
Unsolicited Messages ............................................................................... 4-108
Switching Languages ......................................................5-1
SmartSwitch .......................................................................................................5-1
Setting SmartSwitch for Different Interfaces ................................................. 5-2
Printer Job Language .........................................................................................5-2
Sniffing................................................................................................................5-3
Flash Memory and Disk ...................................................6-1
Resource Data Collection (Download Target) .................................................... 6-2
Storing Resources on Flash Memory or Disk................................................ 6-3
Viewing the Contents of Flash Memory and Disk...............................................6-3
Password Protection........................................................................................... 6-7
Rewriting the Flash Content ............................................................................... 6-8
Accessing Files with PostScript Emulation......................................................... 6-9
TOC-4
Contents
File Naming Conventions .............................................................................. 6-9
Device Search Order................................................................................... 6-12
Performance .....................................................................................................6-13
Job Buffering .................................................................................................... 6-13
Creating a Partition ..................................................................................... 6-14
Enabling Job Buffering ................................................................................ 6-14
Disabling Job Buffering ............................................................................... 6-15
Recovering from a Power Loss ................................................................... 6-15
Printer Specifications ......................................................7-1
Airflow Requirement...................................................................................... 7-1
Noise Emission Levels .................................................................................. 7-1
Electrical Specifications ................................................................................ 7-2
Power Requirements..................................................................................... 7-2
Physical Specifications.................................................................................. 7-4
...................................................................................................................... 7-4
Clearance Requirements ............................................................................. 7-4
Environmental Conditions ............................................................................. 7-5
Altitude Specifications ................................................................................... 7-5
Atmospheric Pressure................................................................................... 7-5
Power On to Ready State Time Period ........................................................7-6
Time to Print the First Page ......................................................................... 7-6
Printer Interfaces..............................................................8-1
Setting Up the Communications Port ................................................................. 8-2
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me .................. 8-2
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0 ...................... 8-3
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000 ......................... 8-4
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP ............................8-5
Deciding Which Interface to Use ........................................................................ 8-6
Parallel Interface................................................................................................. 8-7
Standard Parallel Connector ......................................................................... 8-8
Optional Parallel Connector .......................................................................... 8-8
Parallel Connector Pin Assignments.............................................................8-8
Using the INIT* Signal to Initialize............................................................... 8-11
Computer-to-Printer Communications......................................................... 8-11
TOC-5
Contents
Printer-to-Computer Communication (Advanced Status)............................ 8-17
Parallel Mode 1 ........................................................................................... 8-18
Parallel Mode 2 ........................................................................................... 8-19
Signal Descriptions ..................................................................................... 8-19
Serial Interface ................................................................................................. 8-25
Using the RS-232C Serial Interface ............................................................ 8-26
Using the RS-422 Serial Interface............................................................... 8-36
Network Support............................................................................................... 8-42
Input Buffer ....................................................................................................... 8-43
PCL Support .................................................................... A-1
PJL Support ..................................................................... B-1
PostScript Support ......................................................... C-1
Index................................................................................. X-1
1-1
Introduction
CHAPTER 1: Introduction
Overview
The following edition of the Technical Reference contains information about printer
commands and printer languages supported by the following Lexmark printers:
•
•
•
Lexmark™ C510(n)
Lexmark X422
Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n, E234(n)
To determine which commands and languages your printer supports, see the
appendixes in the back of this document or refer to your printer user documentation.
If your printer is not included in this edition of the Technical Reference, it may be
available in another version. Visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/
publications for more information.
1-2
Introduction
Printed documentation is also available for some Lexmark printers. Obtain the correct
part number from the following table, call 1-800-553-9727, and select option #1 to
order a Technical Reference for your printer.
Table 1-1: Technical Reference Documentation Available in Hard Copy
If you need a Technical Reference for the...
Order Lexmark part number...
Optra™ K
11A4079
Optra N
11A9979
Optra SC
11C0905
Optra E310
12A2194
The Technical Reference is divided into the following:
Chapter 2: “PCL Emulation”
Shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands, GL/2
commands, and resident font and symbol set support.
Chapter 3: “Printer Job Language”
Contains detailed information about certain commands that cause the printer to enter
PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, and Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), and
many other types of commands.
Chapter 4: “PostScript Emulation”
Provides information about PostScript emulation and explains PostScript emulation
supplemental operators.
Chapter 5: “Switching Languages”
Describes ways to switch printer languages and explains when you may want to
choose one method over another.
Chapter 6: “Flash Memory and Disk”
Provides information about using the flash memory and hard disk. It describes how to
manage printer memory, store resources (such as fonts and macros), and manage
files.
1-3
Introduction
Chapter 7: “Printer Specifications”
Lists printer specifications, including information about hardware and environmental
conditions.
Chapter 8: “Printer Interfaces”
Provides information on printer interfaces, including information about parallel and
serial interface, network support, and communication protocols.
See the tables in the three appendixes to determine if your printer supports a
particular PCL emulation, PJL, or PostScript emulation command. The appendixes
are:
Appendix A: “PCL Support”
Appendix B: “PJL Support”
Appendix C: “PostScript Support”
1-4
Introduction
Navigational Tips
If you are not familiar with PDF files, the following tips may help you find the
information you need.
•
To move forward and backward through this document:
– Select an option under View in the menu bar at the top of the page.
– Use the arrows in the toolbar at the top of the page, or the up arrow and
down arrow keys on the keyboard.
– Press the Page Up and Page Down keys on the keyboard.
– Use the scroll bar to the right of the page.
– Click the page number box on the status bar at the bottom of the page and
type the page you want.
•
To increase or decrease the magnification of the pages:
– Select the magnifying glass icon on the toolbar at the top of the page and
then draw a box around the area you want to view.
– Click the magnification box on the status bar and select an option from the
drop-down menu.
•
To jump directly to a particular section or key word in this document:
–
–
–
–
–
Click one of the bookmarks in the overview window to the left of the page.
Click a topic in the document’s table of contents.
Select Tools from the menu bar and then choose Find or Search.
Click the binoculars icon on the toolbar and then type a word in the text box.
Click a cross-reference to a figure, page number, or heading in the document itself.
Printing the File
Although this book was designed primarily for online viewing, you can print a hard
copy by clicking File on the toolbar, and then choosing Print. Make sure you’ve
selected the correct printer, range of pages, and number of copies before you click
OK. You should be aware that if you print this document on a color printer, the color
you see on the paper may not match the color you see on your computer monitor.
1-5
Introduction
Bibliography
For detailed information about PCL emulation printer commands, PostScript
emulation printer commands and operators, and interfaces, refer to the following
documentation:
•
Hewlett-Packard DeskJet Printer Family Technical Reference, C2121-90101
•
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4 Typography and Graphics, Random House
Electronic Publishing
•
Hewlett-Packard PCL 5 Color Technical Reference Manual, 5961-0635
•
Hewlett-Packard PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual,
5961-0509
•
Hewlett-Packard PostScript SIMM Technical Reference, I/O Device
Operators and Parameters, C2080-90921
•
Hewlett-Packard Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual,
5961H0512
•
IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference, S68X-2330
•
Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications
Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange, Electronic Industries
Association, publications EIA RS-232C and EIA\TIA-232-E
•
Network Printing Alliance Protocol, A Printer/Host Control Specification
Developed by the NPA, Level 1, Revision N
•
PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition), Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Addison-Wesley Publishing
2-1
PCL
CHAPTER 2: PCL Emulation
When you select PCL emulation as the printer language, the printer supports the
Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet Printer Command Language. This chapter
shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands, along
with resident PCL emulation font and symbol set support.
To determine which commands your printer supports, see Appendix A: “PCL Support”
on page A-1.
Selecting PCL Emulation
Using SmartSwitch
When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface (for example,
Parallel, USB, Serial Option 1, or Network Option 1), the printer automatically switches
to the printer language being sent by your software program. The printer is shipped
with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages in all interfaces. The printer
examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between PostScript emulation and
PCL emulation.
Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional
If SmartSwitch is set to Off for both printer languages, you can select PCL emulation
from your printer operator panel or from MarkVision™ Professional. Refer to your
printer user documentation for information on changing menu settings.
2-2
PCL
Using Your Software Program
To select PCL emulation, use the Printer Job Language (PJL) Enter Language
Command. See “ENTER LANGUAGE Command” on page 3-3 for more information.
See “Printer Job Language” on page 3-1 for the syntax and use of PJL.
Warning: When you change printer languages, you may lose some or all previously
downloaded resources, unless Resource Save is set to On or the resources
are stored in flash memory or on disk.
2-3
PCL
Page Formatting
The printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation (both portrait and landscape
orientation) are illustrated below. See the Legend that follows for definitions of areas
A through I.
Printable Areas
Legend:
A
Portrait physical page width and landscape physical page length
B
Portrait physical page length and landscape physical page width
C
Portrait logical page width
D
Landscape logical page width
E
Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in portrait
F
Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in landscape
G
Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and logical page
H
Distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the printable area in
portrait, or distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and printable
area in landscape
I
Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and the printable area in
portrait, or distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the
printable area in landscape
Note: The tables beginning on page 2-4 list the page sizes and dimensions of each
area labeled on the preceding diagram for all paper and envelope sizes your
printer supports. If information about your printer is not included in the
following tables, see page 1-1 for information on how to get a Technical
Reference for your printer.
2-4
PCL
Lexmark C510(n)
The following table lists page sizes and print area dimensions for all paper and
envelope sizes the Lexmark C510(n) printer supports. For more information about the
printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation, see “Printable Areas” on
page 2-3.
Table 2-1: Lexmark C510(n) Paper and Envelope Dimensions
Selection
Page Size
Parm2
Paper/Envelope Dimensions
Name
mm
Dimensions by Area (pels)1
inches
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Paper
13, 613
A5
12, 45, 612
JIS B5 Paper
148 x 210
5.83 x 8.27
3496
4960
3196
4720
142
118
0
100
100
182 x 257
7.2 x 10.1
4300
6070
4000
5830
150
120
0
100
100
A4 (198 mm)
3
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
4960
7014
4676
6778
142
118
0
80
80
26, 626
A4 (203 mm)
3
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
4960
7014
4800
6778
80
118
0
80
80
1, 601
Executive
184 x 267
7.25 x 10.5
4350
6300
4050
6060
150
120
0
100
100
2, 602
Letter
216 x 279
8.5 x 11
5100
6600
4800
6360
150
120
0
100
100
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
5100
8400
4800
8160
150
120
0
100
100
216 x 330
8.5 x 13
5100
7800
4800
7560
150
120
0
100
100
139.7 x 215.9
5.5 x 8.5
3300
5100
3000
4860
150
120
0
100
100
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
5100
8500
4800
8260
150
120
0
100
100
26, 626
5
3, 603
Legal
4 or 10
Folio5
15
Statement
101
Universal
5
Envelope
90
91
4
99 , 100
DL
220 x 110
8.66 x 4.33
2598
5196
2314
4960
142
118
0
100
100
C5
229 x 162
9.02 x 6.38
3826
5408
3542
5172
142
118
0
100
100
250 x 176
9.84 x 6.93
4156
5904
3872
5668
142
118
0
100
100
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
5100
8400
4800
8160
150
120
0
100
412
B5 Envelope
5
600
Other Envelope
89
9 (Com 9)
225 x 98
8.875 x 3.875
2326
5324
2024
5084
150
120
0
100
100
81
10 (Com 10)
241 x 105
9.5 x 4.125
2474
5700
2174
5460
150
120
0
100
100
1
Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi.
Page Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-30 on page 2-64.
3 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software application.
4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same logical
paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039.
5 The Lexmark C510(n) supports this size media only with an optional legal tray.
2
Note: The explanation of the printable area assumes the Print Area menu item is set
to Normal. For more information about Print Area, see page 2-6.
2-5
PCL
Lexmark X422
The following table lists page sizes and print area dimensions for all paper and
envelope sizes the Lexmark X422 printer supports. For more information about the
printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation, see “Printable Areas” on
page 2-3.
Table 2-2: Lexmark X422 Paper and Envelope Dimensions
Selection
Page Size
Parm2
Paper/Envelope Dimensions
Name
mm
Dimensions by Area (pels)1
inches
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Paper
13, 613
A5
12, 45, 612
JIS B5 Paper
148 x 210
5.83 x 8.27
3496
4960
3196
4720
142
118
0
100
100
182 x 257
7.2 x 10.1
4300
6070
4000
5830
150
120
0
100
100
A4 (198 mm)
3
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
4960
7014
4676
6778
142
118
0
80
80
26, 626
A4 (203 mm)
3
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
4960
7014
4800
6778
80
118
0
80
80
1, 601
Executive
184 x 267
7.25 x 10.5
4350
6300
4050
6060
150
120
0
100
100
2, 602
Letter
216 x 279
8.5 x 11
5100
6600
4800
6360
150
120
0
100
100
3, 603
Legal
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
5100
8400
4800
8160
150
120
0
100
100
4 or 10
Folio
216 x 330
8.5 x 13
5100
7800
4800
7560
150
120
0
100
100
15
Statement
139.7 x 215.9
5.5 x 8.5
3300
5100
3000
4860
150
120
0
100
100
101
Universal
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
5100
8500
4800
8260
150
120
0
100
100
26, 626
Envelope
90
DL
220 x 110
8.66 x 4.33
2598
5196
2314
4960
142
118
0
100
100
C5
229 x 162
9.02 x 6.38
3826
5408
3542
5172
142
118
0
100
100
99 , 100
B5 Envelope
250 x 176
9.84 x 6.93
4156
5904
3872
5668
142
118
0
100
100
600
Other Envelope
229 x 356
9.02 x 14
5100
8400
4800
8160
150
120
0
100
100
80
7-3/4 Monarch
191 x 98
7.5 x 3.875
2326
4500
2024
4260
150
120
0
100
100
89
9 (Com 9)
225 x 98
8.875 x 3.875
2326
5324
2024
5084
150
120
0
100
100
81
10 (Com 10)
241 x 105
9.5 x 4.125
2474
5700
2174
5460
150
120
0
100
100
91
4
1
Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi.
Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-30 on page 2-64.
3 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software application.
4
Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same logical
paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039.
2 Page
Note: The explanation of the printable area assumes the Print Area menu item is set
to Normal. For more information about Print Area, see page 2-6.
2-6
PCL
Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n
The following table lists page sizes and print area dimensions for all paper and
envelope sizes the Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, and E332n printer supports.
For more information about the printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation,
see “Printable Areas” on page 2-3.
Table 2-3: Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n Paper and Envelope Dimensions
Paper/Envelope
Dimensions
Selection
Page
Size
Parm2
Name
mm
Dimensions by Area (pels)1
inches
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Paper
13, 613
A5
12, 45, 612
JIS B5 Paper
26, 626
148 x 210
5.83 x 8.27
3496
4960
3196
4720
142
118
0
100
100
100
100
300
182 x 257
7.2 x 10.1
4300
6070
4000
5830
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
3
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
4960
7014
4676
6778
142
118
0
80
80
100
100
300
mm)3
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
4960
7014
4800
6778
80
118
0
80
80
100
100
300
A4 (198 mm)
26, 626
A4 (203
1, 601
Executive
184 x 267
7.25 x 10.5
4350
6300
4050
6060
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
2, 602
Letter
216 x 279
8.5 x 11
5100
6600
4800
6360
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
3, 603
Legal
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
5100
8400
4800
8160
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
4 or 10
Folio
216 x 330
8.5 x 13
5100
7800
4800
7560
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
15
Statement
139.7 x 215.9
5.5 x 8.5
3300
5100
3000
4860
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
101
Universal
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
5100
8500
4800
8260
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
Envelope
90
DL
220 x 110
8.66 x 4.33
2598
5196
2314
4960
142
118
0
100
100
100
100
300
C5
229 x 162
9.02 x 6.38
3826
5408
3542
5172
142
118
0
100
100
100
100
300
99 , 100
B5 Envelope
250 x 176
9.84 x 6.93
4156
5904
3872
5668
142
118
0
100
100
100
100
300
600
Other
Envelope
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
5100
8400
4800
8160
150
120
0
100
412
100
100
300
89
9 (Com 9)
225 x 98
8.875 x 3.875
2326
5324
2024
5084
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
81
10 (Com 10)
241 x 105
9.5 x 4.125
2474
5700
2174
5460
150
120
0
100
100
100
100
300
1
1
1
91
4
1
Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi.
Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-30 on page 2-64.
3
The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software
application.
4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the
same logical paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the
Lexmark 4039.
2 Page
Note: The explanation of the printable area assumes the Print Area menu item is set
to Normal. For more information about Print Area, see page 2-6.
2-7
PCL
Print Area Menu Item
The printable area is the area on a sheet of paper within which a pel can be printed.
Logical page is a conceptual entity that defines the area in which margins (top, bottom,
left, right) may be set and the area in which the PCL cursor may be positioned.
The physical page border is the actual physical boundaries of a page.
The Print Area menu item is available from the printer operator panel or through
MarkVision Professional. For some printers, Print Area supports three values: Normal,
Whole Page, and Fit to Page. Refer to your printer user documentation for more
information.
Normal setting
Whole Page setting
Legend:
PCL
Logical
Page
Area
Physical
Page
Border
PCL
Printable
Area
Only Portrait Orientation shown for all settings
The Normal setting, which is the factory default, means the printable area includes the
entire page except the narrow border around the edge of the page. This is the
nonprintable area. The printer measures margin settings relative to the logical page.
For a more detailed explanation of the Normal setting, see “Printable Areas” on
page 2-3.
2-8
PCL
The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed when using PCL emulation. If
Whole Page is selected, the PCL language sets the logical page area equal to the
physical page dimensions. Since the logical page dimensions and the physical page
dimensions are the same, in theory, the cursor may be positioned anywhere on the
page. However, the PCL language clips the image to the printable area. So, the Whole
Page setting is useful for printing scanned images that extend from edge to edge of a
page.
Some printers offer the Fit to Page setting. When Fit to Page is selected, PCL
emulation or PostScript emulation formats a page using a printable area equal to the
physical page, which is from one edge of the page to the other edge of the page. If you
use this setting, no clipping occurs. In Fit to Page, the PCL emulation logical page
dimensions are equal to the physical page dimensions, as in the Whole Page setting.
The printer holds this formatted image in memory, but when the page prints, the image
is compressed a small amount in both horizontal and vertical directions, and then
centered on the physical page for letter-size paper only. This process creates a small
margin around the image. This artificial margin prevents printing from one edge to the
other, since doing so could contaminate the printer and cause printing problems.
The following illustrations show an image held in memory for printing from one edge
to the other and how the image would actually print based on the Fit to Page setting.
Notice that a small border appears at the edges of the printed page, and the image is
slightly compressed.
Physical
Page
Edge
Formatted Image with Fit to Page
Printed Image with Fit to Page
2-9
PCL
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark X422
Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation, including 89 scalable fonts and
two bitmapped fonts.
Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include
symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. For scalable
fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped
fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You can
print the font sample pages from the MFP control panel, using a PJL command (see
“LPRINTPCLFONTS” on page 3-83.) or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to
your printer user documentation for more information.
A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for
each of these characters. Your printer supports 88 symbol sets. The tables beginning
on page 2-15 show the symbol sets available for each font in PCL emulation. Not all
fonts support all symbol sets.
You can select a font as the PCL emulation default from the MFP control panel or
through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer user documentation for more
information.
The fonts are divided into three major groups. The first 47 fonts (R0 through R46)
shown on the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts. The next 39
fonts (R47 through R85) are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for
PostScript emulation, but now also work in the PCL emulation. The last five fonts (R86
through R90) include three different Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts, OCR-A and OCR-B
fonts.
The fonts are further divided into font groups A, B, and C indicating which symbol sets
are supported by each font. For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, as well
as the OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts, see Table 2-4 on page 2-10. For a list of
the 39 Type 1 fonts, see Table 2-5 on page 2-13. Both tables list the forward and
backward compatibility font selection commands and the font group (A, B, or C) for
each font. For more information on forward and backward compatibility, see
page 2-10. For more information on selecting symbol sets, see page 2-15.
For compatibility purposes, you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job
Language (PJL) LTYPE1FONTS command. The factory default for these fonts is
Enabled. See LTYPE1FONTS on page 3-47 for more information.
2-10
PCL
You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the
number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or
76 from font identifiers R0 or R76. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning
on page 2-15 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use
the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or
set as the default.
Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER,
PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See Table 3-5: “Common Variables for
PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands.
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark X422
Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward
compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s
LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the
Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers.
Standard PCL Emulation Fonts, OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts
Table 2-4 on page 2-10 lists the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility mode for each of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, the OCR and
Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and
backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Most
fonts are assigned a font group indicating which symbol sets that font supports.
To determine which symbol sets are supported by a particular font, find the font
group (A, B, or C) for the font in Table 2-4, and then see Table 2-6 on page 2-15 for
the symbol sets that belong to that group.
Table 2-4: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Standard PCL Emulation
Font Name
Forward and Backward
Compatibility Mode
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
Courier
0
0
4099
A
Courier Italic
1
0
4099
A
Courier Bold
0
3
4099
A
Courier Bold Italic
1
3
4099
A
1
For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation
Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2-11
PCL
Table 2-4: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection
Standard PCL Emulation
Font Name
Forward and Backward
Compatibility Mode
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
CG Times
0
0
4101
A
CG Times Italic
1
0
4101
A
CG Times Bold
0
3
4101
A
CG Times Bold Italic
1
3
4101
A
Univers Medium
0
0
4148
A
Univers Medium Italic
1
0
4148
A
Univers Bold
0
3
4148
A
Univers Bold Italic
1
3
4148
A
Letter Gothic
0
0
4102
B
Letter Gothic Italic
1
0
4102
B
Letter Gothic Bold
0
3
4102
B
Univers Condensed Medium
4
0
4148
B
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
5
0
4148
B
Univers Condensed Bold
4
3
4148
B
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
5
3
4148
B
Garamond Antiqua
0
0
4197
B
Garamond Kursiv
1
0
4197
B
Garamond Halbfett
0
3
4197
B
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
1
3
4197
B
CG Omega
0
0
4113
B
CG Omega Italic
1
0
4113
B
CG Omega Bold
0
3
4113
B
CG Omega Bold Italic
1
3
4113
B
Antique Olive
0
0
4168
B
Antique Olive Italic
1
0
4168
B
Antique Olive Bold
0
3
4168
B
Albertus Medium
0
1
4362
B
Albertus Extra Bold
0
4
4362
B
Clarendon Condensed Bold
4
3
4140
B
Marigold
0
0
4297
B
Coronet
1
0
4116
B
1
For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation
Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2-12
PCL
Table 2-4: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection
Standard PCL Emulation
Font Name
Forward and Backward
Compatibility Mode
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
Times New Roman
0
0
16901
B
Times New Roman Italic
1
0
16901
B
Times New Roman Bold
0
3
16901
B
Times New Roman BoldItalic
1
3
16901
B
Arial
0
0
16602
B
Arial Italic
1
0
16602
B
Arial Bold
0
3
16602
B
Arial Bold Italic
1
3
16602
B
Symbol1
0
0
16686
Wingdings1
0
0
31402
Line Printer 161
0
0
0
POSTNET Bar Code1
0
0
0
OCR-A1
0
0
23584
1
0
0
23590
C39 Narrow1
0
0
32774
Regular1
0
0
32772
0
0
32777
OCR-B
C39
C39 Wide
1
1
A
D
For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation
Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2-13
PCL
Type 1 Fonts
Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different font selection parameters in the forward and
backward compatibility modes and 9 of the fonts work only in the forward compatibility
mode. With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software
application selects these fonts.
The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font. All Type 1 fonts are
supported by both the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050 and the
Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted.
To determine which symbol sets are supported by a particular font, find the font
group (A, B, or C) for the font in Table 2-5, and then see Table 2-6 on page 2-15 for
the symbol sets that belong to that group.
Table 2-5: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward Compatibility
Mode
Backward Compatibility
Mode
Type 1 Font name
Style
Bold
Typeface
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
ITC Avant Garde Book
0
0
24607
0
0
61471
B
1
0
24607
1
0
61471
B
0
2
24607
0
3
61471
B
1
2
24607
1
3
61471
B
ITC Bookman Light
0
-3
24623
0
-3
61487
B
ITC Bookman Light Italic
1
-3
24623
1
-3
61487
B
ITC Bookman Demi
0
2
24623
0
2
61487
B
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
1
2
24623
1
2
61487
B
Century Schoolbook Roman
0
0
24703
0
0
61463
B
Century Schoolbook Italic
1
0
24703
1
0
61463
B
Century Schoolbook Bold
0
3
24703
0
3
61463
B
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
1
3
24703
1
3
61463
B
Helvetica
0
0
24580
0
0
61444
B
Helvetica Italic
1
0
24580
1
0
61444
B
Helvetica Bold
0
3
24580
0
3
61444
B
Helvetica Bold Italic
1
3
24580
1
3
61444
B
Helvetica Narrow
4
0
24580
4
0
61444
B
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Demi
1
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
1
1
Notice the values for forward compatibility and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold.
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
3 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2
2-14
PCL
Table 2-5: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued)
Forward Compatibility
Mode
Backward Compatibility
Mode
Type 1 Font name
Style
Bold
Typeface
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
Helvetica Narrow Italic
5
0
24580
5
0
61444
B
Helvetica Narrow Bold
4
3
24580
4
3
61444
B
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
5
3
24580
5
3
61444
B
Helvetica Light 2
0
-3
24580
0
-3
61444
C
1
-3
24580
1
-3
61444
C
0
5
24580
0
5
61444
C
Helvetica Black Oblique 2
1
5
24580
1
5
61444
C
Palatino Roman
0
0
24591
0
0
61455
B
Palatino Italic
1
0
24591
1
0
61455
B
Palatino Bold
0
3
24591
0
3
61455
B
Palatino Bold Italic
1
3
24591
1
3
61455
B
1
0
45099
1
0
61483
B
0
0
45101
0
0
61485
CourierPS
0
0
24579
B
CourierPS Oblique
1
0
24579
B
CourierPS Bold
0
3
24579
B
CourierPS Bold Oblique
1
3
24579
B
Times Roman
0
0
25093
B
Times Italic
1
0
25093
B
Times Bold
0
3
25093
B
Times Bold Italic
1
3
25093
B
0
0
45358
Helvetica Light Oblique
Helvetica Black
2
2
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
ITC Zapf Dingbats
SymbolPS
1
3
3
Notice the values for forward compatibility and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold.
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
3
For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2
2-15
PCL
Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode to enable a
Hewlett-Packard Company’s driver to select the forward compatibility fonts. The
Lexmark PCL driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches
the printer to this mode. The PCL (PJL) commands to switch the default compatibility
modes are:
Forward
ESC
%-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL6
@PJL RESET
Backward
ESC
%-12345X
ESC
%-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL5
@PJL RESET
ESC
%-12345X
Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark X422
To determine which symbol sets a font or typeface from Table 2-4 or Table 2-5
supports, see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the
following tables.
Table 2-6: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts
✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported
by the fonts in the font group.
Symbol Set
Symbol
Set ID
Roman Extension
0E
Roman-8
8U
PC-8 Code Page 437
Font Group
PJL Value
A
B
C
D
✓
✓
✓
✓
ROMAN8
✓
✓
✓
✓
10U
PC8
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
11U
PC8DN
✓
✓
PC-850 Multilingual
12U
PC850
✓
✓
PC-852 Latin 2
17U
PC852
✓
✓
PC-8 Turkish (437T)
9T
PC8TK
✓
✓
PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
26U
✓
✓
PC-1004 OS/2
9J
✓
✓
Legal
1U
LEGAL
✓
✓
DeskTop
7J
DESKTOP
✓
✓
MC Text
12J
✓
✓
✓
PS Text
10J
✓
✓
✓
PSTEXT
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
2-16
PCL
Table 2-6: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts (Continued)
✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported
by the fonts in the font group.
Font Group
Symbol Set
Symbol
Set ID
PJL Value
A
B
PS Math
5M
PSMATH
✓
✓
Math-8
8M
MATH8
✓
✓
Pi Font
15U
PIFONT
✓
✓
Microsoft Publishing
6J
MSPUBL
✓
✓
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
9U
WIN30
✓
Windows Latin 1
19U
WINL1
Windows Latin 2
9E
Windows Latin 5
5T
Windows Latin 6 (Baltic)
19L
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
0N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
C
D
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
WINL2
✓
✓
WINL5
✓
✓
✓
✓
ISOL1
✓
✓
2N
ISOL2
✓
✓
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
5N
ISOL5
✓
✓
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
6N
✓
✓
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
9N
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
13U
✓
✓
✓
✓
Roman-9
4U
✓
✓
✓
✓
Ventura International
13J
VNINTL
✓
✓
✓
✓
Ventura US
14J
VNUS
✓
✓
✓
✓
Ventura Math
6M
VNMATH
✓
✓
PC-861 Iceland
21U
✓
✓
PC-863 Canadian French
23U
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-865 Nordic
25U
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-860 Portugal
20U
✓
✓
✓
✓
ABICOMP International
14P
✓
✓
✓
✓
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
13P
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-8 PC Nova
27Q
✓
✓
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
16U
✓
✓
Turkish-8
8T
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
2-17
PCL
Table 2-6: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts (Continued)
✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported
by the fonts in the font group.
Font Group
Symbol Set
Symbol
Set ID
PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
18U
✓
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
24Q
✓
Windows Cyrillic
9R
✓
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
10N
✓
PC-866 Cyrillic
3R
✓
PC-855 Cyrillic
10R
✓
Russian-GOST
12R
✓
PC-8 Bulgarian
13R
✓
Ukrainian
14R
✓
Windows Greek
9G
✓
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
12N
✓
PC-869 Greece
11G
✓
PC-851 Greece
10G
✓
PC-8 Latin/Greek
12G
✓
Greek-8
8G
✓
PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
14G
✓
PJL Value
A
B
Table 2-7: Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol Set
Symbol
Set ID
Fonts
PC-911 Katakana
3K
Line Printer 16
Symbol
19M
Symbol, SymbolPS
Wingdings
579L
Wingding
POSTNET Bar Code
15Y
POSTNET Bar Code
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
9L
ITC Zapf Dingbats
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
10L
ITC Zapf Dingbats
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
14L
ITC Zapf Dingbats
C39 Bar Code (Uppercase)
9Y
Code 3 of 9
C39 Bar Code (plus Lowercase) 109Y
Code 3 of 9
C
D
✓
2-18
PCL
Table 2-7: Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol
Set ID
Fonts
C39 Bar Code (plus Human
Readable)
209Y
Code 3 of 9
OCR-A
0O
OCR-A
OCR-B
1O
OCR-B
Symbol Set
All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following
19 symbol sets.
Table 2-8: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol
Set ID
Symbol Set
1E
ISO 4: United Kingdom
0U
ISO 6: ASCII
0S
ISO 11: Swedish for Names
0I
ISO 15: Italian
2S
ISO 17: Spanish
1G
ISO 21: German
0D
ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1
1F
ISO 69: French
2U
ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version)
0F
ISO 25: French
0G
ISO: HP German
0K
ISO 14: JIS ASCII
2K
ISO 57: Chinese
3S
ISO 10: Swedish
1S
ISO: HP Spanish
6S
ISO 85: Spanish
4S
ISO 16: Portuguese
5S
ISO 84: Portuguese
1D
ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2
2-19
PCL
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark
C510(n)
Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation, including 89 scalable fonts and
two bitmapped fonts.
Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include
symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. For scalable
fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped
fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You
can print the font sample pages from the printer operator panel, using a PJL command
(see “LPRINTPCLFONTS” on page 3-83.) or through MarkVision Professional. Refer
to your printer user documentation for more information.
A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for
each of these characters. Your printer supports 88 symbol sets. The tables beginning
on page 2-15 show the symbol sets available for each font in PCL emulation. Not all
fonts support all symbol sets.
You can select a font as the PCL emulation default from the printer operator panel or
through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer user documentation for more
information.
The fonts are divided into three major groups. The first 47 fonts (R0 through R46)
shown on the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts. The next 39
fonts (R47 through R85) are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for
PostScript emulation, but now also work in the PCL emulation. The last five fonts (R86
through R90) include three different Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts, OCR-A and OCR-B
fonts.
The fonts are further divided into font groups A, B, and C indicating which symbol sets
are supported by each font. For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, as well
as the OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts, see Table 2-4 on page 2-10. For a list of
the 39 Type 1 fonts, see Table 2-5 on page 2-13. Both tables list the forward and
backward compatibility font selection commands and the font group (A, B, or C) for
each font. For more information on forward and backward compatibility, see
page 2-10. For more information on selecting symbol sets, see page 2-15.
For compatibility purposes, you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job
Language (PJL) LTYPE1FONTS command. The factory default for these fonts is
Enabled. See LTYPE1FONTS on page 3-47 for more information.
2-20
PCL
You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the
number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or
76 from font identifiers R0 or R76. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning
on page 2-15 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use
the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or
set as the default.
Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER,
PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See Table 3-5: “Common Variables for
PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands.
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark
C510(n)
Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward
compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s
LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the
Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers.
Standard PCL Emulation Fonts, OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts
Table 2-4 on page 2-10 lists the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility mode for each of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, the OCR and
Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and
backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Most
fonts are assigned a font group indicating which symbol sets that font supports.
To determine which symbol sets are supported by a particular font, find the font
group (A, B, or C) for the font in Table 2-4, and then see Table 2-6 on page 2-15 for
the symbol sets that belong to that group.
Table 2-9: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Standard PCL Emulation
Font Name
Forward and Backward
Compatibility Mode
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
Courier
0
0
4099
A
Courier Italic
1
0
4099
A
Courier Bold
0
3
4099
A
1
For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation
Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2-21
PCL
Table 2-9: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection
Standard PCL Emulation
Font Name
Forward and Backward
Compatibility Mode
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
Courier Bold Italic
1
3
4099
A
CG Times
0
0
4101
A
CG Times Italic
1
0
4101
A
CG Times Bold
0
3
4101
A
CG Times Bold Italic
1
3
4101
A
Univers Medium
0
0
4148
A
Univers Medium Italic
1
0
4148
A
Univers Bold
0
3
4148
A
Univers Bold Italic
1
3
4148
A
Letter Gothic
0
0
4102
B
Letter Gothic Italic
1
0
4102
B
Letter Gothic Bold
0
3
4102
B
Univers Condensed Medium
4
0
4148
B
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
5
0
4148
B
Univers Condensed Bold
4
3
4148
B
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
5
3
4148
B
Garamond Antiqua
0
0
4197
B
Garamond Kursiv
1
0
4197
B
Garamond Halbfett
0
3
4197
B
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
1
3
4197
B
CG Omega
0
0
4113
B
CG Omega Italic
1
0
4113
B
CG Omega Bold
0
3
4113
B
CG Omega Bold Italic
1
3
4113
B
Antique Olive
0
0
4168
B
Antique Olive Italic
1
0
4168
B
Antique Olive Bold
0
3
4168
B
Albertus Medium
0
1
4362
B
Albertus Extra Bold
0
4
4362
B
Clarendon Condensed Bold
4
3
4140
B
Marigold
0
0
4297
B
1
For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation
Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2-22
PCL
Table 2-9: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection
Standard PCL Emulation
Font Name
Forward and Backward
Compatibility Mode
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
Coronet
1
0
4116
B
Times New Roman
0
0
16901
B
Times New Roman Italic
1
0
16901
B
Times New Roman Bold
0
3
16901
B
Times New Roman BoldItalic
1
3
16901
B
Arial
0
0
16602
B
Arial Italic
1
0
16602
B
Arial Bold
0
3
16602
B
Arial Bold Italic
1
3
16602
B
Symbol1
0
0
16686
Wingdings1
0
0
31402
0
0
0
Line Printer 161
POSTNET Bar
Code1
0
0
0
1
0
0
23584
OCR-B1
0
0
23590
0
0
32774
0
0
32772
0
0
32777
OCR-A
C39
Narrow1
C39 Regular
C39
1
Wide1
1
A
D
For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation
Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2-23
PCL
Type 1 Fonts
Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different font selection parameters in the forward and
backward compatibility modes and 9 of the fonts work only in the forward compatibility
mode. With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software
application selects these fonts.
The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font. All Type 1 fonts are
supported by both the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050 and the
Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted.
To determine which symbol sets are supported by a particular font, find the font
group (A, B, or C) for the font in Table 2-5, and then see Table 2-6 on page 2-15 for
the symbol sets that belong to that group.
Table 2-10: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward Compatibility
Mode
Backward Compatibility
Mode
Type 1 Font name
Style
Bold
Typeface
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
ITC Avant Garde Book
0
0
24607
0
0
61471
B
1
0
24607
1
0
61471
B
0
2
24607
0
3
61471
B
1
2
24607
1
3
61471
B
ITC Bookman Light
0
-3
24623
0
-3
61487
B
ITC Bookman Light Italic
1
-3
24623
1
-3
61487
B
ITC Bookman Demi
0
2
24623
0
2
61487
B
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
1
2
24623
1
2
61487
B
Century Schoolbook Roman
0
0
24703
0
0
61463
B
Century Schoolbook Italic
1
0
24703
1
0
61463
B
Century Schoolbook Bold
0
3
24703
0
3
61463
B
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
1
3
24703
1
3
61463
B
Helvetica
0
0
24580
0
0
61444
B
Helvetica Italic
1
0
24580
1
0
61444
B
Helvetica Bold
0
3
24580
0
3
61444
B
Helvetica Bold Italic
1
3
24580
1
3
61444
B
Helvetica Narrow
4
0
24580
4
0
61444
B
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Demi
1
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
1
1
Notice the values for forward compatibility and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold.
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
3 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2
2-24
PCL
Table 2-10: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued)
Forward Compatibility
Mode
Backward Compatibility
Mode
Type 1 Font name
Style
Bold
Typeface
Style
Bold
Typeface
Font
Group
Helvetica Narrow Italic
5
0
24580
5
0
61444
B
Helvetica Narrow Bold
4
3
24580
4
3
61444
B
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
5
3
24580
5
3
61444
B
Helvetica Light 2
0
-3
24580
0
-3
61444
C
1
-3
24580
1
-3
61444
C
0
5
24580
0
5
61444
C
Helvetica Black Oblique 2
1
5
24580
1
5
61444
C
Palatino Roman
0
0
24591
0
0
61455
B
Palatino Italic
1
0
24591
1
0
61455
B
Palatino Bold
0
3
24591
0
3
61455
B
Palatino Bold Italic
1
3
24591
1
3
61455
B
1
0
45099
1
0
61483
B
0
0
45101
0
0
61485
CourierPS
0
0
24579
B
CourierPS Oblique
1
0
24579
B
CourierPS Bold
0
3
24579
B
CourierPS Bold Oblique
1
3
24579
B
Times Roman
0
0
25093
B
Times Italic
1
0
25093
B
Times Bold
0
3
25093
B
Times Bold Italic
1
3
25093
B
0
0
45358
Helvetica Light Oblique
Helvetica Black
2
2
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
ITC Zapf Dingbats
SymbolPS
1
3
3
Notice the values for forward compatibility and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold.
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
3
For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17.
2
2-25
PCL
Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode to enable a
Hewlett-Packard Company’s driver to select the forward compatibility fonts. The
Lexmark PCL driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches
the printer to this mode. The PCL (PJL) commands to switch the default compatibility
modes are:
Forward
ESC
%-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL6
@PJL RESET
Backward
ESC
%-12345X
ESC
%-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL5
@PJL RESET
ESC
%-12345X
Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark C510(n)
To determine which symbol sets a font or typeface from Table 2-4 or Table 2-5
supports, see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the
following tables.
Table 2-11: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts
✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported
by the fonts in the font group.
Symbol Set
Symbol
Set ID
Roman Extension
0E
Roman-8
8U
PC-8 Code Page 437
Font Group
PJL Value
A
B
C
D
✓
✓
✓
✓
ROMAN8
✓
✓
✓
✓
10U
PC8
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
11U
PC8DN
✓
✓
PC-850 Multilingual
12U
PC850
✓
✓
PC-852 Latin 2
17U
PC852
✓
✓
PC-8 Turkish (437T)
9T
PC8TK
✓
✓
PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
26U
✓
✓
PC-1004 OS/2
9J
✓
✓
Legal
1U
LEGAL
✓
✓
DeskTop
7J
DESKTOP
✓
✓
MC Text
12J
✓
✓
✓
PS Text
10J
✓
✓
✓
PSTEXT
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
2-26
PCL
Table 2-11: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts (Continued)
✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported
by the fonts in the font group.
Font Group
Symbol Set
Symbol
Set ID
PJL Value
A
B
PS Math
5M
PSMATH
✓
✓
Math-8
8M
MATH8
✓
✓
Pi Font
15U
PIFONT
✓
✓
Microsoft Publishing
6J
MSPUBL
✓
✓
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
9U
WIN30
✓
Windows Latin 1
19U
WINL1
Windows Latin 2
9E
Windows Latin 5
5T
Windows Latin 6 (Baltic)
19L
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
0N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
C
D
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
WINL2
✓
✓
WINL5
✓
✓
✓
✓
ISOL1
✓
✓
2N
ISOL2
✓
✓
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
5N
ISOL5
✓
✓
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
6N
✓
✓
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
9N
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
13U
✓
✓
✓
✓
Roman-9
4U
✓
✓
✓
✓
Ventura International
13J
VNINTL
✓
✓
✓
✓
Ventura US
14J
VNUS
✓
✓
✓
✓
Ventura Math
6M
VNMATH
✓
✓
PC-861 Iceland
21U
✓
✓
PC-863 Canadian French
23U
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-865 Nordic
25U
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-860 Portugal
20U
✓
✓
✓
✓
ABICOMP International
14P
✓
✓
✓
✓
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
13P
✓
✓
✓
✓
PC-8 PC Nova
27Q
✓
✓
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
16U
✓
✓
Turkish-8
8T
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
2-27
PCL
Table 2-11: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts (Continued)
✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported
by the fonts in the font group.
Font Group
Symbol Set
Symbol
Set ID
PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
18U
✓
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
24Q
✓
Windows Cyrillic
9R
✓
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
10N
✓
PC-866 Cyrillic
3R
✓
PC-855 Cyrillic
10R
✓
Russian-GOST
12R
✓
PC-8 Bulgarian
13R
✓
Ukrainian
14R
✓
Windows Greek
9G
✓
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
12N
✓
PC-869 Greece
11G
✓
PC-851 Greece
10G
✓
PC-8 Latin/Greek
12G
✓
Greek-8
8G
✓
PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
14G
✓
PJL Value
A
B
Table 2-12: Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol Set
Symbol
Set ID
Fonts
PC-911 Katakana
3K
Line Printer 16
Symbol
19M
Symbol, SymbolPS
Wingdings
579L
Wingding
POSTNET Bar Code
15Y
POSTNET Bar Code
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
9L
ITC Zapf Dingbats
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
10L
ITC Zapf Dingbats
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
14L
ITC Zapf Dingbats
C39 Bar Code (Uppercase)
9Y
Code 3 of 9
C39 Bar Code (plus Lowercase) 109Y
Code 3 of 9
C
D
✓
2-28
PCL
Table 2-12: Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol
Set ID
Fonts
C39 Bar Code (plus Human
Readable)
209Y
Code 3 of 9
OCR-A
0O
OCR-A
OCR-B
1O
OCR-B
Symbol Set
All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following
19 symbol sets.
Table 2-13: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol
Set ID
Symbol Set
1E
ISO 4: United Kingdom
0U
ISO 6: ASCII
0S
ISO 11: Swedish for Names
0I
ISO 15: Italian
2S
ISO 17: Spanish
1G
ISO 21: German
0D
ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1
1F
ISO 69: French
2U
ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version)
0F
ISO 25: French
0G
ISO: HP German
0K
ISO 14: JIS ASCII
2K
ISO 57: Chinese
3S
ISO 10: Swedish
1S
ISO: HP Spanish
6S
ISO 85: Spanish
4S
ISO 16: Portuguese
5S
ISO 84: Portuguese
1D
ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2
2-29
PCL
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E230,
E232
Your printer supports 19 fonts in PCL emulation, including 17 scalable fonts and two
bitmapped fonts.
Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include
symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. Print the font
sample pages to view the specific parameters for each font. For scalable fonts, you
can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped fonts, you
must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You can print the
font sample pages using a PJL command (see “LPRINTPCLFONTS” on page 3-83).
A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for
each of these characters. Your printer has 83 resident symbol sets. The tables
beginning on page 2-32 show the symbol sets available for each font in
PCL emulation. Not all fonts support all symbol sets.
You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the
number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or
18 from font identifiers R0 or R18. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning
on page 2-32 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use
the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or
set as the default.
Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER,
PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See “Table 3-5: Common Variables for
PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands.
2-30
PCL
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the
Lexmark E230, E232
Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward
compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s
LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the
Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers.
Standard PCL Emulation Fonts
The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility mode for each of the 14 standard PCL emulation fonts. Since the font
selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical,
they are listed together in the table.
Table 2-14: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name
Spacing
Style
Weight
Typeface
Courier
0
0
0
4099
Courier Italic
0
1
0
4099
Courier Bold
0
0
3
4099
Courier Bold Italic
0
1
3
4099
Times New Roman
1
0
0
16901
Times New Roman Italic
1
1
0
16901
Times New Roman Bold
1
0
3
16901
Times New Roman BoldItalic
1
1
3
16901
Arial
1
0
0
16602
Arial Italic
1
1
0
16602
Arial Bold
1
0
3
16602
Arial Bold Italic
1
1
3
16602
Line Printer 16
0
0
0
0
POSTNET Barcode 1
1
0
0
0
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
2-31
PCL
Specialty PCL Fonts
The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility mode for each of the five specialty PCL fonts. Since the font selection
commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are
listed together in the table.
Table 2-15: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name
Spacing
Style
Weight
Typeface
C39 Narrow 1
1
0
0
32774
1
0
0
32772
C39 Regular
C39 Wide
1
1
1
0
0
32777
1
0
0
0
23584
OCR-B 1
0
0
0
23590
OCR-A
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
2-32
PCL
Selecting Symbol Sets for Lexmark E230, E232
To determine if a font or typeface supports a symbol set, see the complete listing of
PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the following tables: “Table 2-16: PCL
Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1” on page 2-32, “Table 2-17: PCL Emulation Symbol
Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek” on page 2-34, and “Table 2-18: PCL
Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials” on page 2-35.
Table 2-16: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
PC-860 Portugal
PC-861 Iceland
PC-863 Canadian French
PC-865 Nordic
PC-1004 OS/2
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
ABICOMP International
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Extension
PS Text
12U PC850
13U PC858
20U
21U
23U
25U
9J
13P
14P
8U
ROMAN8
4U
0E
10J
Ventura International
PC-8, Code Page 437
ISOL9
9N
11U PC8DN
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
10U PC8
Windows 98 Latin 1
ISOL1
0N
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Line Printer 16
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
DESKTOP Desk Top
VNINTL
VNUS
7J
13J
14J
PSTEXT
12J
Ventura US
Courier Italic
MC Text
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PJL Value
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
WIN30
9U
Courier
Typeface / Symbol Set
Legal
LEGAL
Symbol Set ID
1U
19U WINL1
Latin 1
2-33
PCL
Table 2-16: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
PC-860 Portugal
PC-861 Iceland
PC-863 Canadian French
PC-865 Nordic
PC-1004 OS/2
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
ABICOMP International
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Extension
PS Text
12U PC850
13U PC858
20U
21U
23U
25U
9J
13P
14P
8U
ROMAN8
4U
0E
10J
Ventura International
PC-8, Code Page 437
ISOL9
9N
11U PC8DN
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
10U PC8
Windows 98 Latin 1
ISOL1
0N
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Regular
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Wide
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
OCR-A
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
OCR-B
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
DESKTOP Desk Top
VNINTL
VNUS
7J
13J
14J
PSTEXT
12J
Ventura US
C39 Narrow
MC Text
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
PJL Value
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
WIN30
9U
POSTNET Barcode
Typeface / Symbol Set
Legal
LEGAL
Symbol Set ID
1U
19U WINL1
Latin 1
2-34
PCL
Table 2-17: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Turkish-8
Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic)
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
Windows 98 Cyrillic
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
Russian-GOST
PC-8 Bulgarian
Ukrainian
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
PC-8 Latin/Greek
PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
Greek-8
8T
19L
6N
26U
9R
10N
3R
10R
12R
13R
14R
9G
12N
11G
10G
12G
14G
8G
PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T)
18U
9T
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
ISOL5
5N
16U
Windows 98 Latin 5
5T
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 PC Nova
WINL5
27Q
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
24Q
Greek
ISOL2
PC-852 Latin 2
Cyrillic
Symbol Set ID
2N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
Latin 6
WINL2
17U PC852
Latin 5
9E
Typeface / Symbol Set
Windows 98 Latin 2
Latin 2
Courier
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman
BoldItalic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Line Printer 16
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
POSTNET Barcode
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Narrow
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Regular
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Wide
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
OCR-A
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
OCR-B
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
PJL Value
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
2-35
PCL
Table 2-18: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials
14L
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
10L
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
9L
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
579L
Wingdings
19M
Symbol
C39 Bar Code
(plus Human Readable)
209Y
C39 Bar Code
(plus Lower Case)
109Y
C39 Bar Code
(Upper Case)
1O
Courier
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Courier Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Courier Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Courier Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times New Roman
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times New Roman Italic
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times New Roman Bold
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times New Roman BoldItalic
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Arial
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Arial Italic
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Arial Bold
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Arial Bold Italic
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Line Printer 16
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
POSTNET Barcode
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
C39 Narrow
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
C39 Regular
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
C39 Wide
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
OCR-A
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
OCR-B
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
9Y
0O
OCR-B
15Y
OCR-A
3K
POSTNET Barcode
6J
PC-911 Katakana
15U
MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing
Pi font
8M
PIFONT
Math-8
5M
MATH8
Symbol Set ID
6M
PJL Value
PSMATH PS Math
Typeface / Symbol Set
VNMATH Ventura Math
Specials
2-36
PCL
All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following
19 symbol sets.
Table 2-19: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol Set ID
Symbol Set / Typeface
1E
ISO 4: United Kingdom
0U
ISO 6: ASCII
0S
ISO 11: Swedish for Names
0I
ISO 15: Italian
2S
ISO 17: Spanish
1G
ISO 21: German
0D
ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1
1F
ISO 69: French
2U
ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version)
0F
ISO 25: French
0G
ISO: HP German
0K
ISO 14: JIS ASCII
2K
ISO 57: Chinese
3S
ISO 10: Swedish
1S
ISO: HP Spanish
6S
ISO 85: Spanish
4S
ISO 16: Portuguese
5S
ISO 84: Portuguese
1D
ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2
2-37
PCL
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark
E234(n), E330, E332n
Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation, including 89 scalable fonts and
two bitmapped fonts.
Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include
symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. For scalable
fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped
fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You
can print the font sample pages using a PJL command (see “LPRINTPCLFONTS” on
page 3-83), or through MarkVision Professional (network models only). Refer to your
printer user documentation for more information.
A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for
each of these characters. Your printer supports 88 resident symbol sets. The tables
beginning on page 2-43 show the symbol sets available for each font in
PCL emulation. Not all fonts support all symbol sets.
You can select a font as the PCL emulation default through MarkVision Professional
(network models only). Refer to your printer user documentation for more information.
The fonts are divided into three major groups. The first 47 fonts (R0 to R46) shown on
the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts. The next 39 fonts (R47
to R85) are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for PostScript emulation,
but now also work in the PCL emulation. The final five fonts (R86 to R90) are
additional specialty PCL fonts. For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, see
Table 2-20 on page 2-38. For a list of the 39 Type 1 fonts, see Table 2-21 on
page 2-40. For a list of the five additional specialty PCL fonts, see Table 2-22 on
page 2-42. These tables list both the forward and backward compatibility font
selection commands. For more information on forward and backward compatibility,
see page 2-38. For more information on selecting symbol sets, see page 2-43.
For compatibility purposes, you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job
Language (PJL) LTYPE1FONTS command. The factory default for these fonts is
Enabled. See LTYPE1FONTS on page 3-47 for more information.
You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the
number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or
76 from font identifiers R0 or R76. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning
2-38
PCL
on page 2-43 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use
the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or
set as the default.
Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER,
PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See “Table 3-5: Common Variables for
PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands.
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the
Lexmark E234(n), E330, and E332n
Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward
compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s
LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the
Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers.
Standard PCL Emulation Fonts
The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility mode for each of the 47standard PCL emulation fonts. Since the font
selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical,
they are listed together in the table.
Table 2-20: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name
Spacing
Style
Weight
Typeface
Courier
0
0
0
4099
Courier Italic
0
1
0
4099
Courier Bold
0
0
3
4099
Courier Bold Italic
0
1
3
4099
CG Times
1
0
0
4101
CG Times Italic
1
1
0
4101
CG Times Bold
1
0
3
4101
CG Times Bold Italic
1
1
3
4101
Univers Medium
1
0
0
4148
Univers Medium Italic
1
1
0
4148
Univers Bold
1
0
3
4148
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
2-39
PCL
Table 2-20: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued)
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name
Spacing
Style
Weight
Typeface
Univers Bold Italic
1
1
3
4148
Times New Roman
1
0
0
16901
Times New Roman Italic
1
1
0
16901
Times New Roman Bold
1
0
3
16901
Times New Roman BoldItalic
1
1
3
16901
Arial
1
0
0
16602
Arial Italic
1
1
0
16602
Arial Bold
1
0
3
16602
Arial Bold Italic
1
1
3
16602
Letter Gothic
0
0
0
4102
Letter Gothic Italic
0
1
0
4102
Letter Gothic Bold
0
0
3
4102
Univers Condensed Medium
1
4
0
4148
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
1
5
0
4148
Univers Condensed Bold
1
4
3
4148
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
1
5
3
4148
Garamond Antiqua
1
0
0
4197
Garamond Kursiv
1
1
0
4197
Garamond Halbfett
1
0
3
4197
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
1
1
3
4197
CG Omega
1
0
0
4113
CG Omega Italic
1
1
0
4113
CG Omega Bold
1
0
3
4113
CG Omega Bold Italic
1
1
3
4113
Antique Olive
1
0
0
4168
Antique Olive Italic
1
1
0
4168
Antique Olive Bold
1
0
3
4168
Albertus Medium
1
0
1
4362
Albertus Extra Bold
1
0
4
4362
Clarendon Condensed Bold
1
4
3
4140
Marigold
1
0
0
4297
Coronet
1
1
0
4116
Line Printer 16
0
0
0
0
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
2-40
PCL
Table 2-20: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued)
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name
Spacing
Style
Weight
Typeface
1
0
0
0
Wingdings
1
0
0
31402
Symbol
1
0
0
16686
POSTNET Barcode
1
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
Type 1 Fonts
Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different font selection parameters in the forward and
backward compatibility modes and 9 of the fonts work only in the forward compatibility
mode. With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software
program selects these fonts.
The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font. All Type 1 fonts are
supported by both the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050 and the
Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted.
Table 2-21: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward Compatibility Mode
Backward Compatibility Mode
Type 1 Font name
Spacing Style
Weight
Typeface Spacing Style
Weight
Typeface
Helvetica
1
0
0
24580
1
0
0
61444
Helvetica Italic
1
1
0
24580
1
1
0
61444
Helvetica Bold
1
0
3
24580
1
0
3
61444
Helvetica Bold Italic
1
1
3
24580
1
1
3
61444
Helvetica Narrow
1
4
0
24580
1
4
0
61444
Helvetica Narrow Italic
1
5
0
24580
1
5
0
61444
Helvetica Narrow Bold
1
4
3
24580
1
4
3
61444
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
1
5
3
24580
1
5
3
61444
Palatino Roman
1
0
0
24591
1
0
0
61455
Palatino Italic
1
1
0
24591
1
1
0
61455
Palatino Bold
1
0
3
24591
1
0
3
61455
Palatino Bold Italic
1
1
3
24591
1
1
3
61455
1
Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold.
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
3 This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers.
2
2-41
PCL
Table 2-21: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued)
Forward Compatibility Mode
Backward Compatibility Mode
Type 1 Font name
Spacing Style
Weight
Typeface Spacing Style
Weight
Typeface
ITC Bookman Light
1
0
-3
24623
1
0
-3
61487
ITC Bookman Light Italic
1
1
-3
24623
1
1
-3
61487
ITC Bookman Demi
1
0
2
24623
1
0
2
61487
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
1
1
2
24623
1
1
2
61487
ITC Avant Garde Book
1
0
0
24607
1
0
0
61471
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
1
1
0
24607
1
1
0
61471
1
0
2
24607
1
0
3
61471
1
1
2
24607
1
1
3
61471
Century Schoolbook Roman
1
0
0
24703
1
0
0
61463
Century Schoolbook Italic
1
1
0
24703
1
1
0
61463
Century Schoolbook Bold
1
0
3
24703
1
0
3
61463
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
1
1
3
24703
1
1
3
61463
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
1
1
0
45099
1
1
0
61483
CourierPS 3
0
0
0
24579
0
1
0
24579
0
0
3
24579
0
1
3
24579
Times Roman 3
1
0
0
25093
Times Italic 3
1
1
0
25093
1
0
3
25093
1
1
3
25093
Helvetica Light 2
1
0
-3
24580
1
0
-3
61444
Helvetica Light Oblique 2
1
1
-3
24580
1
1
-3
61444
1
0
5
24580
1
0
5
61444
1
1
5
24580
1
1
5
61444
SymbolPS 3
1
0
0
45358
ITC Zapf Dingbats
1
0
0
45101
1
0
0
61485
ITC Avant Garde Demi 1
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
CourierPS Oblique
CourierPS Bold
3
3
CourierPS Bold Oblique
Times Bold
3
Times Bold Italic
Helvetica Black
3
2
Helvetica Black Oblique
1
3
2
1
Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold.
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
3 This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers.
2
2-42
PCL
Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode to enable a
Hewlett-Packard Company’s driver to select the forward compatibility fonts. The
Lexmark PCL driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches
the printer to this mode. The PCL (PJL) commands to switch the default compatibility
modes are:
Forward
ESC
%-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL6
@PJL RESET
Backward
ESC
%-12345X
ESC
%-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL5
@PJL RESET
ESC
%-12345X
Specialty PCL Fonts
The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility mode for each of the five specialty PCL fonts. Since the font selection
commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are
listed together in the table.
Table 2-22: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name
Spacing
Style
Weight
Typeface
1
0
0
32774
C39 Regular 1
1
0
0
32772
C39 Wide 1
C39 Narrow
1
1
0
0
32777
OCR-A
1
0
0
0
23584
OCR-B
1
0
0
0
23590
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
2-43
PCL
Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, and E332n
To determine if a font or typeface supports a symbol set, see the complete listing of
PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the following tables: “Table 2-23: PCL
Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1” on page 2-43, “Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol
Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek” on page 2-48, and “Table 2-25: PCL
Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials” on page 2-53.
Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
PC-860 Portugal
PC-861 Iceland
PC-863 Canadian French
PC-865 Nordic
PC-1004 OS/2
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
ABICOMP International
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Extension
PS Text
12U PC850
13U PC858
20U
21U
23U
25U
9J
13P
14P
8U
ROMAN8
4U
0E
10J
Ventura International
PC-8, Code Page 437
ISOL9
9N
11U PC8DN
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
10U PC8
Windows 98 Latin 1
ISOL1
0N
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Times
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Times Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Times Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Times Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Medium
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Medium Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DESKTOP Desk Top
VNINTL
VNUS
7J
13J
14J
PSTEXT
12J
Ventura US
Courier Italic
MC Text
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PJL Value
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
WIN30
9U
Courier
Typeface / Symbol Set
Legal
LEGAL
Symbol Set ID
1U
19U WINL1
Latin 1
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
this symbol set.
2-44
PCL
Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
PC-860 Portugal
PC-861 Iceland
PC-863 Canadian French
PC-865 Nordic
PC-1004 OS/2
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
ABICOMP International
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Extension
PS Text
12U PC850
13U PC858
20U
21U
23U
25U
9J
13P
14P
8U
ROMAN8
4U
0E
10J
Ventura International
PC-8, Code Page 437
ISOL9
9N
11U PC8DN
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
10U PC8
Windows 98 Latin 1
ISOL1
0N
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Arial Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Letter Gothic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Letter Gothic Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Letter Gothic Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Condensed Medium
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Condensed Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Garamond Antiqua
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Garamond Kursiv
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Garamond Halbfett
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Omega
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DESKTOP Desk Top
VNINTL
VNUS
7J
13J
14J
PSTEXT
12J
Ventura US
Times New Roman Italic
MC Text
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PJL Value
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
WIN30
9U
Times New Roman
Typeface / Symbol Set
Legal
LEGAL
Symbol Set ID
1U
19U WINL1
Latin 1
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
this symbol set.
2-45
PCL
Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
PC-860 Portugal
PC-861 Iceland
PC-863 Canadian French
PC-865 Nordic
PC-1004 OS/2
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
ABICOMP International
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Extension
PS Text
12U PC850
13U PC858
20U
21U
23U
25U
9J
13P
14P
8U
ROMAN8
4U
0E
10J
Ventura International
PC-8, Code Page 437
ISOL9
9N
11U PC8DN
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
10U PC8
Windows 98 Latin 1
ISOL1
0N
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Omega Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Antique Olive
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Antique Olive Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Antique Olive Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Albertus Medium
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Albertus Extra Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Clarendon Condensed Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Marigold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Coronet
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Narrow
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Narrow Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Narrow Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Palatino Roman
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DESKTOP Desk Top
VNINTL
VNUS
7J
13J
14J
PSTEXT
12J
Ventura US
CG Omega Bold
MC Text
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PJL Value
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
WIN30
9U
CG Omega Italic
Typeface / Symbol Set
Legal
LEGAL
Symbol Set ID
1U
19U WINL1
Latin 1
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
this symbol set.
2-46
PCL
Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
PC-860 Portugal
PC-861 Iceland
PC-863 Canadian French
PC-865 Nordic
PC-1004 OS/2
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
ABICOMP International
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Extension
PS Text
12U PC850
13U PC858
20U
21U
23U
25U
9J
13P
14P
8U
ROMAN8
4U
0E
10J
Ventura International
PC-8, Code Page 437
ISOL9
9N
11U PC8DN
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
10U PC8
Windows 98 Latin 1
ISOL1
0N
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Palatino Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Bookman Light
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Bookman Light Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Bookman Demi
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Avant Garde Book
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Avant Garde Demi
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Century Schoolbook Roman
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Century Schoolbook Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Century Schoolbook Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CourierPS
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CourierPS Oblique
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CourierPS Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CourierPS Bold Oblique
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DESKTOP Desk Top
VNINTL
VNUS
7J
13J
14J
PSTEXT
12J
Ventura US
Palatino Bold
MC Text
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PJL Value
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
WIN30
9U
Palatino Italic
Typeface / Symbol Set
Legal
LEGAL
Symbol Set ID
1U
19U WINL1
Latin 1
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
this symbol set.
2-47
PCL
Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
PC-860 Portugal
PC-861 Iceland
PC-863 Canadian French
PC-865 Nordic
PC-1004 OS/2
ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal
ABICOMP International
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Extension
PS Text
12U PC850
13U PC858
20U
21U
23U
25U
9J
13P
14P
8U
ROMAN8
4U
0E
10J
Ventura International
PC-8, Code Page 437
ISOL9
9N
11U PC8DN
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
10U PC8
Windows 98 Latin 1
ISOL1
0N
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Light
✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Light Oblique
✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Black
✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓
Helvetica Black Oblique
✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓
Line Printer 16
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
POSTNET Barcode
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Narrow
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Regular
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Wide
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
OCR-A
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
OCR-B
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓
Wingdings
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Symbol
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
SymbolPS
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Zapf Dingbats
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
DESKTOP Desk Top
VNINTL
VNUS
7J
13J
14J
PSTEXT
12J
Ventura US
Times Italic
MC Text
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PJL Value
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
WIN30
9U
Times Roman
Typeface / Symbol Set
Legal
LEGAL
Symbol Set ID
1U
19U WINL1
Latin 1
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
this symbol set.
2-48
PCL
Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Turkish-8
Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic)
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
Windows 98 Cyrillic
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
Russian-GOST
PC-8 Bulgarian
Ukrainian
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
PC-8 Latin/Greek
PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
Greek-8
8T
19L
6N
26U
9R
10N
3R
10R
12R
13R
14R
9G
12N
11G
10G
12G
14G
8G
PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
18U
PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T)
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
ISOL5
5N
16U
Windows 98 Latin 5
5T
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 PC Nova
WINL5
27Q
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
24Q
Greek
Symbol Set ID
Courier
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Courier Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Times
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Times Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Times Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CG Times Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Medium
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Medium Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Univers Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Times New Roman
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Times New Roman Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Times New Roman Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Times New Roman
BoldItalic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Arial
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Arial Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Arial Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
PJL Value
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol
Set.
9T
ISOL2
PC-852 Latin 2
Cyrillic
2N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
Latin 6
WINL2
17U PC852
Latin 5
9E
Typeface / Symbol Set
Windows 98 Latin 2
Latin 2
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font
is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set.
2-49
PCL
Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Turkish-8
Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic)
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
Windows 98 Cyrillic
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
Russian-GOST
PC-8 Bulgarian
Ukrainian
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
PC-8 Latin/Greek
PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
Greek-8
8T
19L
6N
26U
9R
10N
3R
10R
12R
13R
14R
9G
12N
11G
10G
12G
14G
8G
PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
18U
PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T)
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
ISOL5
5N
16U
Windows 98 Latin 5
5T
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 PC Nova
WINL5
27Q
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
24Q
Greek
Symbol Set ID
Arial Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Letter Gothic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Letter Gothic Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Letter Gothic Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Univers Condensed
Medium
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Univers Condensed
Medium Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
PJL Value
9T
ISOL2
PC-852 Latin 2
Cyrillic
2N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
Latin 6
WINL2
17U PC852
Latin 5
9E
Typeface / Symbol Set
Windows 98 Latin 2
Latin 2
Univers Condensed Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Univers Condensed Bold
Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Garamond Antiqua
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Garamond Kursiv
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Garamond Halbfett
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Garamond Kursiv
Halbfett
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
CG Omega
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
CG Omega Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
CG Omega Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
CG Omega Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Antique Olive
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Antique Olive Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol
Set.
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font
is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set.
2-50
PCL
Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Turkish-8
Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic)
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
Windows 98 Cyrillic
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
Russian-GOST
PC-8 Bulgarian
Ukrainian
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
PC-8 Latin/Greek
PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
Greek-8
8T
19L
6N
26U
9R
10N
3R
10R
12R
13R
14R
9G
12N
11G
10G
12G
14G
8G
PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
18U
PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T)
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
ISOL5
5N
16U
Windows 98 Latin 5
5T
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 PC Nova
WINL5
27Q
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
24Q
Greek
Symbol Set ID
Antique Olive Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Albertus Medium
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Albertus Extra Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Clarendon Condensed
Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Marigold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Coronet
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Narrow
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Narrow Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Narrow Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Palatino Roman
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Palatino Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Palatino Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Palatino Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Bookman Light
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Bookman Light Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
PJL Value
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol
Set.
9T
ISOL2
PC-852 Latin 2
Cyrillic
2N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
Latin 6
WINL2
17U PC852
Latin 5
9E
Typeface / Symbol Set
Windows 98 Latin 2
Latin 2
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font
is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set.
2-51
PCL
Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Turkish-8
Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic)
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
Windows 98 Cyrillic
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
Russian-GOST
PC-8 Bulgarian
Ukrainian
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
PC-8 Latin/Greek
PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
Greek-8
8T
19L
6N
26U
9R
10N
3R
10R
12R
13R
14R
9G
12N
11G
10G
12G
14G
8G
PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
18U
PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T)
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
ISOL5
5N
16U
Windows 98 Latin 5
5T
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 PC Nova
WINL5
27Q
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
24Q
Greek
Symbol Set ID
ITC Bookman Demi
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
PJL Value
9T
ISOL2
PC-852 Latin 2
Cyrillic
2N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
Latin 6
WINL2
17U PC852
Latin 5
9E
Typeface / Symbol Set
Windows 98 Latin 2
Latin 2
ITC Bookman Demi Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Avant Garde Book
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Avant Garde Book
Oblique
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Avant Garde Demi
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Avant Garde Demi
Oblique
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Century Schoolbook
Roman
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Century Schoolbook
Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Century Schoolbook
Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Century Schoolbook
Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Zapf Chancery
Medium Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
CourierPS
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
CourierPS Oblique
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
CourierPS Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
CourierPS Bold Oblique
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Times Roman
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol
Set.
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font
is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set.
2-52
PCL
Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Turkish-8
Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic)
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
Windows 98 Cyrillic
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
Russian-GOST
PC-8 Bulgarian
Ukrainian
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
PC-8 Latin/Greek
PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
Greek-8
8T
19L
6N
26U
9R
10N
3R
10R
12R
13R
14R
9G
12N
11G
10G
12G
14G
8G
PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
18U
PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T)
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
ISOL5
5N
16U
Windows 98 Latin 5
5T
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 PC Nova
WINL5
27Q
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
24Q
Greek
Symbol Set ID
Times Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Times Bold
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Times Bold Italic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Light
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Light Oblique
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Black
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Helvetica Black Oblique
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Line Printer 16
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
POSTNET Barcode
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Narrow
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Regular
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
C39 Wide
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
OCR-A
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
OCR-B
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Wingdings
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
Symbol
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
SymbolPS
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
ITC Zapf Dingbats
✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
PJL Value
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol
Set.
9T
ISOL2
PC-852 Latin 2
Cyrillic
2N
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
Latin 6
WINL2
17U PC852
Latin 5
9E
Typeface / Symbol Set
Windows 98 Latin 2
Latin 2
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font
is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set.
2-53
PCL
Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials
14L
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
10L
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
9L
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
579L
Wingdings
19M
Symbol
C39 Bar Code
(plus Human Readable)
209Y
C39 Bar Code
(plus Lower Case)
109Y
C39 Bar Code
(Upper Case)
1O
Courier
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Courier Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Courier Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Courier Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CG Times
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CG Times Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CG Times Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CG Times Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Univers Medium
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Univers Medium Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Univers Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Univers Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times New Roman
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times New Roman Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times New Roman Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times New Roman BoldItalic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Arial
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Arial Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Arial Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
9Y
0O
OCR-B
15Y
OCR-A
3K
POSTNET Barcode
6J
PC-911 Katakana
15U
MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing
Pi font
8M
PIFONT
Math-8
5M
MATH8
Symbol Set ID
6M
PJL Value
PSMATH PS Math
Typeface / Symbol Set
VNMATH Ventura Math
Specials
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
this symbol set.
2-54
PCL
Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
14L
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
10L
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
9L
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
579L
Wingdings
19M
Symbol
C39 Bar Code
(plus Human Readable)
209Y
C39 Bar Code
(plus Lower Case)
109Y
C39 Bar Code
(Upper Case)
1O
Arial Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Letter Gothic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Letter Gothic Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Letter Gothic Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Univers Condensed Medium
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Univers Condensed Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Garamond Antiqua
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Garamond Kursiv
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Garamond Halbfett
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CG Omega
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CG Omega Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CG Omega Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CG Omega Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Antique Olive
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Antique Olive Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Antique Olive Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Albertus Medium
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Albertus Extra Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
9Y
0O
OCR-B
15Y
OCR-A
3K
POSTNET Barcode
6J
PC-911 Katakana
15U
MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing
Pi font
8M
PIFONT
Math-8
5M
MATH8
Symbol Set ID
6M
PJL Value
PSMATH PS Math
Typeface / Symbol Set
VNMATH Ventura Math
Specials
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
this symbol set.
2-55
PCL
Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
14L
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
10L
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
9L
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
579L
Wingdings
19M
Symbol
C39 Bar Code
(plus Human Readable)
209Y
C39 Bar Code
(plus Lower Case)
109Y
C39 Bar Code
(Upper Case)
1O
Clarendon Condensed Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Marigold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Coronet
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Narrow
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Narrow Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Narrow Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Palatino Roman
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Palatino Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Palatino Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Palatino Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Bookman Light
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Bookman Light Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Bookman Demi
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Avant Garde Book
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
9Y
0O
OCR-B
15Y
OCR-A
3K
POSTNET Barcode
6J
PC-911 Katakana
15U
MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing
Pi font
8M
PIFONT
Math-8
5M
MATH8
Symbol Set ID
6M
PJL Value
PSMATH PS Math
Typeface / Symbol Set
VNMATH Ventura Math
Specials
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
this symbol set.
2-56
PCL
Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
14L
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
10L
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
9L
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
579L
Wingdings
19M
Symbol
C39 Bar Code
(plus Human Readable)
209Y
C39 Bar Code
(plus Lower Case)
109Y
C39 Bar Code
(Upper Case)
1O
ITC Avant Garde Demi
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Century Schoolbook Roman
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Century Schoolbook Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Century Schoolbook Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CourierPS
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CourierPS Oblique
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CourierPS Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
CourierPS Bold Oblique
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times Roman
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times Bold
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Times Bold Italic
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Light
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Light Oblique
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Black
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Helvetica Black Oblique
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Line Printer 16
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
POSTNET Barcode
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
9Y
0O
OCR-B
15Y
OCR-A
3K
POSTNET Barcode
6J
PC-911 Katakana
15U
MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing
Pi font
8M
PIFONT
Math-8
5M
MATH8
Symbol Set ID
6M
PJL Value
PSMATH PS Math
Typeface / Symbol Set
VNMATH Ventura Math
Specials
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
this symbol set.
2-57
PCL
Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
14L
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
10L
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
9L
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
579L
Wingdings
19M
Symbol
C39 Bar Code
(plus Human Readable)
209Y
C39 Bar Code
(plus Lower Case)
109Y
C39 Bar Code
(Upper Case)
1O
C39 Narrow
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
C39 Regular
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
C39 Wide
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
OCR-A
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
OCR-B
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
Wingdings
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
Symbol
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
SymbolPS
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
ITC Zapf Dingbats
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
9Y
0O
OCR-B
15Y
OCR-A
3K
POSTNET Barcode
6J
PC-911 Katakana
15U
MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing
Pi font
8M
PIFONT
Math-8
5M
MATH8
Symbol Set ID
6M
PJL Value
PSMATH PS Math
Typeface / Symbol Set
VNMATH Ventura Math
Specials
Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode,
this font is not supported or this font does not support
this symbol set.
2-58
PCL
All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following
19 symbol sets.
Table 2-26: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol Set ID
Symbol Set / Typeface
1E
ISO 4: United Kingdom
0U
ISO 6: ASCII
0S
ISO 11: Swedish for Names
0I
ISO 15: Italian
2S
ISO 17: Spanish
1G
ISO 21: German
0D
ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1
1F
ISO 69: French
2U
ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version)
0F
ISO 25: French
0G
ISO: HP German
0K
ISO 14: JIS ASCII
2K
ISO 57: Chinese
3S
ISO 10: Swedish
1S
ISO: HP Spanish
6S
ISO 85: Spanish
4S
ISO 16: Portuguese
5S
ISO 84: Portuguese
1D
ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2
2-59
PCL
Command Structure
This section introduces the different types of PCL emulation commands and their
structure, or syntax. It also demonstrates how you can link commands to abbreviate
them.
Control Codes
Control Codes are single-character instructions.
Table 2-27: Control Codes
Code
Dec
Hex
Function
Result
BS
8
08
Backspace
Moves the cursor toward the left margin one horizontal space equal to
the last printed character
HT
9
09
Horizontal Tab
Moves the cursor to the next defined tab stop
LF
10
0A
Line Feed
Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position on the following line
as determined by either the Vertical Motion Index (VMI) or Set Line
Spacing command
FF
12
0C
Form Feed
Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position at the top margin of
the next page
CR
13
0D
Carriage Return
Moves the cursor to the left margin
SP
32
20
Space
Moves the cursor to the right one column
SI
15
0F
Primary Font
Selects the primary font
SO
14
0E
Secondary Font
Selects the secondary font
Commands
PCL commands are multibyte strings (also known as “escape sequences”) that begin
with the Escape control code (ESC, ←, decimal 27, or hexadecimal 1B). The ESC control
code notifies the printer that the characters that follow are to be interpreted as part of
a command and are not control codes or data to be printed.
2-60
PCL
Command Structure
Most PCL emulation commands have the following structure:
ESC
& a # C
Spaces have been added to this example for readability. The command parameter
variables are indicated by a number sign (#).
Table 2-28: Description of Command Structure
Element
Description
ESC
Decimal 27 or hex 1B
&
Parameterized character from American National Standard Code for Information
Interchange (ASCII) table (range 33 to 47 decimal)
a
Group character from ASCII table (range 96 to 126 decimal) that specifies a group
type of control
#
Decimal character string value within specified numeric ranges; may be preceded by
a + or – sign and contain a decimal point
C
Termination character from ASCII table (range 64 to 94 decimal)
Command Parameters
A command parameter sets the value for a command. This value stays constant until
either a different value resets the command or a command resets the printer to the
default values. For example, after the printer receives a command that selects a right
margin beginning at column 63, the right margin of each printed page begins at
column 63. That margin stays constant until a right margin command with a different
value resets it or until the printer is reset.
Parameters for each command are listed in the command tables beginning on
page 2-62. Use the Symbol Set Tables to determine the decimal or hexadecimal value
for each parameter. To determine a decimal or hex value, first locate the value of the
parameter you require in the Symbol Set Table. The decimal value is the value shown
in the bottom of the cell or box with that parameter. To find a hex value, go straight up
the grid from the desired parameter and read the value in the top heading. This is the
first character of the hex value. Next, go straight across the grid to the left of the
parameter and read the value in the left column heading. This is the second character
of the hex value. For example, ESC (←) is coded 1B in Hex and 27 in decimal. (Any one
of the three values ←, 1B, or 27 might be used in your application. Read your
documentation to determine which to use.) The example on the following page sets
the pitch of the primary font to 16.66 characters per inch.
2-61
PCL
Example:
ESC
(s16.66H
• Decimal: 27 40 115 49 54 46 54 54 72
•
Hex: 1B 28 73 31 36 2E 36 36 48
Use the plus symbol (+) or the minus symbol (–) to select a position relative to the
current cursor position. For example:
ESC
&a6C
&a+6C
ESC
&a-6C
ESC
Move to horizontal cursor position, column six
Move six columns to the right of the current position
Move six columns to the left of the current position
Linking Commands
You can combine PCL emulation commands by linking them if the first 3 bytes of the
commands are identical. The combined, short form sends the first 3 bytes only once
in the string. To combine commands:
•
Use the first 3 bytes (characters) of the command only once at the start of the
command string.
•
•
Make the last letter of each command in the string lowercase.
Capitalize the last letter of the string.
For example, notice that the first 3 bytes of these two commands are the same:
ESC
(s10H
(s4099T
ESC
Select 10 characters per inch
Select Courier typeface
To combine these two commands, use this form:
ESC
(s10h4099T
which is 3 bytes shorter than the long form:
ESC
(s10HESC(s4099T
You can combine more than two commands; for example, you can add Select Stroke
Weight Bold (ESC(s3B) to the previous two commands:
ESC
(s10h3b4099T
or in the long form:
ESC
(s10HESC(s3BESC(s4099T
2-62
PCL
PCL Emulation Commands
See the following tables for a listing of the commands grouped by function.
To determine which commands your printer supports, see “Table A-1: PCL Emulation
Commands” on page A-1.
PCL Emulation Commands by Function
Table 2-29: Job Control
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
Printer Reset
E
• Prints any partial pages.
• Resets printer environment to defaults.
• Deletes all temporary downloaded resources.
ESC&d#A
0 = Collation off
Number of Collated Copies
Turns collation of pages off or sets the number of collated copies.
1 ... 999 (number of Copies)
&l#X
Number of Copies
# = number of Copies (1 to 32767)
Affects the page currently in process and subsequent pages.
ESC
Default = 1
ESC
&l#S
0
Single-Sided (Default)
1
Duplex Long-Edge Binding
2
Duplex Short-Edge Binding
100 Manual Duplex First Sides
101 Manual Duplex Second Sides
Simplex/Duplex Print
Long-edge or short-edge binding refers to the side of the physical page
where binding occurs.
&l#U
Long-Edge Offset Registration
# = number of Decipoints
Also known as Left Offset.
Range = -32767 to 32767
Adjusts placement of logical page along the width of the physical page.
ESC
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Default = 0
&l#Z
Short-Edge Offset Registration
# = number of Decipoints
Also known as Top Offset.
Range = -32767 to 32767
Adjusts placement of logical page along the length of the physical
page.
ESC
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Default = 0
2-63
PCL
Table 2-29: Job Control (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&u#D
Unit of Measure
Range = (96, 100, 120, 144, 150, 160, 180,
200, 225, 240, 288, 300, 360, 400, 450, 480,
600, 720, 800, 900, 1200, 1440, 1800, 2400,
3600, 7200)
Default = 300 units per inch
Sets the size for the PCL Unit (units per inch).
The Unit of Measure defines the unit used in the following commands:
•
•
•
•
Horizontal Cursor Position by PCL Unit (ESC*p#X)
Vertical Cursor Position by PCL Unit (ESC*p#Y)
Horizontal Rectangle Size by PCL Unit (ESC*c#A)
Vertical Rectangle Size by PCL Unit (ESC*c#B)
The Unit of Measure also affects the rounding of character
escapements and the Horizontal Motion Index.
Note: This command does not affect the interpretation of binary raster
data for bitmapped fonts, raster graphics, or user defined fill patterns.
ESC
%–12345X
Universal Exit Language (UEL) / Start of PJL
This command terminates the current printer language and allows
switching into PJL. For more information, see “UNIVERSAL EXIT
LANGUAGE Command” on page 3-2.
2-64
PCL
Table 2-30: Page Control
Command / Parameters
ESC
&l#A
Set Page Size
Paper
1
2
3
4, 10
6, 11
13, 25
15
26
27
12, 45
46
101
Executive
Letter
Legal
Folio
Ledger (11 x 17)
A5 Paper
Statement
A4 Paper
A3 Paper
B5 Paper
B4 Paper
Custom Paper/Universal
Envelopes
80
81
89
90
91
99, 100
600
ESC
ESC
Monarch 7 3/4
Commercial 10
Commercial 9
DL
C5
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
&l#H
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
21
62
Function / Result
Selects the physical size of the paper, which also determines the
logical page dimensions. See the tables beginning on page 2-4 for the
paper and envelope dimensions your printer supports.
If the requested page size is not in the requested source or if no source
is requested, sources are checked for the requested size in the
following order: multipurpose feeder, tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, tray 5,
and envelope feeder.
Notes:
• When the printer receives the page size command, any partially
formatted pages are printed, and the cursor position and margins
are reset.
• Duplex printing is not supported on any envelope.
• The size loaded in the active source is checked to see if it matches
the requested size. If the multipurpose feeder is configured as
Cassette or Manual, the same applies; however, if the multipurpose
feeder is configured as First and media is loaded in the
multipurpose feeder, then, regardless of media size, it is the source
used until it is empty.
Paper Source
Active Source or Eject Page
Tray 1 (Default)
Manual Paper Feed
Manual Envelope Feed
Tray 2
Tray 3
Optional Envelope Feeder
Auto Select
Multipurpose Feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
Optional Paper Source
Selects the paper feed source.
Note: If the paper source is changed for the back of a duplexed page,
a blank back page prints, the paper source changes, and the
information for the back side of the page is printed on the front side of a
page sent from the new paper source.
&f#G
Set Universal Width
# = number of Decipoints
Sets the width of the Universal size in decipoints.
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC&f#F
# = number of Decipoints
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Set Universal Height
Sets the height of the Universal size in decipoints.
2-65
PCL
Table 2-30: Page Control (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&f#O
Set Universal Feed Direction
0
1
ESC
Short-edge
Long-edge
Sets the feed direction of Universal size. Feed direction means which
side of the print media, either the short edge or the long edge, feeds
first through the printer first.
&f#W [custom name]
Set Universal Custom Name
# = number of bytes in the custom name
Sets the user-specified custom name for the Universal paper size
being used.
l#O
ESC&
0
1
2
3
ESC
Portrait (Default)
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Select Orientation
Specifies the position of the logical page with respect to the physical
page.
Note: Resets margins, number of printable lines per page, and cursor
position.
&a#P
Print Direction
# = Degrees (0, 90, 180, 270)
Rotates coordinate system counter-clockwise in 90° increments with
respect to current orientation.
Default = 0
Note: Margins are not rotated or cleared.
ESC
&c#T
0
-1
ESC
Character Text Path Direction
Horizontal Printing
Vertical Rotated Printing
Vertically rotates text for use in vertical writing, such as printing
Japanese text.
&a#L
Set Left Margin
# = Column
Sets left margin to left edge of the designated column.
Default = 0
Note: The column width is defined by the space character of the active
font and the Horizontal Motion Index (HMI).
ESC
&a#M
Set Right Margin
# = Column
Sets right margin to right edge of the designated column.
Default = Logical Page Width
Note: The column width is defined by the space character of the active
font and the HMI.
ESC
9
Clear Horizontal Margins
Clears left and right margins.
ESC
&l#E
# = number of Lines
Default = 3 (1/2 inch)
Set Top Margin
Sets the number of lines between the top of the physical page and first
line of print. Line height is determined by the current Vertical Motion
Index (VMI) and/or line spacing value.
Note: Setting a top margin of 0 results in the first line of text falling
outside of the printable area.
ESC
&l1T
Job Separation
This command is parsed and ignored.
2-66
PCL
Table 2-30: Page Control (Continued)
Command / Parameters
l#F
ESC&
Function / Result
Set Text Length
# = number of Lines
Default = 60 or 64 (Country specific)
Sets the bottom margin length in lines, measured from the first line of
the page.
Text Length equals Logical Page Length –1 inch (–1/2 inch for top and
–1/2 inch for bottom).
ESC
&l#G
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
ESC
&l#L
0
1
ESC
Auto Select (uses the active bin)
Standard Bin
Bin 1 or Rear Bin
Bin 1 or Rear Bin
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
Set Output Bin
Sets the exit path to direct paper to one of the output bins.
Skip Perforation
Off
On (Default)
Perforation area includes the area from the bottom margin of the
current page to the top margin of the next page. When skipping
perforations, a line feed past the bottom margin ejects a page and
places the cursor at the top margin of the next page.
&k#H
Set Horizontal Motion Index (HMI)
# = number of 1/120 inch increments
Sets the width of all characters for fixed-space fonts. Sets only the
width of the space for proportional spaced fonts.
(Valid to 4 decimal places)
l#C
ESC&
# = number of 1/48 inch increments
(Valid to 4 decimal places)
Default = 8
Set Vertical Motion Index (VMI)
Sets Vertical Motion Index in 1/48 inch increments. The VMI
determines the vertical distance between lines.
Notes:
• For some printers, you can change the default VMI from the printer
operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the
Lines Per Page menu item. Refer to your printer user documentation
for more information.
• Use of this command alters any previous Set Line Spacing
command settings.
2-67
PCL
Table 2-30: Page Control (Continued)
Command / Parameters
l#D
ESC&
1
2
3
4
6
8
12
16
24
48
Set Line Spacing (Alternative Method)
1 line/inch
2 lines/inch
3 lines/inch
4 lines/inch
6 lines/inch (Default)
8 lines/inch
12 lines/inch
16 lines/inch
24 lines/inch
48 lines/inch
ESC&a#G
0
1
2
Specifies VMI in lines per inch.
Notes:
• For some printers, you can change the default VMI from the printer
operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the
Lines Per Page menu item. Refer to your printer user documentation
for more information.
• Unsupported values are ignored.
• Use of this command alters any earlier VMI setting.
Duplex Page Side Selection
Next Side
Front Side
Back Side
l#P
ESC&
Specifies which physical page side to print next when duplex printing.
Note: When the duplex option is not installed, this command causes a
conditional page eject.
Set Page Length
# = number from 0 to 14
0 = default page length is used
(1 to 14 new page length is set)
ESC&k#W
5
6
Function / Result
Sets the logical page length in number of lines.
Notes:
• This command is sent at the beginning of a page in a print job and
prior to any printable data.
• When the command is sent, the current page is closed and printed.
• Unsupported values are ignored.
Text Scale Mode
Turn Text Scale Mode OFF
Turn Text Scale Mode ON
Allows 66 lines of text at six lines per inch to print on an effective page
length of 10 1/2 inches.
Notes:
• Unsupported values are ignored.
• The command is ignored when the printer is in landscape mode.
2-68
PCL
Table 2-31: Alphanumeric ID
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
&n#W [operation] [string]
Alphanumeric ID
# = number of data bytes that make up the
operation and string
Selects the media type using a character string. The string ID is case
sensitive and may be up to 511 bytes long.
The string ID specifies the media type requested.
Operation
operation = 100 or 1 byte = 0x64 or 'd' ascii
For example:
100
Media Select
String
string = See Alphanumeric String list at
right
Media Type
Alphanumeric String
Plain Paper
Bond
Transparency
Card Stock
Labels
Letterhead
Pre-printed
Colored Paper
Envelope
Custom Type 1
Custom Type 2
Custom Type 3
Custom Type 4
Custom Type 5
Custom Type 6
Plain
Bond
Transparency
Card Stock
Labels
Letterhead
Preprinted
Color
Envelope
Custom Type 1 or User Type 1
Custom Type 2 or User Type 2
Custom Type 3 or User Type 3
Custom Type 4 or User Type 4
Custom Type 5 or User Type 5
Custom Type 6 or User Type 6
For example, the following shows the command and parameters used
to select bond paper: ESC&n5WdBond
To select letterhead paper: ESC&n11WdLetterhead
Table 2-32: Cursor Positioning
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
&a#C
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Columns)
# = number of Columns1
Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis.
Note: The column width is determined by the space character width of
the active font or the Horizontal Motion Index (HMI), if set.
ESC
&a#H
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Decipoints)
# = number of Decipoints1
Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis.
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC
*p#X
# = number of PCL
Horizontal Cursor Position (in PCL Units)
Units1
Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis.
Note: PCL units are set by the Unit-of-Measure Command.
1
Parameter preceded by + or – sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position. Parameter without a
sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin.
2-69
PCL
Table 2-32: Cursor Positioning (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&a#R
Vertical Cursor Position (in Rows)
# = number of Rows
1
Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis.
Note: Row height is determined by either the Vertical Motion Index
(VMI) or the Set Line Spacing Command.
ESC&a#V
Vertical Cursor Position (in Decipoints)
1
# = number of Decipoints
Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis.
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC
*p#Y
Vertical Cursor Position (in PCL Units)
# = number of PCL Units
1
Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis.
Note: PCL units are set by the Unit-of-Measure Command.
ESC
=
Half Line-Feed
Moves the cursor down 1/2 line (1/2 of the current VMI).
ESC
&k#G
0
1
2
3
ESC
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF (Default)
CR=CR+LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
CR=CR, LF=CR+LF, FF=CR+FF
CR=CR+LF, LF=CR+LF, FF=CR+FF
&f#S
0
1
1
Set Line Termination
Controls how the printer responds to the Carriage Return (CR), Line
Feed (LF), and Form Feed (FF) control codes.
Push / Pop Cursor Position
Push
Pop
Sets up a cursor position stack for storing and recalling various cursor
positions. The stack can store up to 20 cursor positions.
Parameter preceded by + or – sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position. Parameter without a
sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin.
2-70
PCL
Note: For the commands listed in Table 2-33, font selection is based on all
parameters set following the best fit selection rules.
Table 2-33: Font Selection
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
Select Symbol Set
(# (primary)
ESC)#
(secondary)
# = symbol set ID
Default = 10U (PC-8) or 12U
(PC-850), [Country specific]
ESC
(s#P (primary)
ESC)s#P
0
1
ESC
(secondary)
Note: The line-draw characters are contained in the symbol set ID 10U,
PC-8. The non-U.S. characters are contained in symbol set ID 12U,
PC-850.
Select Spacing
Selects a font with proportional or fixed spacing.
Fixed (Default)
Proportional
(s#H (primary)
ESC)s#H
See “Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark X422” on page 2-9,
or “Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C510(n)” on page 2-19
for more information.
(secondary)
# = characters per inch
Default = 10
Select Pitch
Selects the number of characters per inch (cpi) for a fixed-space
bitmapped or monospaced scalable font. Valid to 2 decimal places.
Note: Pitch is not needed for proportional spaced fonts.
ESC
(s#V (primary)
Height (Select Point Size)
ESC
)s#V (secondary)
Sets the font height in points. Valid to 2 decimal places.
# = height in points (.25 to 999.75)
Note: Point size is not needed for monospaced fonts. For fonts larger
than 12 points, it may be necessary to change the line spacing.
Default = 12
ESC(s#S
ESC
(primary)
)s#S (secondary)
0
1
4
5
8
24
32
64
128
160
Upright (Default)
Italic
Condensed
Condensed Italic
Compressed
Expanded
Outline
Inline
Shadowed
Outline Shadowed
Select Style
Identifies the physical traits of a character and the composition of the font
symbols.
Note: You can only use this command to select fonts currently available
in the printer. It cannot alter the appearance of the available fonts.
2-71
PCL
Table 2-33: Font Selection (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC(s#B
Select Stroke Weight
ESC
ESC
(primary)
)s#B (secondary)
Selects a font with a particular thickness.
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note: This command will not alter the stroke weight of an available font.
Ultra Thin
Extra Thin
Thin
Extra Light
Light
Demi Light
Semi Light
Medium (Default)
Semi Bold
Demi Bold
Bold
Extra Bold
Black
Extra Black
Ultra Black
(s#T (primary)
ESC)s#T
(secondary)
# Typeface identifier (0 - 65535)
Note: For a list of typeface numbers, see
Table 2-4 on page 2-10 and Table 2-9 on
page 2-20.
Select Typeface
Selects the best fit font design.
To obtain the typeface values for downloaded fonts, print the font list from
the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to
your printer user documentation for more information.
On the printout, the typeface number is the last number on the font
selection command example line. The example line is below the name of
the font. In the following example, the typeface number is underlined:
RO Courier
<<ESC>>(<<symset>><<ESC>>(s0p<<pitch>>h0s0b4099T
ESC(#X
ESC
(primary)
)#X (secondary)
Select Font by Font ID
Selects the font by the identification number.
# = Font ID (0 - 32767)
ESC
(3@ (primary)
Select Default Font
ESC
)3@ (secondary)
Sets all font selection characteristics to the Default Font.
ESC
&p#X[data]
Transparent Print Data
# = number of data of bytes to print as text
Prints the next number of bytes as text.
ESC
&d#D
0,1
2
3
4
ESC&d@
Select Underline Type (Enable)
Fixed
Fixed - double
Floating
Floating - double
Notes:
• Fixed underline is drawn 5 pels below cursor position.
• Floating underline position is determined by all the positions of the
characters with descenders in the fonts that are to be underlined.
• Underline thickness is 1/100 inch.
Underline - Disable
2-72
PCL
Table 2-33: Font Selection (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&t#P
Text Parsing Method
0, 1
21
31
38
1008
ESC
1 byte characters
Communicates to the PCL parser whether character codes are
1 or 2 byte characters
interpreted as 1-byte or 2-byte character codes.
1 or 2 byte characters
1 or 2 byte characters
1, 2, or 3 byte characters (UTF-8)
&k#S
0
2
4
Select Primary and Secondary Pitch
10.00 cpi
16.66 cpi
12.00 cpi
Selects the pitch for the primary and secondary font.
Table 2-34: User-Defined Symbol Set
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
*c#R
Symbol Set ID Code
# = Symbol Set ID (0 - 32767)
Sets the symbol set identification for the symbol set downloaded.
Default = 0
ESC(f#W[data]
# = number of data bytes
ESC*c#S
0
1
2
4
5
Define Symbol Set
Contains the data for the user-defined symbol sets.
Symbol Set Control
Delete all (temporary and permanent)
Delete all temporary
Delete current (ID)
Make current temporary
Make current permanent
Manages user-defined symbol sets.
2-73
PCL
Table 2-35: Font Creation
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
*c#D
Set Font ID
# = Font ID # (0 - 32767)
Sets the identification number for the font being downloaded.
Default = 0
ESC
)s#W[data]
Load Font Header
# = number of data bytes
Downloads soft font header information.
Note: Set Font ID before using this command.
ESC*c#F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Caution: Font Control
Delete all (temporary and permanent)
Delete all temporary
Delete previous font ID
Delete previous specified character
Make previous font ID temporary
Make previous font ID permanent
Copy current font
ESC*c#E
Set Character Code
# = Code Point (0 - 65536)
Default = 0
ESC
Manages soft fonts.
Sets the decimal code point associated with the next character
downloaded or deleted.
(s#W[data]
Load Character
# = number of data bytes
Downloads character descriptor and data to the current character
code.
Table 2-36: Macros
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&f#Y
Set Macro ID
# = Macro ID (0 - 32767)
Sets the ID for the macro you have created on flash or disk.
Default = 0
ESC
&f#X
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Macro Control
Start definition
End definition
Execute macro (previous macro ID)
Call macro (previous macro ID)
Enable overlay (previous macro ID)
Disable overlay
Delete all macros
Delete all temporary macros
Delete current macro ID
Make last ID temporary
Make last ID permanent
Manages use of macros.
Notes:
• GL/2 commands are supported inside macros.
• Only call and execute macro commands are allowed within a macro.
• A macro may call or execute another macro. This is called nesting. A
maximum of two nesting levels are allowed, for a total of three
levels.
See “Macros” on page 2-95 for additional information.
2-74
PCL
Table 2-37: Print Model
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
Area Fill ID
*c#G
Gray Scale Fills
0
1-2
3-10
11-20
21-35
36-55
56-80
81-99
100
Selects pattern used to fill a rectangular area.
White (default)
2% gray
10% gray
15% gray
30% gray
45% gray
70% gray
90% gray
100% gray (Black)
Note: This command is also used to set the user-defined pattern ID.
Cross-Hatch Fills
1
2
3
4
5
6
Horizontal line
Vertical line
Diagonal line
Diagonal line
Square grid
Diagonal grid
User-Defined Patterns
# = User-Defined Pattern ID
ESC
*v#N
0
1
ESC
Source Transparency Mode
Transparent (Default)
Opaque
*v#O
0
1
Pattern Transparency Mode
Transparent (Default)
Opaque
l#O
ESC*
Default = 252
*l#R
0
1
Affects copying of white pixels from the pattern onto the destination
image.
Logical Operation
# = logical operation, value (0 to 255)
ESC
Affects copying of white pixels from the source onto the destination
image.
Defines boolean operations to be performed on data already printed
and data about to be printed.
Pixel Placement
Grid Intersection (Default)
Grid Centered
Determines how pixels are placed for a rectangular area fill and GL/2
objects.
Pixel Placement does not affect text or raster images.
ESC
*v#T
0
1
2
3
4
9
Select Current Pattern
Solid Black (Default)
Solid White
Gray Shading Pattern
Cross-Hatch Pattern
User Defined Pattern
True gray Level Fill
Selects pattern used when printing text and raster images.
2-75
PCL
Table 2-38: User-Defined Pattern
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
*c#W[data]
User-Defined Pattern
# = number of data bytes
Downloads binary pattern data.
ESC
*p#R
0
1
Set Pattern Reference Point
Rotate with print (Default)
Fixed
Sets pattern reference point to the current cursor position for userdefined patterns.
Note: Default pattern reference point is the upper left corner of logical
page.
ESC*c#Q
0
1
2
4
5
Caution: Pattern Control
Delete all patterns (temporary and
permanent)
Delete all temporary patterns
Delete pattern (last ID specified)
Make pattern of last ID # temporary
Make pattern of last ID # permanent
Manages use of user-defined patterns.
Note: Use Area Fill ID command (ESC*c#G) to set ID.
Table 2-39: Rectangular Area Fill Graphics
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
*c#H
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in Decipoints)
# = Number of Decipoints (0 - 32767)
Specifies the rectangle width in decipoints.
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Default = 0, valid to 4 decimal places
ESC*c#A
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in PCL Units)
# = Number of PCL Units (0 - 32767)
Specifies the rectangle width in PCL units.
Default = 0
Note: Size of PCL Units is set by Unit-of-Measure command.
ESC
*c#V
Vertical Rectangle Size (in Decipoints)
# = Number of Decipoints (0 - 32767)
Specifies the rectangle height in decipoints.
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Default = 0, valid to 4 decimal places
ESC*c#B
Vertical Rectangle Size (in PCL Units)
# = Number of PCL Units (0 - 32767)
Specifies the rectangle height in PCL units.
Default = 0
Note: Size of PCL Units is set by Unit-of-Measure command.
2-76
PCL
Table 2-39: Rectangular Area Fill Graphics (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC*c#G
Area Fill ID
Gray Scale Fills
Selects pattern used to fill rectangle area.
0
1-2
3-10
11-20
21-35
36-55
56-80
81-99
100
White (default)
2% Gray
10% Gray
15% Gray
30% Gray
45% Gray
70% Gray
90% Gray
100% Gray (Black)
Note: This command is also used to set the user-defined pattern ID.
Cross-Hatch Fills
1
2
3
4
5
6
Horizontal Line
Vertical Line
Diagonal Line
Diagonal Line
Square Grid
Diagonal Grid
User-Defined Patterns
# = User-Defined Pattern ID
ESC
*c#P
0
1
2
3
4
5
9
Fill Rectangular Area
Black Fill (Default)
White Fill
Gray Fill
Pre-Defined Cross-Hatch
Pattern Fill
User-Defined Pattern
Current Pattern Fill
True gray Level Fill
Fills a rectangular area defined by Horizontal and Vertical Rectangle
Sizes with selected pattern.
2-77
PCL
Table 2-40: Raster Graphics
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
Raster Resolution
*t#R
75
100
150
200
300
600
1200
ESC
75 dpi
100 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
*r#F
Raster Graphics Presentation
0
3
Rotate with print
Fixed (Default)
ESC*r#S
# = Number of Input Pixels
ESC*r#A
ESC
ESC
Sets width of clip window for raster graphics.
Raster Height (Source)
# = Number of Raster Lines
3
Sets the Raster Image Orientation in relation to the logical page.
Raster Width (Source)
ESC*r#T
0
1
2
Note: 200 dpi is only supported when the printer is operating in
600 dpi or 1200 dpi mode.
Sets height of clip window for raster graphics.
Start Raster Graphics
Left Graphics Margin at 0 (Default)
Current Cursor Position
At logical left page limit with scaling
On
At current cursor position with
scaling On
Sets the left margin for raster graphics.
*b#V[data]
Transfer Raster Data by Plane
# = Number of Data Bytes
This command is used when the raster data is encoded by plane as
specified by the Simple Color command or the Configure Image
Data command. The command sends each plane in the row except
the last.
*b#Y
Y Offset
# = Number of Raster Lines
Moves cursor position down by the specified number of raster lines.
2-78
PCL
Table 2-40: Raster Graphics (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC*b#M
Set Raster Compression Mode
0
1
2
3
5
9
999
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
Uncoded (Default)
Run-Length Encoded
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF)
byte
Delta Row
Adaptive Compression
Replacement Delta Row
Zlib
Group 4
Group 3 one dimensional
Group 3 two dimensional K=2
Group 3 two dimensional K=4
TIFF word (16 bit)
TIFF double-word (32 bit)
Adaptive compression (includes TIFF
word and TIFF double-word)
ESC*b#W[data]
# = Number of Data Bytes
Identifies the compression mode the host uses to transfer RIG data.
For instance, this command can be run-length encoding or TIFF
encoding.
Note: For further information, see “Raster Compression Mode” on
page 2-88 and “Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression” on
page 2-93.
Transfer Raster Data by Row/Block
Transfers RIG data.
Note: After each command, the cursor position is moved to the
beginning of the next raster row.
ESC*rB
End Raster Graphics (Version B)
Signals end of raster graphics transfer. If a Raster Height is
specified, the cursor is moved to the first raster row past the Raster
Height.
ESC
*rC
End Raster Graphics (Version C)
Same as Version B, but:
• Resets compression mode to uncoded.
• Sets left graphics margin to 0.
ESC
*t#H
Raster Width (Destination)
Sets the width of the destination raster.
2-79
Table 2-40: Raster Graphics (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC*t#V
Raster Height (Destination)
Sets the height of the destination raster.
ESC*g#W[data]
Set Raster Configuration
Sets the configuration of the destination raster.
# - 8 (K-only) or 26 (KCMY)
Data
Byte 0 - 0x02 (constant)
Byte 1 - number of colors
0x01 - K only
0x04 - CMYK
Byte 2,3 - X res for K plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 4,5 - Y res for K plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 6,7 - K plane intensity levels
0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
Byte 8,9 - X res for C plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 10,11 - Y res for C plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 12,13 - C plane intensity levels
0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
Byte 14,15 - X res for M plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 16,17 - Y res for M plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 18,19 - M plane intensity levels
0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
Byte 20,21 - X res for Y plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 22,23 - Y res for Y plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 24,25 - Y plane intensity levels
0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
PCL
2-80
PCL
Table 2-41: Color Extensions
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
Monochrome Print Mode
&b#M
0
1
ESC
Print in mixed render algorithm
Changes each color value to its gray scale equivalent.
mode
Print using gray scale equivalent
&p#C
0
1
2
6
Palette Control
Delete all palettes except those
in stack (active palette is
deleted)
Delete all palettes in stack
(active palette not affected)
Delete palette specified by
Palette Control ID
Copy active palette to ID
specified by Palette Control ID
ESC&p#I
0 to 32767
Palette Control ID
Palette ID number
ESC&p#S
0 to 32767
Palette ID number
l#W[data]
770, Data
Resets or initializes the color
lookup tables for each primary
color to the unity curve
Data for color lookup table
Data size and data of
byte-aligned binary data
that specifies a matrix or
matrices for the primary
colors
*o#W[data]
Specifies lightness,
saturation, and image
scaling
ESC*p#P
Indicates the lightness, saturation, and scaling algorithm to be
applied to a job.
Push/Pop Palette
Push (Save) Palette
Pop (Restore) Palette
*r#U
-4
-3
1
3
Downloads a device dependent user-defined dither matrix.
Driver Configuration Command
1 to 32767, Data
ESC
Enables the color lookup tables and specifies the table to use.
Download Dither Matrix
7 to 32767, Data
0
1
Selects a new active palette by indicating the ID number.
Color Lookup Tables
ESC*m#W[data]
ESC
Indicates the ID number used by the Palette Control command.
Select Palette
ESC*
0
Provides palette management.
Saves (push) the current palette and then restores (pop) it from the
palette stack.
Simple Color
4 planes, device KCMY palette
3 planes, device CMY palette
Single plane, K (black) palette
3 planes, device RGB palette
Creates a fixed-size palette. The color specification of the palette
cannot be modified.
2-81
PCL
Table 2-41: Color Extensions (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC*t#I
Gamma Correction
0
0.0 to 4.0
ESC
Gamma Correction Off
Gamma Number
*t#J
Improves the perceptual correctness of color data sent from the
monitor to any other non-linear device by adjusting the brightness
and darkness.
Render Algorithm
Selects the algorithm used for dithering images and fills.
ESC
*v#A
Color Component One
-32767.0 to 32767.0
Indicates the first primary color specified by the Assign Color Index
command.
ESC*v#B
ESC
ESC
-32767.0 to 32767.0
Indicates the second primary color specified by the Assign Color
Index command.
*v#C
Color Component Three
-32767.0 to 32767.0
Indicates the third primary color specified by the Assign Color Index
command.
*v#I
Assign Color Index
# = Palette Index
0 to 2n – 1 = Palette Index
Designates the three current color components to the specified
palette index number. n represents the number of bits per index.
ESC*v#S
ESC
Color Component Two
Foreground Color
# = Palette Index
0 to 2n – 1 = Palette Index
Sets the foreground color to the specified index in the current
palette. n represents the current palette size.
*v#W[data]
Configure Image Data
Creates programmable palettes.
ESC
*i#W[data]
Viewing Illuminant
8, Data
Designates the relative white point used in determining a viewing
illuminant condition.
2-82
PCL
Table 2-42: Status Readback
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
Set Status Readback Location Type
*s#T
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
200
Invalid location (Default)
Use currently selected location
All locations
Internal (resident)
Downloaded entity
Cartridge
User-installable flash
Disk
ESC*s#U
0
1
2
4
ESC
The 5 value for Cartridge may be specified, but since your printer
does not support font cards or cartridges, the command is ignored.
The 7 value for User-installable flash is only valid when flash
memory is installed.
The 200 value is only valid when a hard disk is installed.
Set Status Readback Location Unit
All
If download, temporary; otherwise,
highest priority
If download, permanent; otherwise,
next higher priority
ESC*s#I
0
1
2
3
Sets the status location type to the specified value.
Sets the status location unit to the specified value.
The location unit is used along with the location type to identify a
location for the Inquire Status Readback Entity command.
Note: The unit value is interpreted differently, depending on the
location type specified.
Inquire Status Readback Entity
Font
Macro
User-defined pattern
Symbol set (for unbound scalable
fonts)
Font extended
*s1M
Returns the requested information set by Set Status Readback
Location Type and Set Status Readback Location Unit.
Free Space
Returns the total available memory and the largest available block
of memory.
ESC&r#F
0
1
ESC
Flush All Pages
Flush all complete pages
Flush all pages
Holds print jobs in the print buffer until the current job finishes
printing.
*s#X
Echo
-32767 to 32767
Returns # back to host computer.
Default = 0
2-83
PCL
Table 2-43: Picture Frame
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC
*c#X
Picture Frame Horizontal Size (in Decipoints)
# of Decipoints: 0 to 32767
Specifies the horizontal dimension of the picture frame used when
printing a GL/2 plot.
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC
*c#Y
Picture Frame Vertical Size (in Decipoints)
# of Decipoints: 0 to 32767
Specifies the vertical dimension of the picture frame used when
printing a GL/2 plot.
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC*c0T
0
ESC
Set Picture Frame Anchor Point
Set Anchor Point to Cursor Position
Sets the position of the picture frame anchor point to the cursor
position. The picture frame anchor point defines the location of the
upper left corner of the picture frame.
*c#K
GL/2 Horizontal Plot Size
Size in inches: 0 to 32767
Specifies the horizontal scaling factor used when importing an
image into the picture frame.
ESC*c#L
GL/2 Vertical Plot Size
Size in inches: 0 to 32767
ESC
%#B
0
1
ESC
Enter GL/2 Language
Use Previous GL/2 Pen Position
Use Current PCL Cursor Position
%#A
0
1
Specifies the vertical scaling factor used when importing an image
into the picture frame.
Exits PCL emulation and uses GL/2 commands to print.
Enter PCL Emulation
Use Previous PCL Cursor Position
Use Current GL/2 Pen Position
Exits GL/2 mode and uses PCL emulation commands to print.
Table 2-44: Miscellaneous Commands
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&s#C
End-Of-Line Text Wrap
0
1
ESC
Y
Enable
Disable (Default)
Enabling End-Of-Line Text Wrap moves portions of lines that extend
into the unprintable area to the next line. Disabling drops the portion
extending into the unprintable area.
Display Functions On
Prints all control codes and escape sequences rather than executing
them.
Notes:
• To prevent characters from falling outside the right margin (and not
printing), enable End-Of-Line Text Wrap (ESC&s0C).
• To see the control characters and other blank codepoints in symbol
set Roman8 (8U), set the symbol set to PC-8 (10U).
2-84
PCL
Table 2-44: Miscellaneous Commands (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESCZ
Display Functions Off
Turns off Display Functions; resumes normal command processing.
ESCz
Print Test Page
Causes a test page to print.
ESC*o#M(b)
-1
0
1
ESC
Print Quality
Ink Saver
Normal
Best
Selects the print quality setting for the page.
&l#M(b)
0
1
2
3
4
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
Paper Type
Plain Paper
Bond
Coated Paper
Glossy Paper
Transparency
Photo Paper
Card Stock
Labels
Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Iron On
Selects the paper type setting for the page.
GL/2 Commands
Note: GL/2 is not a stand-alone plotter emulation. It can only be entered from within
PCL emulation and cannot be used with software without a unique printer
driver written explicitly for GL/2.
The following tables list the GL/2 commands by group. To determine which GL/2
commands your printer supports, see “Table A-2: GL/2 Commands” on page A-6.
Table 2-45: Configuration Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
CO "text"
Comment
DF;
Default Values
IN (n);
Initialize
IP (XP1, YP1(, XP2, YP2));
Input P1 and P2
2-85
PCL
Table 2-45: Configuration Group (Continued)
Command / Parameter
Command Name
IR (XP1, YP1(, XP2, YP2));
Input Relative P1 and P2
IW (X1, Y1, X2, Y2);
Input Window
MC (mode(, opcode));
Logical Operation
PP (mode);
Pixel Placement
RO (angle);
Rotate Coordinate System
SC (Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, Ymax(, type(, left, bottom)));
Scale
Table 2-46: Vector Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
AA Xcenter, Ycenter, sweep_angle(, chord_angle);
Arc Absolute
AR Xcenter, Ycenter, sweep_angle(, chord_angle);
Arc Relative
AT Xinter, Yinter, Xend, Yend(, chord_angle);
Absolute Arc Three Point
BR X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3(,...);
Bezier Relative
BZ X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3(,...);
Bezier Absolute
CI radius(, chord_angle);
Circle
PA (X, Y(,...));
Plot Absolute
PD (X, Y(,...));
Pen Down
PE (flag(value) | coordinates (...));
Polyline Encoded
PR (X, Y(,...));
Plot Relative
PU (X, Y(,...));
Pen Up
RT Xincr inter, Yincr inter, Xincr end, Yincr end(, chord_angle);
Arc Relative Three Point
WU (type);
Pen Width Units
Table 2-47: Polygon Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
EA X, Y;
Edge Rectangle Absolute
EP;
Edge Polygon
ER X, Y;
Edge Rectangle Relative
EW radius, start_angle, sweep_angle(, chord_angle);
Edge Wedge
FP (0);
Fill Polygon, Odd/Even
FP 1;
Fill Polygon, Non-Zero Winding
PM (mode);
Polygon Mode
2-86
PCL
Table 2-47: Polygon Group (Continued)
Command / Parameter
Command Name
RA X, Y;
Fill Rectangle Absolute
RR X, Y;
Fill Rectangle Relative
WG radius, start_angle, sweep_angle(, chord_angle);
Fill Wedge
Table 2-48: Character Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
AD (kind, value(,...));
Define Alternate Font
CF (mode(, pen));
Character Fill
CP (spaces, lines);
Character Plot
DI (run, rise);
Absolute Direction
DR (run, rise);
Relative Direction
DT (label_terminator(, mode));
Define Label Terminator
DV (path(, line));
Define Variable Text Path
ES (width(, height));
Extra Space
FI font_ID;
Primary Font
FN font_ID;
Secondary Font
LB char...char label_terminator;
Label
LM (mode,[row number])
Label Mode
LO (position);
Label Origin
LO 21;
Uses PCL Label Origin
SA;
Select Alternate Font
SB (mode);
Scalable or Bitmapped Fonts
SD (kind, value(,...));
Define Standard Font
SI (width, height);
Absolute Character Size
SL (tangent);
Character Slant
SR (width, height);
Relative Character Size
SS;
Select Standard Font
TD (mode);
Transparent Data
2-87
Table 2-49: Line and Fill Attributes Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
AC (X, Y);
Anchor Corner
CR (red black ref, red white ref, green black ref, green white ref, blue
black ref, blue white ref);
Color Range
FT (fill_type(, option1(, option2));
Fill Type
FT22, (PCL User-Defined Pattern ID);
Fill Type
FT 9, level;
Fill Type
LA (kind, value(,...));.
Line Attributes
LT (pattern_number(, pattern_length(, mode)));
Line Type
NP (number);
Number of Pens
PC (pen (, red, green, blue));
Pen Color
PW (width(, pen));
Pen Width
RF (index(, width, height(, pen, ...)));
Define Raster Fill
SM (character);
Symbol Mode
SP (pen);
Select Pen
SV (screen_type(, option1(, option2)));
Screened Vectors
SV (9, level,)
Screened Vectors
TM (width, height(, number...));
Threshold Matrix
TR (mode);
Transparency Mode
UL (index(, gap,...gap));
User Defined Line
WU (type);
Pen Width Units
PCL
2-88
PCL
Raster Image Graphics
These commands utilize the raster area. Before sending data, set the presentation
mode, the resolution, the compression mode, the raster height and width, and start
raster graphics. These parameters are in effect until you overwrite them with a
different command or there is a printer reset.
To ensure that the printed image appears in the expected area, set width and height
parameters.
Raster Compression Mode
The Raster Compression Mode command determines how raster data is coded. It
affects the amount of code required to create an image, and the efficiency of image
printing.
Syntax:
ESC
*b#M
Parameters:
0
Uncoded (default)
1
Run-Length Encoded
2
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) Byte
3
Delta Row
5
Adaptive Compression
9
Replacement Delta Row
999
Zlib
1002
Group 4
1003
Group 3 one dimensional
1004
Group 3 two dimensional K=2
1005
Group 3 two dimensional K=4
1006
TIFF word (16 bit)
1007
TIFF double-word (32 bit)
1008
Adaptive Compression (includes TIFF word and TIFF double-word)
2-89
PCL
Descriptions and examples of the different parameters appear on the following pages.
Each example draws the same square outline 64 bits (8 bytes) wide by 64 scan lines
long.
Uncoded Data
Uncoded Data is not compressed. Only those bytes needed to form the image are
sent. Each bit represents a single dot. In the first byte, bit 7 corresponds to the first dot
in the raster row, bit 5 to the third dot, and so forth.
Example:
ESC
*p300x300Y
*t100R
*r0F
ESC*b0M
ESC
*r1A
ESC*b8W 'FF
ESC*b8W '80
ESC
*b8W '80
...
ESC*b8W '80
ESC
*b8W 'FF
ESC*rB
ESC
ESC
FF FF FF FF FF FF
00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00
FF FF FF FF FF FF
|Move the cursor to 1" x 1" (1 in. from top margin
and 1 in. from left edge of logical page)
|Set resolution to 100 dots per inch
|Rotate image to match current orientation
|Set compression mode to Uncoded
|Start raster graphics at current position
FF'x |Raster data uncompressed
01'x
01'x
|Repeat to provide 64 total scan lines
01'x
FF'x
|End graphics
2-90
PCL
Run-Length Encoded Data
Run-Length Encoded Data is interpreted in pairs of bytes. The first byte:
•
•
•
•
Acts as a counter, or control byte.
Indicates how many times to repeat the data in the second byte.
Can be from 0 (no repetition) to 255.
The second byte is the data byte.
Example:
*p300x600Y
*b1M
ESC*r1A
ESC
*b2W '07FF'x
ESC*b6W '0080 0500 0001'x
ESC*b6W '0080 0500 0001'x
...
ESC*b6W '0080 0500 0001'x
ESC*b2W '07FF'x
ESC
*rB
ESC
ESC
|Move cursor to 1" x 2"
|Set compression to Run-Length
|Start raster graphics at current position
|Run-Length: 8x'FF'x
|1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x
|1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x
|...
|1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x
|8x'FF'x
|End graphics
Tagged Image File Format
TIFF “Packbits” contain a control byte (a signed number) that indicates whether the
raster data bytes are to be repeated (up to 127 times) or printed as encoded data.
•
•
For control values of 0 through 127, the next (Control+1) byte(s) is uncoded.
For control values of -1 through -127 ('FF'x - '81'x), the next byte is repeated
(Abs(Control)+1) times.
Example:
*p300x900Y
*b2M
ESC*r1A
ESC*b2W 'F9FF'x
ESC
*b6W '0080 FB00 0001'x
ESC*b9W '078000000000000001'x
...
ESC
*b6W '0080 FB00 0001'x
ESC
*b2W 'F9FF'x
ESC
*rB
ESC
ESC
|Move cursor to 1" x 3"
|Set compression to TIFF
|Start Raster Graphics at current position
| TIFF: 8x'FF'x
|1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1: '01'x or
|8: '8000000000000001'x
|...
|1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1: '01'x
|8x'FF'x
|End graphics
2-91
PCL
Delta Row
Delta Row is a compression mode that identifies and transmits only those bytes
different from the ones in a preceding row. The control byte consists of two parts:
•
•
High 3 bits: Number of bytes to replace +1 (1 to 8).
Low 5 bits: Offset from last unmodified byte (0-30); if the offset is 31, the next
byte(s) is added to the offset until the next byte is not 255.
Example:
*p300x1200Y
*b3M
ESC*r1A
ESC
ESC
*b9W 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x
*b9W 'E08000000000000001'x
ESC*b0W
...
ESC*b0W
ESC*b9W 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x
ESC
*rB
ESC
ESC
|Move cursor to 1" x 4"
|Set compression to Delta Row
|Start raster graphics at current position
|Num Offset
|'111 00000'b=8 at 0: 'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x
|8 at 0: '8000000000000001'x
|No bytes change
|No bytes change
|8 at 0: '8FFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x
|End graphics
2-92
PCL
Adaptive Compression
Adaptive compression allows the combined use of compression methods 0 through 3
(Uncoded, Run-Length Encoded, TIFF, and Delta Row). It also allows the printing of
empty rows (all zeros) or duplicate rows.
•
•
The Transfer Raster Data command size includes all rows (scan lines).
Scan Mode and SizeH,L are three-byte primary control strings: CountH and
CountL.
Table 2-50: Adaptive Compression Control Strings
Scan Mode
CountH,CountL
Data
0
Data sizeH,L
Uncoded raster scan data
1
Data sizeH,L
Size of Run-length encoded data (high,low)
2
Data sizeH,L
Size of Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) data
(high,low)
3
Data SizeH,L
Size of Delta Row data (high,low)
4
NumberH,L of empty
rows
None
5
NumberH,L of duplicate
rows
None
254
Data SizeH,L
TIFF word
255
Data SizeH,L
TIFF double-word
Example:
*p300x1500Y
*b5M
ESC
*b29W
'03 0009'x 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x
'01 0006'x '0080 FB00 0001'x
'05 0035'x
'02 0002'x 'F9FF 'x
ESC*rB
ESC
ESC
|Move cursor to 1" x 5"
|Set the compression to Adaptive Compression
|Raster Data: 29 bytes follow
| Delta Row: 8 at 0: 'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh'x
| Run Length: 1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1:'01'x
| Duplicate rows: 61 times
| TIFF: 8x'FF'x
|End graphics
2-93
PCL
Zlib
Zlib is a generic compression method. It refers to a standard for compression as well
as the library that implements the standard.
The zlib compression method uses the deflate algorithm. This same algorithm is used
by more widely known compression utilities such as PKZIP and GZIP.
Compressed data is a series of variably-sized blocks. An encoder determines how to
break the data into blocks and finds the best compression method to use for each
block.
An encoder works based on the following principles. The encoder creates a dictionary
containing different characters in a set of data. Short strings of bits represent more
commonly occurring characters, and long strings of bits represent less frequently
used characters. A probability tree determines which characters are frequently used.
Repeated patterns in a string of characters are identified and stored, so the string
doesn’t have to be stored multiple times.
A three-bit zlib header is added to the beginning of a block to describe the type of
compression used and indicates whether the block is a final block. Other information
in the header includes checksums, compression algorithm used, and the level of
compression. In compression all checksums are set to zero and in decompression the
checksums are ignored.
The memory required for zlib compression and decompression is independent of the
size of the data to be compressed or decompressed.
The number 999 does not conflict with other compression types, so it is used to
represent zlib compression. See page 2-88 for more information.
Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression
Since Group 4 images do not use line endings, the width of the image must be
specified using the Raster Width command (ESC*r#S).
The compressed image data is sent to the printer using the Transfer Raster Data
command (ESC*b#W). The maximum number of bytes that can be sent using the
Transfer Raster Data command is 32K bytes. Images larger than 32K bytes must be
broken up and sent using multiple commands. It does not matter where the image is
broken, or how many Transfer Raster Data commands are used. Once the image is
started (with a Transfer Raster Data command), no other commands are allowed until
the entire image has been sent.
2-94
PCL
The following example prints a Group 4 image file that is 256 bits wide and 9,645 bytes
long:
*b1002M
*r256S
ESC*r1A
ESC
*b9645W
...[Group 4 image data]...
ESC*rB
ESC
ESC
|Set Raster Compression to Group 4
|Define width of image in input bits
|Start Raster Graphics at current position
|9,645 bytes of a Group 4 image
|End Raster Graphics
All lines of data must be the same length. If they are not, zeroes (0) must be added to
attain the same length.
Note: If the uncompressed image extends beyond the logical page dimensions or
beyond the raster width specified in the Raster Width command (ESC*r#S), the
image is clipped at print time.
Additional Compression Modes
When the compression mode is 1008 (Lexmark Adaptive), TIFF word and doubleword can be printed using compression scan modes 254 and 255 respectively. This
compression method sends a raster image as a block of raster data.
2-95
PCL
Macros
When creating a macro, first assign it an ID number. If this number is identical to an
existing macro ID in RAM, the old macro is deleted when you specify the Macro
Control Start Definition. Next, start the macro definition, send the contents of the
macro, and stop the macro definition.
Note: Although a macro may be called or executed from within another macro
(nesting), a macro cannot be defined within another macro definition. Each
macro must be defined separately.
Example:
This example creates a macro to print the Wigit Corp. logo, then calls the logo macro
in the body of a letter.
&f1Y
&f0X
ESC
&a+72H
ESC(8U
ESC(s1p18v0s3b4101T
W
ESC&a-21.6H
ESC(s12v1S
igit
ESC&a+72H
ESC(s18v0S
C
ESC(s12v1S
orp.
ESC
&a+72H
ESC&f1X
ESC
&f10X
...
...
From:
ESC
&f1y3X
...
Thank you for ...
ESC
&f1y3X
...
ESC
ESC
|Set the macro ID to 1
|Start the macro definition
|Relative move right 1/10 inch (+72/720th)
|Select Roman-8 symbol set
|Select CG Times 18 point bold
|Print W
|Relative move left 0.03 inch
|Select (CG Times) 12 point (bold) italic
|Print igit
|Relative move right 1/10 inch
|Select 18 point and turn off italic
|Print C
|Select 12 point italic
|Print orp.
|Relative move right 1/10 inch
|End of macro definition
|Make Macro ID 1 permanent
|Print the header From:
|Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro
|Print the letter
|Print the closing
|Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro
3-1
PJL
CHAPTER 3: Printer Job Language
Your printer supports complete Printer Job Language (PJL) commands, including
certain commands that cause the printer to enter PCL emulation, PostScript
emulation, and Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS).
To determine which commands your printer supports, see Appendix B: “PJL Support”
on page B-1.
PJL Command Notation
The syntax for each supported PJL command is listed in this chapter. The following
character codes are used throughout the chapter to illustrate the syntax of each PJL
command.
Table 3-1: PJL Command Notation
Character
Code
Description
Hex Code
Decimal Code
<ESC>
Escape Character
0x1B
27
<LF>
Line Feed Character
0x0A
10
<CR>
Carriage Return Character
0x0D
13
<FF>
Form Feed Character
0x0C
12
<HT>
Horizontal Tab
0x09
9
<UEL>
Universal Exit Language
0x1B 25 2D 31
32 33 34 35 58
3-2
PJL
Notes:
• Parameters enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) are optional and not required
for command execution.
• The PJL interpreter requires uppercase for the @PJL prefix for all PJL commands except the Universal Exit Language (UEL) command. The rest of the
PJL command is not case sensitive. The UEL command is case sensitive.
• All PJL commands except UEL must be terminated with a line feed character (<LF>).
Kernel Commands
UNIVERSAL EXIT LANGUAGE Command
The Universal Exit Language (UEL) command terminates the current printer language
and allows dynamic switching into PJL.
Syntax:
<ESC>%-12345X
Notes:
•
If the printer receives this command while in PCL emulation, it performs a
Printer Language Reset (ESCE) before exiting PCL emulation.
•
If the printer receives this command while in PostScript emulation, it performs
an End-of-Job (EOJ) command before exiting PostScript emulation (Ctrl-D).
The PJL commands must immediately follow the UEL command (that is, the X in the
UEL syntax must be immediately followed by the @PJL of the next PJL command).
3-3
PJL
ENTER LANGUAGE Command
This command causes the printer to enter the specified language, such as
PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, or PPDS.
Syntax:
@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = language[<CR>]<LF>
Notes:
•
language is PCL, PCL3, PCLXL, PostScript, or PPDS.
•
You can use uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case. (@PJL must be uppercase;
all others can be mixed or lowercase.)
Example:
@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = PostScript[<CR>]<LF>
enters PostScript emulation.
COMMENT Command
This command lets you add descriptive comments to your PJL job.
Syntax:
@PJL COMMENT words[<CR>]<LF>
Notes:
•
When the printer receives this command, it is ignored.
•
The words parameter can be any combination of printable characters,
spaces, and horizontal tabs.
•
The COMMENT command is terminated by the line feed character (<LF>).
3-4
PJL
Job Separation Commands
Your printer supports the PJL JOB and EOJ commands. When the printer receives a
JOB command, the print timeout is multiplied by 10; when the printer receives a PJL
EOJ command, the print timeout is reset to the user default. The Waiting message
appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional until
an EOJ command is received or until the print timeout expires.
Your printer also supports the PASSWORD parameter for the PJL JOB command.
JOB Command
The host computer can use the JOB command to separate print data into various
parts or jobs. Specifically, the JOB command signifies to the printer the start of a print
job. Use the EOJ command to signify the end of a job. In addition, use the JOB/EOJ
pair to accomplish the following:
•
Provide a job name (the name displays on the printer operator panel or
through MarkVision Professional).
•
Indicate which pages of the job should be printed.
•
Monitor the job status as it prints.
Syntax:
@PJL JOB [NAME = "job name"] [START = first page]
[END = last page] [PASSWORD = number][<CR>]<LF>
Notes:
•
The JOB command should only be used in conjunction with the EOJ
command.
•
After receiving a JOB command, the printer does not process a UEL
command as a PJL job boundary until it receives the corresponding EOJ.
Instead, UELs occurring within a JOB/EOJ pair are processed as printer
language resets (for example, PCL ESCE).
3-5
PJL
Parameters:
NAME = "job name"
Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job.
The name may be any combination of printable characters, spaces or horizontal
tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters, spaces, or tabs. The job name must be
enclosed in double quotes, as indicated by the command syntax.
START = first page
Use the START parameter in conjunction with the END parameter to skip the
printing of a particular portion of the job. The emulator discards pages of a job
until the page specified by this parameter is reached. The first page range is
from 1 to 2,147,483,647. Omission of the START parameter causes the printer to
start printing with page 1 of the job.
END = last page
Use the END parameter in conjunction with the START parameter to skip the
printing of a particular portion of the job. The emulator discards all pages of a job
after the last page has been printed. The specification of last page is relative
to page 1 of the print job and its range is from 1 to 2,147,483,647. Omission of
the END parameter causes the printer to print all pages to the end of the job.
PASSWORD = number
A system administrator can control which jobs, and therefore which users, are
allowed to modify the printer default or NVRAM variables by declaring a PJL
password. With a PJL password declared, the PASSWORD parameter with the
correct PASSWORD number must be specified in order to modify the default
printer environment.
A PJL JOB command with the correct PASSWORD must be issued before any
PJL command can modify an NVRAM setting. The PJL EOJ command
terminates the job and disables any further modification of NVRAM. If a PJL
password is declared and the wrong PASSWORD number is specified on the
PJL JOB command, the printer will delay one half of a second before processing
the next command.
3-6
PJL
For detailed information on PJL password protection, see “File and Device
Protection Commands” on page 3-93.
Note: Setting a default PJL password disables the use of PJL DEFAULT and
INITIALIZE commands. (See “DEFAULT Command” on page 3-8 and
“INITIALIZE Command” on page 3-11.)
EOJ Command
The EOJ command signifies the end of a print job.
Syntax:
@PJL EOJ [NAME = "job name"][<CR>]<LF>
Note:
Only use the EOJ command in conjunction with the JOB command.
Parameter:
NAME = "job name"
Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job.
The name may be any combination of printable characters, spaces, or horizontal
tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters, spaces, or tabs. The NAME string may
be different from the NAME string specified in the JOB command. The job name
must be enclosed in double quotes.
3-7
PJL
Environment Commands and Variables
This section describes the printer environment variables and the PJL commands used
to modify or query the variables.
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer
and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Table 3-2: Environment Variable Categories
Categories
Beginning
on Page ...
Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
3-12
Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages
3-19
Common Variables for PCL emulation
3-48
Printer Unique Variables for PCL emulation
3-49
Common Variables for PostScript emulation
3-51
Printer Unique Variables for PostScript emulation
3-52
Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
3-53
The following commands modify the environment variables, and are described in this
section:
•
•
•
•
DEFAULT
SET
INITIALIZE
RESET
The following commands query the environment variables, and are described in
“Status Readback Commands” on page 3-54.
•
•
•
•
INQUIRE
DINQUIRE
INFO
ECHO
3-8
PJL
DEFAULT Command
This command modifies the default setting for the specified environment variable and
stores the setting in the printer NVRAM. The new setting is activated with the
occurrence of the next PJL reset condition.
Syntax:
@PJL DEFAULT [command modifier:value] variable=value[<CR>]<LF>
[command modifier:value]
The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables
to be modified. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on
page 3-12.
•
A [command modifier:value] parameter is not required for variables listed in
the tables “Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12,
and “Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-19.
•
LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
“Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48, and “Printer Unique
Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-49.)
•
LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific to PostScript emulation. (See
the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51, and
“Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52.)
•
LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE
variables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
page 3-53.)
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
device
flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
filename
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID
for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive.
filetype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for
PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See
“Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and
Password Commands” on page 3-87 for a complete list of
the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive.
3-9
PJL
variable=value
The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12.
Note: Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command, except those marked
Read Only. Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET
command. These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT
command. They are marked Set Only.
SET Command
This command modifies the current setting for the specified environment variable. The
new setting is active immediately, and remains active until the next occurrence of a
PJL reset condition.
Use the SET command to modify any currently defined environment variable that
cannot be set using the desired printer language. For example, use the PJL SET
command to set Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET) or Page Protect,
which cannot be set within a printer language such as PCL emulation.
Syntax:
@PJL SET [command modifier:value] variable=value[<CR>]<LF>
where
[command modifier:value]
The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables
to be modified. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on
page 3-12.
•
A [command modifier:value] is not required for variables listed in the tables
“Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12, and “Printer
Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-19.
•
LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
“Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48, and “Printer Unique
Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-49.)
•
LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation.
(See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51,
and “Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52.)
3-10
•
PJL
LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE
variables. (See “Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
page 3-53.)
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
device
flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
filename
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID
for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive.
filetype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for
PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the
table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the
supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive.
variable=value
The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on
page 3-12.
Note: Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command, except those marked
Read Only. Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET
command. These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT
command. They are marked Set Only.
3-11
PJL
INITIALIZE Command
This command restores both the current and default environment variables to their
factory default values and updates the printer NVRAM. This command affects all of
the variables listed in “Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on
page 3-12 through “Table 3-8: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on
page 3-52, except the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
All read only variables
PASSWORD
LANG
LRESOURCESAVE
LDOWNLOADTARGET
LPPDS
LHONORINIT
LUSDEFAULTS
PARALLEL
RESOURCESAVE
Note: This command does not affect LRESOURCE variables listed in
“Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-53.
Syntax:
@PJL INITIALIZE[<CR>]<LF>
RESET Command
This command resets the current environment variables to the settings stored in the
printer NVRAM. Therefore, any variables modified by the PJL SET command are
returned to their default value after execution of the PJL RESET command.
Syntax:
@PJL RESET[<CR>]<LF>
3-12
PJL
Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer
and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
The following common variables are supported for both PCL emulation and PostScript
emulation, unless otherwise noted. Therefore, the [command modifier:value]
parameter should not be specified.
To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-1: Common
Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-1.
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
AUTOCONT
Auto Continue
0, 5 to 255, OFF, ON
0
(DEFAULT only)
A value of 0 or OFF indicates Auto Continue is
disabled. A value of ON indicates Auto Continue is set
to 30.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE on the Auto Continue variable
returns a numeric value.
Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255.
BINDING
Duplex Bind
LONGEDGE, SHORTEDGE
LONGEDGE
BITSPERPIXEL
Image
Enhancement
Technology and
Image
Enhancement
Technology Type
1, 2, 4, Auto
1
A value of 1 indicates the Image Enhancement
Technology setting is set to Off. A value of 2 or 4
indicates the Image Enhancement Technology setting
is set to On.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Image
Enhancement Technology as follows:
• If Image Enhancement Technology is set to Off, 1 is
returned.
• If Image Enhancement Technology is set to On, 2 or
4 is returned depending on the Image
Enhancement Technology Type setting. If Image
Enhancement Technology Type is set to On, the
numerical value of BITSPERPIXEL is returned. If
Image Enhancement Technology Type is set to
Auto, a value of 2 or 4 is returned depending on the
amount of total memory installed.
CLEARABLEWARNINGS
(READ only)
COPIES
Auto Continue
JOB, ON
from operator
If Auto Continue is set to On, JOB is returned.
panel non-fatal
warning messages If Auto Continue is set to Off, ON is returned.
ON
Number of copies
of each page
1
1 to 999
Note: If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 999.
3-13
PJL
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
CPLOCK
Disables menus
ON, OFF
OFF
(DEFAULT only)
ON disables the printer operator panel menus.
OFF enables menus.
DENSITY
Print Darkness
1 to 5
•
•
•
•
•
1 = Lightest
2 = Lighter
3 = Normal
4 = Darker
5 = Darkest
2, 3, 4
(Model specific)
To determine the default value of your printer, see
“Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer
Languages” on page B-1.
DUPLEX
Duplex
ON, OFF
OFF
ECONOMODE
Toner Saver
ON, OFF
OFF
FORMATTERNUMBER
Unique printer
identifier
The value of the NVRAM serial number field is
returned.
Set by printer
manufacturer
(READ only)
The NVRAM serial number field is set to the printer
serial number. In order to guarantee that a unique
identifier exists in this field, the printer writes a random
alphanumeric string into this field whenever the critical
byte area in NVRAM is re-initialized.
FORMLINES
Lines per page
1 to 255
Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255.
HOLD
(SET only)
HOLDKEY
(SET only)
Print and Hold
ON, OFF, STORE, PROOF
60, 64
(Country specific)
OFF
The HOLD variable interacts with the HOLDKEY and
HOLDTYPE variables. For more information, see
HOLDTYPE on page 3-14.
Print and Hold PIN “PIN”
PIN is a text string consisting of exactly four numerals.
Only the numerals 1 through 6 are valid.
Note: A null (“ “) string is an acceptable value and
indicates no PIN is specified.
The HOLDKEY variable interacts with the HOLD and
HOLDTYPE variables. For more information, see
HOLDTYPE as follows.
NULL
(no PIN)
3-14
PJL
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
HOLDTYPE
Print and Hold
Type
PUBLIC, PRIVATE
PUBLIC
(SET only)
The HOLD, HOLDKEY, and HOLDTYPE variables
interact with each other as follows:
• When HOLD is set to On, HOLDKEY is set to a
valid PIN, and HOLDTYPE is set to Private,
Confidential Print capability is available.
• When HOLD is set to On, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”,
and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Repeat Print
capability is available.
• When HOLD is set to Store, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”,
and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Reserve Print
capability is available.
• When HOLD is set to Proof, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”,
and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Verify Print
capability is available.
• Print and Hold capabilities are not available with
any other possible combination of HOLD,
HOLDKEY, and HOLDTYPE settings.
IMAGEADAPT
Resolution
reduction
ON, OFF
ON
INTRAY2
Tray lock - Tray 2
UNLOCKED, LOCKED
UNLOCKED
INTRAY3
Tray lock - Tray 3
UNLOCKED, LOCKED
UNLOCKED
INTRAY4
Tray lock - Tray 4
UNLOCKED, LOCKED
UNLOCKED
INTRAY5
Tray lock - Tray 5
UNLOCKED, LOCKED
UNLOCKED
INTRAY1SIZE
Tray 1 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, COM10, COM9,
MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE,
STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
Tray 2 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
Tray 3 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
Tray 4 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
Tray 5 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
Print and Hold
Jobname
“jobname”
NULL
(No jobname)
(DEFAULT only)
(SET only)
INTRAY2SIZE
(SET only)
INTRAY3SIZE
(SET only)
INTRAY4SIZE
(SET only)
INTRAY5SIZE
(SET only)
JOBNAME
(SET only)
jobname is a text string truncated to 24 characters.
Note: A null (“ ”) string is an acceptable value and
indicates no Print and Hold Jobname is specified.
3-15
PJL
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
JOBOFFSET
Offset Pages
ON, OFF, BETWEENJOBS, BETWEENCOPIES
OFF
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Offset
Pages as follows:
• If Offset Pages is set to Off, OFF is returned.
• If Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs or Between
Copies, ON is returned.
Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of
the same print job in two separate groups in an output
bin.
LANG
(DEFAULT only)
LOWTONER
Default display
language
DANISH, GERMAN, ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH,
ITALIAN, DUTCH, NORWEGIAN, SWEDISH,
PORTUGUESE, FINNISH, JAPANESE, RUSSIAN,
POLISH, HUNGARIAN, TURKISH, CZECH
Country specific
Toner Alarm
ON, OFF, CONTINUE, STOP
ON, CONTINUE
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
A value of ON or CONTINUE indicates the Toner
Alarm setting is set Off. The value of OFF or STOP
indicates the Toner Alarm setting is Single.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Toner
Alarm as follows:
• If Toner Alarm is set to Off, CONTINUE is returned.
• If Toner Alarm is set to Single, STOP is returned.
• If Toner Alarm is set to Continuous, STOP is
returned.
MANUALFEED
(READ only)
MEDIATYPE
Manual feed
selection
OFF
Default paper
source, default
formatting size
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, “name”
OFF
Printer always returns OFF.
PLAIN
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
custom print material types. The text string is
truncated to 24 characters.
MPTRAY
(DEFAULT only)
ORIENTATION
Multipurpose
feeder
configuration
CASSETTE, MANUAL, FIRST
Print orientation
PORTRAIT, LANDSCAPE
CASSETTE
Sets the configuration of the Multipurpose Feeder.
This variable does not affect PostScript emulation.
PORTRAIT
3-16
PJL
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
OUTBIN
Output Bin
UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Output Bin setting
returns:
PAGEPROTECT
Page Protect
Output Bin setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
AUTO, ON
AUTO
A value of ON indicates the Page Protect setting is set
On. The value of AUTO indicates the Page Protect
setting is set Off.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Page
Protect as follows:
• If Page Protect is set Off, AUTO is returned.
• If Page Protect is set On, ON is returned.
PAPER
Default paper
source, default
formatting size
Paper: A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER,
JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO,
LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17
Envelopes: COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5,
OTHERENVELOPE
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
3-17
PJL
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
PARALLEL
Parallel Protocol
SLOW, FAST
FAST
(DEFAULT only)
A value of SLOW indicates the Parallel Protocol
setting is Standard. The value of FAST indicates the
Parallel Protocol setting is FASTBYTES.
(Port Specific)
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the
Parallel Protocol as follows:
• If Parallel Protocol is set as Standard, SLOW is
returned.
• If Parallel Protocol is set as Fastbytes, FAST is
returned.
PASSWORD
(DEFAULT only)
Default password
for PJL NVRAM
security
0 to 65535
0
Locks the printer operator panel to keep the user
defaults from changing. Refer to your printer user
documentation for more information.
The Default PJL password is 0.
If the PJL password is not equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable returns
ENABLED. If the PJL password is equal to 0, a
DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable
returns DISABLED. See the PASSWORD parameter
of the JOB command on page 3-5 for more
information.
PERSONALITY
(Port specific)
SmartSwitch
settings
PCL, POSTSCRIPT, AUTO
AUTO
PERSONALITY controls the SmartSwitch settings for
the interface link on which the PJL command is
received.
If AUTO is sent, both PS SmartSwitch and PCL
Smartswitch menu settings are set to ON.
If PCL is sent, PS SmartSwitch is set to OFF and PCL
SmartSwitch is set to ON.
If POSTSCRIPT is sent, PCL SmartSwitch is set to
OFF and PS SmartSwitch is set to ON.
When queried, AUTO is returned if both SmartSwitch
settings are ON. If one SmartSwitch setting is OFF,
the printer language whose SmartSwitch setting is ON
is returned. If both SmartSwitch settings are OFF, the
default printer language is returned.
POWERSAVE
(DEFAULT only)
Power Save
feature
ON, OFF
ON enables the power-saving feature.
OFF disables the power-saving feature.
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000
or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot
have Power Saver disabled.
ON
3-18
PJL
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
POWERSAVETIME
Power Save time,
in minutes
0 to 120 (Model specific)
20
(DEFAULT only)
0 to 240 (Model specific)
(0 indicates the Power Saver Time feature is disabled.)
The time the printer remains idle before it enters
Power Save mode when POWERSAVE is On.
Note: If a value greater than 120 or 240 is specified by
a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to
120 or 240 based on the printer model.
QTY
(SET only)
Collation Collated Copies
(QTY)
0 to 999
0
Used to request the number of collated copies of a
print job.
If Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) is not equal to 0, a
DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting
for QTY. If Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) is set to
Off, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns 0.
Note: If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 999.
REPRINT
Jam Recovery
ON, OFF, AUTO
AUTO
RESOLUTION
Print Resolution
300, 600, 1200
600
RESOURCESAVE
Resource Save
ON, OFF, AUTO
OFF, AUTO
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
ON indicates Resource Save is set On.
OFF and AUTO indicate Resource Save is set to Off.
See “Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer
Languages” on page B-1 for the default value of your
printer.
RET
Print Quality
Enhancement
Technology
(PQET)
OFF, DARK, MEDIUM, LIGHT, ON
ON
If this value is set through PJL, the same value is
returned on a PJL inquiry.
DARK, MEDIUM, LIGHT, and ON values indicate that
PQET is On. OFF indicates PQET is Off.
TIMEOUT
Print timeout,
in seconds
0 to 255
The time the printer remains idle before the job is
forced to print.
Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255.
90
3-19
PJL
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
USERNAME
Print and Hold
Username
“username”
NULL
(No username)
(SET only)
username is a text string truncated to 24 characters.
Note: A null (“ “) string is an acceptable value and
indicates no Print and Hold Username is specified.
WIDEA4
A4 width
NO, YES
NO
NO indicates the A4 width is 198 mm.
YES indicates the A4 width is 203 mm.
Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages
The following variables are unique to some Lexmark printers and are supported for
both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation. Therefore, the [command
modifier:value] parameter should not be specified.
To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-2: Printer Unique
PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-3.
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LACTIVEBINRESET
Active Bin
Reset
MANUAL, AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
Advanced
Status
ON, OFF
ON
(DEFAULT only)
LADVANCEDSTATUS
(DEFAULT only)
(Port specific)
LALARMCONTROL
ON enables parallel bidirectional support.
OFF disables parallel bidirectional support.
Alarm Control
OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS
SINGLE
LAUTOCRLF
Auto CR after
LF
ON, OFF
OFF
LAUTOLFCR
Auto LF after
CR
ON, OFF
OFF
LBLANKPAGES
Blank Pages
DONOTPRINT, PRINT
DONOTPRINT
(DEFAULT only)
Note: Some printers have a fixed value of
DONOTPRINT.
LBONDLENGTH
Bond Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Bond Paper
Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
(DEFAULT only)
LBONDLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
3-20
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
LBONDOUTBIN
Assign
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
Type/Bin - Bond OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
(DEFAULT only)
Selections
Factory Default
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
bond paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Bond setting returns:
LBONDTEXTURE
Assign Type/Bin Bond setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bond Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
ROUGH
Bond Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
LBWLOCK
Black & White
Lock
ON, OFF
OFF
LCANCEL
Cancel Control
ON, OFF
ON
LCARDSTOCKLENGTH
Card Stock
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Card Stock
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
(DEFAULT only)
LBONDWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
(DEFAULT only)
LCARDSTOCKLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
3-21
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN
Assign
Type/Bin Card Stock
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on card
stock.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Card Stock setting returns:
LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LCOLLATION
Assign Type/Bin Card Stock setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Card Stock
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Card Stock
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Collation Mode
ON, OFF
OFF
If Collation is ON, the pages of the print job are
collated. For example, if the job contains three pages
and two copies are requested, collated output prints
pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. If collation is set to OFF,
uncollated output prints pages 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3.
LCOLORCORRECTION
LCOLOREDLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Indicates which
color target the
printer
emulates
NONE, DISPLAY, SWOP, OFF, AUTO, VIVID,
DUOTONE, MANUAL
Colored Paper
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
AUTO, VIVID
(Model specific)
See “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both
Printer Languages” on page B-3 for the default value
of your printer.
NORMAL
3-22
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCOLOREDLOADING
Colored Paper
Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Assign
Type/Bin Colored Paper
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
LCOLOREDOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
colored paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Colored Paper setting returns:
LCOLOREDTEXTURE
Assign Type/Bin Colored Paper
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Colored Paper
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Colored Paper
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
LCOLORMODEL
Color Model
CMYK, RGB, BLACK
RGB, CMYK
(Model specific)
LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
Universal Units
of Measure
INCHES, MILLIMETERS
INCHES,
MILLIMETERS
(Country specific)
LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH
Universal Width
76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm
3 to 36.01 in increments of 0.01 in.
216, 305 mm
8.5, 12 in.
(Model and
country specific)
(DEFAULT only)
LCOLOREDWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Note: Values are determined to be inches or
millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
setting.
3-23
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT
Universal
Height
76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm
3 to 36.01 in increments of 0.01 in.
356, 360, 457 mm
14, 14.17, 18 in.
(Model and
country specific)
Note: Values are determined to be inches or
millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
setting.
LCUSTOMPAPERFEED
Universal Feed
Direction
SHORTEDGE, LONGEDGE
SHORTEDGE
LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH
Custom Type 1
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Custom Type 1
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Custom Type 1
Media
PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
PAPER
Custom Type 1
Name
"name"
CUSTOMTYPE1
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
3-24
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN
Assign
Type/Bin Custom Type 1
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 1 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 1 setting returns:
LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 1
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Custom Type 1
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Custom Type 1
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Custom Type 2
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Custom Type 2
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Custom Type 2
Media
PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
PAPER
3-25
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME
Custom Type 2
Name
"name"
CUSTOMTYPE2
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin Custom Type 2
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 2 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 2 setting returns:
LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Assign Type/Bin
Custom Type 2
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Custom Type 2
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Custom Type 2
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Custom Type 3
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Custom Type 3
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
3-26
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA
Custom Type 3
Media
PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
PAPER
Custom Type 3
Name
"name"
CUSTOMTYPE3
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin Custom Type 3
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 3 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 3 setting returns:
LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 3
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Custom Type 3
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Custom Type 3
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Custom Type 4
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
3-27
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING
Custom Type 4
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Custom Type 4
Media
PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
PAPER
Custom Type 4
Name
"name"
CUSTOMTYPE4
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin Custom Type 4
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 4 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 4 setting returns:
LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Assign Type/Bin
Custom Type 4
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Custom Type 4
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Custom Type 4
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
3-28
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH
Custom Type 5
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Custom Type 5
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Custom Type 5
Media
PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
PAPER
Custom Type 5
Name
"name"
CUSTOMTYPE5
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE5OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin Custom Type 5
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 5 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 5 setting returns:
LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 5
Texture
Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 5
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
3-29
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT
Custom Type 5
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Custom Type 6
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Custom Type 6
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Custom Type 6
Media
PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
PAPER
Custom Type 6
Name
"name"
CUSTOMTYPE6
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin Custom Type 6
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 6 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 6 setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 6
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
3-30
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE
Custom Type 6
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Custom Type 6
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Download
Target
RAM, FLASH, FLASH1, DISK, DISK1
RAM
LDRYTIMEDELAY
Dry Time Delay
0, 3 ... 30, OFF, AUTO
OFF
LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS
Delete or Save
Print and Hold
Jobs
DELETE, SAVE
DELETE
LENVELOPEENHANCE
Envelope
Enhance
ON, OFF
ON
Envelope
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Assign
Type/Bin Envelope
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LDOWNLOADTARGET
(SET only)
(DEFAULT only)
LENVELOPELENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
LENVELOPEOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
If the device specified as the download target is write
or read/write password protected, the download target
will not be changed.
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
envelopes.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Envelope setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin Envelope setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
3-31
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LENVELOPETEXTURE
Envelope
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Envelope
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
ESC Character
Substitution
0 to 255
27
Fax Resolution
STANDARD, FINE, SUPERFINE, ULTRAFINE
STANDARD
(DEFAULT only)
LENVELOPEWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LESCCHAR
(READ only)
(Port specific)
LFAXRESOLUTION
(SET only)
LFAXREDIAL
Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when
no SET command has modified the
LFAXRESOLUTION variable. For more information,
see “Status Readback Commands” on page 3-54.
Fax Redial
(SET only)
LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY
(SET only)
LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG
(SET only)
LFEEDERPAPERTYPE
0 to 14
5
Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when
no SET command has modified the LFAXREDIAL
variable. For more information, see “Status Readback
Commands” on page 3-54.
Fax Redial
Frequency
1 to 200
Fax
Transmission
Log
PRINT, DONOTPRINT, PRINTERROR
Envelope
Feeder Paper
Type
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, “name”
3
Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when
no SET command has modified the
LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY variable. For more
information, see “Status Readback Commands” on
page 3-54.
PRINTERROR
Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when
no SET command has modified the
LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG variable. For more
information, see “Status Readback Commands” on
page 3-54.
ENVELOPE
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
LGLOSSYLOADING
Glossy Paper
Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
3-32
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN
Assign Type/Bin
- Glossy
UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
Glossy paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Glossy setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin Glossy setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
LGLOSSYTEXTURE
Glossy Paper
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
LGLOSSYWEIGHT
Glossy Paper
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
LHOLEPUNCHALARM
Hole Punch
Alarm
OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS
OFF
LHOLEPUNCHMODE
Hole Punch
Mode
2HOLE, 3HOLE, 4HOLE
3HOLE (US)
Honor INIT
Signal
HONORSIGNAL, DONOTHONORSIGNAL
DONOTHONOR
SIGNAL
LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS
Image
Brightness
-100 to 100
0
LIMAGECONTRAST
Image Contrast
-100 to 100
0
LIMAGEENHANCE
Image
Enhancement
Technology
ON, OFF
OFF
LHONORINIT
(DEFAULT only)
4HOLE (non-US)
(Port specific)
3-33
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LIMAGEENHANCETYPE
Image
Enhancement
Technology
Type
2, 4, AUTO
2, 4
Page Image
Orientation
DONOTROTATE, ROTATEPAPER,
ROTATEENVELOPES, ROTATESTAPLED,
ROTATESTAPLEDANDENVELOPES, ROTATEALL
DONOTROTATE
LIMAGESMOOTHING
Image
Smoothing for
PostScript
ON, OFF
OFF
LINFEEDERSIZE
Envelope
feeder installed
size, default
formatting size
COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5,
OTHERENVELOPE
COM10, DL
(Country specific)
LINKALERT
Ink Alert
ON, OFF
OFF
LIMAGEORIENTATION
(Model specific)
Note: The factory
default is
ROTATEPAPER if
an optional
finisher is
installed.
Displays a printer attendance message when an ink
cartridge is low.
LINMPFEEDERSIZE
Multipurpose
feeder installed
size, default
formatting size
Paper: A3, A3+, A4, A5, JISB4, B5PAPER, JISB5,
CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL,
LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
LJAMRECOVERY
Jam Recovery
ON, OFF, AUTO
AUTO
LLABELSLENGTH
Labels Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Labels Paper
Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Envelopes: COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5,
OTHERENVELOPE
(DEFAULT only)
LLABELSLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
3-34
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LLABELSOUTBIN
Assign
Type/Bin Labels
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
labels.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Labels setting returns:
LLABELSTEXTURE
Assign Type/Bin Labels setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Labels Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Labels Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
LLASTTRAYRENUMBER
Last Tray
Renumber
OFF, TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5,
MPFEEDER
OFF
LLEFTMARGINOFFSET
Left Margin
Offset
-128 to 127
0
LLETTERHEADLENGTH
Letterhead
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Letterhead
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
(DEFAULT only)
LLABELSWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
(DEFAULT only)
LLETTERHEADLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
3-35
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LLETTERHEADOUTBIN
Assign
Type/Bin Letterhead
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
letterhead paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Letterhead setting returns:
LLETTERHEADTEXTURE
Assign Type/Bin Letterhead setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Letterhead
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Letterhead
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT
Manual Color RGB Text
OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY
SRGBVIVID
LMANUALCOLORRGBGRAPHICS
Manual Color RGB Graphics
OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY
SRGBVIVID
LMANUALCOLORRGBIMAGE
Manual Color RGB Image
OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY
SRGBDISPLAY
LMANUALCOLORCMYKTEXT
Manual Color CMYK Text
OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK
USCMYK (US)
LMANUALCOLORCMYKGRAPHICS
Manual Color CMYK
Graphics
OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK
(DEFAULT only)
LLETTERHEADWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
EUROCMYK
(non-US)
USCMYK (US)
EUROCMYK
(non-US)
3-36
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LMANUALCOLORCMYKIMAGE
Manual Color CMYK Image
OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK
USCMYK (US)
LMANUALENVELOPESIZE
Manual
Envelope,
default
formatting size
COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5,
OTHERENVELOPE
COM10, DL
(Country specific)
LMANUALENVELOPETYPE
Manual
Envelope Type
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, “name”
ENVELOPE
EUROCMYK
(non-US)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
custom print material types. The text string is
truncated to 24 characters.
LMANUALPAPERSIZE
Manual Paper,
default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER,
CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, JISB4, JISB5,
LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
LMANUALPAPERTYPE
Manual Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE3
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE
Multipurpose
Feeder Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4,
CUSTOMTYPE6
PLAIN
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LMULTIPAGEBORDER
Multipage
Border
NONE, SOLID
NONE
LMULTIPAGEORDER
Multipage
Order
HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, REVHORIZONTAL,
REVVERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
3-37
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LMULTIPAGEPRINT
Multipage
Printing
OFF, 2UP, 3UP, 4UP, 6UP, 9UP, 12UP, 16UP
OFF
LMULTIPAGEVIEW
Multipage View
AUTO, SHORTEDGE, LONGEDGE
AUTO
LNPAP
NPA Protocol
Setting
ON, OFF, AUTO
AUTO
Optional Output
Bin 1 Name
"name"
(READ only)
(Port specific)
LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME
(DEFAULT only)
This value is reported for the interface link that the
command is received.
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN1
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output
Bin 2 Name
"name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN2
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output
Bin 3 Name
"name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN3
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output
Bin 4 Name
"name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN4
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output
Bin 5 Name
"name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN5
3-38
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME
Optional Output
Bin 6 Name
"name"
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN6
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output
Bin 7 Name
"name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN7
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output
Bin 8 Name
"name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN8
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output
Bin 9 Name
"name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN9
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME Optional Output
Bin 10 Name
(DEFAULT only)
"name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN10
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOUTBINCONFIG
(DEFAULT only)
Configure
Output Bins
MAILBOX, LINK, MAILBOXOVERFLOW,
LINKOPTIONAL, TYPEASSIGNMENT
MAILBOX
3-39
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LOVERFLOWOUTBIN
Overflow Bin
UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
If an output bin is full, print jobs assigned to that
output bin exit to the assigned overflow output bin.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Bin setting
returns:
LOVERFLOWTIMER
(DEFAULT only)
Overflow Timer,
in minutes
Overflow Bin
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
0 to 255
0
A value of 0 (zero) indicates Overflow Timer is set to
Disabled.
If Overflow Timer is set to Disabled, a DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting returns zero.
If Overflow Timer is set to a numeric value, a
DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting
returns that value.
LPAGECOUNT
Page Count
0 to 999999
0
LPAGEMODE
Print Area
NORMAL, WHOLEPAGE, FULLPAGE
NORMAL
LPAPERSOURCE
Default paper
source
TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, FEEDER,
MPFEEDER, MANUALPAPER, MANUALENVELOPE
TRAY1, TRAY2
(Model specific)
(READ only)
Note: If any optional source is specified, but it is not
installed, the default paper source is not changed.
See “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both
Printer Languages” on page B-3 for the default value
of your printer.
3-40
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LPICTUREGRADE
PictureGrade™
ON, OFF
ON
LPLAINLENGTH
Plain Paper
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Assign
Type/Bin - Plain
Paper
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
LPLAINOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
plain paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Plain setting returns:
LPLAINTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LPLAINWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LPOWERSAVER
(DEFAULT only)
Assign Type/Bin Plain setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Plain Paper
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Plain Paper
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Power Saver
time, in minutes
0 to 120 (Model specific)
20
0 to 240 (Model specific)
(0 indicates the Power Saver feature is disabled.)
Note: If a value outside the possible value range is
specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value
is changed to the closest value within the possible
value range.
Some printer models released in the year 2000 or
later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have
Power Saver disabled.
3-41
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LPPDS
Activate
Personal Printer
Data Stream
(PPDS) printer
language
ON, OFF
OFF
(DEFAULT only)
Use ON to enable PPDS printer language and OFF to
disable PPDS printer language. After this command is
processed, the printer performs a Power On Reset
(POR) to activate the changes.
Note: The following printer settings in NVRAM are
changed when PPDS is activated:
• PCL and PS SmartSwitch settings for each port are
turned off
• Printer Language is set to PPDS
LPPDSFORMLINES
(DEFAULT only)
LPPDSLINESPERINCH
Lines Per Page
(PPDS)
1 to 255
64, 68
(Country specific)
Lines Per Inch
0.25 to 30.00 in increments of 0.25
6.00
(DEFAULT only)
LPREPRINTEDLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
LPREPRINTEDLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Note: If a Lines Per Inch setting outside this range is
specified, the printer defaults to the closest number in
the range.
Preprinted
Paper Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Preprinted
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
3-42
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN
Assign
Type/Bin Preprinted
Paper
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
preprinted paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Preprinted Paper setting returns:
LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LPRINTBUFFER
Assign Type/Bin Preprinted paper
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Preprinted
Paper Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Preprinted
Paper Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Print Buffer
control
ON, OFF
ON
If ON is selected, Print Buffer displays with the
Waiting message.
If OFF is selected, Print Buffer does not display with
the Waiting message.
LPRINTHEADIDLETIME
Printhead Idle
Time
0 to 15 seconds
0
LPRINTERUSAGE
Printer Usage
MAXSPEED, MAXYIELD
MAXSPEED,
MAXYIELD
(Model specific)
LPRINTMENUSBUTTON
Disable Print
Menus from
front panel
ON, OFF
ON
(SET only)
(DEFAULT only)
3-43
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LPRINTQUALITY
Print Quality
Mode
QUICKPRINT, NORMAL, PRESENTATION,
GRAPHICS, IMAGES, 1200IMAGEQ, INKSAVER,
NORMAL, BEST
NORMAL
LPUNCH
Hole Punch
ON, OFF
OFF
LREAROUTBINNAME
Rear Output Bin
Name
"name"
REAROUTBIN
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LREPEATPRINTLIMIT
(DEFAULT only)
Print and Hold
Repeat Print
Job Limit
0 to 50 jobs
5
Specifies the number of Repeat Print jobs that can be
held in printer memory.
If the Repeat Print Job Limit setting is not equal to 0, a
DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting
for LREPEATPRINTLIMIT. If Repeat Print Job Limit
setting is set to Disabled, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE
returns 0.
LRESET
Reset Control
ON, OFF
ON
When the LRESET variable is set to ON, RESET
PRINTER is available in the JOB MENU when the
printer is in the Busy or Waiting state. This is true for
most printers with a printer operator panel.
If this variable is set to OFF, RESET PRINTER is not
available.
LRESOURCESAVE
Resource Save
ON, OFF
OFF
LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET
Right Margin
Offset
-10 to 10
0
LSCREENING
Color
Screening
Selections
COLORGRADE, IMAGESONLY, IET
COLORGRADE
LSEPARATORSHEETS
Indicates where
separator
sheets are
placed within
the print job
NONE, BETWEENCOPIES, BETWEENJOBS,
BETWEENPAGES
NONE
LSEPARATORSOURCE
Indicates which
source contains
the separator
sheets
TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, FEEDER,
MPFEEDER, MANUALPAPER, MANUALENVELOPE
TRAY1
(DEFAULT only)
3-44
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME
Standard
Output
Bin Name
"name"
UPPER
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LSTROKEWIDTH
PostScript
minimum stroke
width
1 to 255
LSTAPLE
Staple Job
ON, OFF, AUTO, FRONT, BACK, DUAL, 0, 1, 2
OFF
LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM
Staples Empty
Alarm
OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS
OFF
Staple Priming
Bin
OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2,
OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4,
OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6,
OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8,
OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10
OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONAL
OUTBIN2
(Model specific)
Staple Priming
Source
TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER TRAY1
LSUBSTITUTESIZE
Substitute Size
OFF, LETTERA4, STATEMENTA5, 11X17A3,
ALLLISTED
OFF, LETTERA4,
ALLLISTED
(Model specific)
LTHINCOAT
Thin Coat
ON, OFF
ON
LTOPBINROTATE
Top Bin
Timeout,
in minutes
0 to 255
0
LTOPMARGINOFFSET
Top Margin
Offset
-128 to 127
0
LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH
Transparency
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
(DEFAULT only)
LSTAPLETESTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
LSTAPLETESTSOURCE
(DEFAULT only)
(DEFAULT only)
(DEFAULT only)
The width of a line or a stroke between two points.
1 pel or 1/600th
inch
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on LTOPBINROTATE
returns the numeric value.
3-45
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN
Assign
Type/Bin Transparency
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER,
DISABLED
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
transparencies.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Transparency setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin DINQUIRE or
Transparency setting INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Transparency
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Transparency
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE
PAPER
Detected Type
for Paper Tray 1
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6
PLAIN
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE
TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type
for Transparency- Tray 1
TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5
TRANSPARENCY
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE
PAPER
Detected Type
for Paper Tray 2
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE2
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE
TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type
TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5
for Transparency - Tray 2
(DEFAULT only)
LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
TRANSPARENCY
3-46
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPE
PAPER
Detected Type
for Paper Tray 3
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE3
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPE
TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type
TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5
for Transparency - Tray 3
TRANSPARENCY
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE
PAPER
Detected Type
for Paper Tray 4
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE4
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE
TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type
TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5
for Transparency - Tray 4
TRANSPARENCY
LTRAY1AUTOSIZE
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 1
ON, OFF
ON
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 2
ON, OFF
ON
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 3
ON, OFF
ON
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 4
ON, OFF
ON
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 5
ON, OFF
ON
Tray 1 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
PLAIN
(DEFAULT only)
LTRAY2AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
LTRAY3AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
LTRAY4AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
LTRAY5AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
LTRAY1PAPERTYPE
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
3-47
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LTRAY2PAPERTYPE
Tray 2 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE2
(Model specific)
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
See “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both
Printer Languages” on page B-3 for the default value
for your printer.
LTRAY3PAPERTYPE
Tray 3 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE3
(Model specific)
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
See “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both
Printer Languages” on page B-3 for the default value
for your printer.
LTRAY4PAPERTYPE
Tray 4 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE4
(Model specific)
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
LTRAY5PAPERTYPE
Tray 5 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE5
(Model specific)
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
LTRAY1RENUMBER
Tray 1
Renumber
OFF, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER
OFF
LTYPE1FONTS
Enables Type 1
fonts for PCL
emulation
OFF, ON
ON
LUSDEFAULTS
US/non-US
defaults
US, NONUS
US, NONUS
(Country specific)
(DEFAULT only)
3-48
PJL
Common Variables for PCL Emulation
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer
and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Use these variables only for PCL emulation. The [command modifier:value]
parameter should be specified as LPARM:PCL. For example:
@PJL SET LPARM:PCL FONTSOURCE=I<CR><LF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-3: Common
Variables for PCL Emulation” on page B-11.
Table 3-5: Common Variables for PCL Emulation
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
FONTNUMBER
Font Number
0, 1, .... n
0
FONTSOURCE
Font Source
I, S, M1, M2, M3, M4, D1
I
I
S
M1, M2,
M3, M4
D1
Internal font source
Permanent download fonts
Flash font source
Disk font source
All other values default to internal font source.
PITCH
PTSIZE
SYMSET
Default pitch
(fixed-pitch fonts)
0.08 to 100 (in increments of 0.01)
Default point size
(proportional
spaced fonts)
1 to 1008 (in increments of 0.25)
Symbol set for the
default font
For a list of the values for the Lexmark X422,
see “Font and Symbol Set Support for the
Lexmark X422” on page 2-9.
10.00
Note: If an invalid pitch is requested, the printer
selects the closest pitch.
12.00
Note: If an invalid point size is requested, the
printer selects the closest point size.
For a list of the values for the Lexmark C510(n),
see “Font and Symbol Set Support for the
Lexmark C510(n)” on page 2-19.
If a symbol set is requested that is not resident
in the printer, the symbol set is not changed.
PC8, PC850
(Country specific)
3-49
PJL
Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation
The following variables are unique to your printer and are supported in PCL emulation
only. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:PCL.
For example:
@PJL SET LPARM:PCL LBITMAPROUNDING=OFF[<CR>]<LF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-4: Printer Unique
Variables for PCL Emulation” on page B-11.
Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LA4WIDTH
A4 Width in
millimeters
198, 203
198
LASSIGNFEEDER
Tray Renumber
Assign Envelope
Feeder
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE
Tray Renumber
Assign Manual
Envelope
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNMANUALPAPER
Tray Renumber
OFF, 0 to 199
Assign Manual Paper
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
OFF
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNMPFEEDER
Tray Renumber
Assign Multipurpose
Feeder
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
OFF
3-50
PJL
Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LASSIGNTRAY1
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 1
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNTRAY2
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 2
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNTRAY3
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 3
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNTRAY4
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 4
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNTRAY5
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 5
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LBITMAPROUNDING
Bitmap Font Partial
Pel Rounding
ON, OFF
ON
Some printers handle partial pel character
escapement rounding of bitmap fonts differently.
LBITMAPROUNDING offers a way of instructing
the printer how to handle partial pel rounding of
bitmap fonts.
Bitmap rounding is compatible with the HewlettPackard Company’s LaserJet printers.
LCOLOREXTENSIONS
Color Extensions
ON, OFF, HPCLJ5
ON
3-51
PJL
Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LFONTCOMPATIBILITY
Font Compatibility
Level
PCL5, PCL6
PCL6
LFONTPRIORITY
Font Priority Search
RESOLUTION, NORESOLUTION
RESOLUTION
(SET only)
When RESOLUTION is specified, your printer is
compatible with the Hewlett-Packard Company’s
LaserJet printers.
When NORESOLUTION is specified, font
resolution is removed from the font selection
priority criteria.
Common Variables for PostScript Emulation
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer
and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Use these variables only for PostScript emulation. The [command modifier:value]
parameter should be specified as LPARM:POSTSCRIPT. For example:
@PJL SET LPARM:POSTSCRIPT JAMRECOVERY=OFF[<CR>]<LF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-5: Common
Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page B-12.
Table 3-7: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory
Default
JAMRECOVERY
Jam Recovery
ON, OFF
OFF
For queries, when the Jam Recovery setting is set
to Auto, PJL returns the value of OFF. The
remaining two Jam Recovery values, On and Off
are returned by PJL as ON and OFF respectively.
When PJL is used to set Jam Recovery OFF, the
setting is actually set to Auto. When PJL is used to
set Jam Recovery ON, the setting is set to ON.
Changing this variable also affects PCL emulation.
PRTPSERRS
Print PS Errors
ON, OFF
OFF
3-52
PJL
Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation
The following variables are unique in some printers and are supported in PostScript
emulation only.
The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:POSTSCRIPT.
For example:
@PJL SET LPARM:POSTSCRIPT LPICTUREGRADE=ON[<CR>]<LF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-6 on page B-12.
Table 3-8: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LPICTUREGRADE
PictureGrade
ON, OFF
ON
LPSFONTPRIORITY
Font Priority
RESIDENT, FLASHDISK
RESIDENT
Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
Use the following variables when additional storage devices are installed.
The [command modifier:value] parameter of the DEFAULT, INQUIRE, DINQUIRE,
and SET commands must be specified as LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype".
For example:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"LDESCRIPTION="my
description"[<CR>]<LF>
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
device
flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
filename
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a
PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and
demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case
sensitive.
filetype
The identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL
macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets
Using the DEFAULT command to modify any of these variables forces a write to flash
or disk if resource collection mode is set to On before the command is executed. The
DEFAULT command causes a PJL Reset.
3-53
PJL
To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-7: Printer Unique
LRESOURCE Variables” on page B-13.
Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
Factory
Default
Variable
Function
Selections
LDESCRIPTION
Macro or Symbol
Set Description 1
"alphanumeric string"
(DEFAULT
only)
The description is limited to 16 characters and must be enclosed in
double quotes. If more than 16 characters are specified by the
DEFAULT command, the first 16 characters are used and a PJL
parser warning is issued.
NULL
(no
description)
The DINQUIRE command can be used to query the file description.
The description is returned in the response.
LRWLOCK
(DEFAULT
only)
Read/Write Lock
(password) for an
entire device or a
particular file on
the device 2
"alphanumeric string"
This variable can be used with other PJL commands:
• DEFAULT command
The Read/Write password is limited to eight characters. If more
than eight characters are specified by the PJL DEFAULT
command, the password is truncated and a PJL warning is issued.
NULL
(no
password)
If a null (" ") password is given, password protection is removed
from the specified device or file.
• DINQUIRE or INQUIRE commands
NOTSET
Use these commands to determine if a password has been
specified for a device or specific file. The response is one of the
following:
NOTSET
SET
EXPIRED
The password has not been set or has been reset to
zero.
The password is defined and active.
The password is reset to zero (flash memory only).
The LDECLARE command can be used to temporarily unlock access
to a device or particular file. See “File and Device Protection
Commands” on page 3-93 for additional information about using
passwords on these devices.
LWLOCK
(DEFAULT
only)
1
2
Write Lock
(password) for an
entire device or
particular file on
the device 2
"alphanumeric string"
Same as LRWLOCK, except the password limits write-only access
instead of read-write access.
NULL
(no
password)
The macro or symbol set description is printed in the Description field of the Print Directory listing.
To password protect a device, the command modifier:value should be LRESOURCE :"device:". The colon (:) and
double quotes (" ") must be specified.
3-54
PJL
Status Readback Commands
Applications can request configuration and status information from the printer using
the Status Readback commands. In addition, the printer can also be instructed to send
unsolicited status information back to the host computer when asynchronous events
occur, such as a memory error or a paper jam.
To determine which commands your printer supports, see “Table B-8: Status
Readback Commands” on page B-13.
DINQUIRE Command
This command is used to query the default setting (NVRAM) of the specified
environment variable.
Syntax:
@PJL DINQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable[<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL DINQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable<CR><LF>
value<CR><LF>
<FF>
where:
[command modifier:value]
The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variable to
be queried. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on
page 3-12.
•
A [command modifier:value] parameter is not required for variables listed
in the tables “Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12,
and “Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-19.
•
LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
“Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48, and “Printer Unique
Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-49.)
3-55
•
PJL
LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation.
(See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51,
and “Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52.)
•
LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE vari-
ables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
page 3-53.)
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
device
flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
filename
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID
for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive.
filetype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for
PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the
table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the
supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive.
variable=value
The supported variables are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12.
This printer returns a ? for inquiries of an unsupported variable, or inquiries of a
variable associated with an option that is not installed.
ECHO Command
The ECHO command instructs the printer to return the specified words after the
command is parsed. This command provides a method of capturing the status
information returned by a specific print job.
Syntax:
@PJL ECHO [words][<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL ECHO [words]<CR><LF>
<FF>
words parameter
The words parameter must start with a printable character and can consist of a
combination of printable characters, spaces, and horizontal tabs.
3-56
PJL
Note: The ECHO command is terminated by the line feed character.
INFO Command
The INFO command is used to query status information from the printer.
“Table 3-10: INFO Category Parameter Values” on page 3-56 lists the categories of
information that can be queried.
See “Status Message Format” on page 3-61 for additional information about the
messages returned by the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED
commands.
Syntax:
@PJL INFO category[<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL INFO category<CR><LF>
[one or more lines of printable characters, spaces, or tabs]<CR><LF>
<FF>
category
Table 3-10 lists the supported categories.
Table 3-10: INFO Category Parameter Values
Category Values
Description
ID
Returns the model name or the model number stored in the printer
NVRAM.
CONFIG
Returns the printer configuration, including paper sources, paper sizes,
and installed options.
MEMORY
Returns the printer available memory.
PAGECOUNT
Returns the printer page count.
STATUS
Returns the printer current status.
VARIABLES
Returns the printer environment variables and values.
USTATUS
Returns the printer unsolicited status variables and values.
3-57
INFO CONFIG Response Syntax (An Example):
@PJL INFO CONFIG<CR><LF>
IN TRAYS [2 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
INTRAY1<CR><LF>
INTRAY2<CR><LF>
MANUAL FEED<CR><LF>
OUT TRAYS [1 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
UPPER FACEDOWN<CR><LF>
PAPERS [13 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
LETTER<CR><LF>
LEGAL<CR><LF>
A4<CR><LF>
A5<CR><LF>
B5PAPER<CR><LF>
EXECUTIVE<CR><LF>
COM10<CR><LF>
COM9<CR><LF>
MONARCH<CR><LF>
DL<CR><LF>
C5<CR><LF>
B5<CR><LF>
OTHERENVELOPE<CR><LF>
LANGUAGES [1 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
PCL<CR><LF>
USTATUS [4 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
DEVICE<CR><LF>
JOB<CR><LF>
PAGE<CR><LF>
TIMED<CR><LF>
FLASH=1048576<CR><LF>
DISK=543283200
MEMORY=2097152<CR><LF>
DISPLAY LINES=2<CR><LF>
SYSTEM FIRMWARE VERSION=250A<CR><LF>
ENGINE FIRMWARE VERSION=0<CR><LF>
<FF>
PJL
3-58
PJL
INQUIRE Command
This command is used to query the current setting of the specified environment
variable.
Syntax:
@PJL INQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable[<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL INQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable<CR><LF>
value<CR><LF>
<FF>
[command modifier:value]
The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables
to be queried. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on
page 3-12.
•
A [command modifier:value] parameter is not required for variables listed
in the tables “Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12,
and “Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-19.
•
LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
“Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48, and “Printer Unique
Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-49.)
•
LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation.
(See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51,
and “Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52.)
•
LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE vari-
ables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
page 3-53.)
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
device
flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
filename
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID
for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive.
filetype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for
PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the
table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the
supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive.
3-59
PJL
variable=value
The supported variables are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12.
This printer returns a ? for inquiries of an unsupported variable, or inquiries of a
variable associated with an option that is not installed.
USTATUS Command
This command is used to enable and disable unsolicited status from the printer.
Unsolicited status information is sent automatically when an asynchronous event
occurs. “Table 3-11: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values” on page 3-60 lists
the asynchronous information that can be enabled and disabled.
Syntax:
@PJL USTATUS ustatus variable=value[<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL USTATUS ustatus variable<CR><LF>
[one or more lines of printable characters, spaces, or tabs]<CR><LF>
<FF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-9: USTATUS
Unsolicited Status Variables” on page B-13.
See “Status Message Format” on page 3-61 for additional information about the
messages returned by the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED
commands.
3-60
PJL
ustatus variable=value
The following values are supported for the ustatus variable=value parameter.
Table 3-11: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values
Ustatus Variable
Value
Description
DEVICE
ON
Enables unsolicited status for device changes.
VERBOSE
Enables unsolicited status for all device changes. Also
enables warnings from the PJL parser.
OFF
Disables unsolicited status for device changes.
ON
Enables unsolicited status for job changes. The
printer sends a status message when a job begins
and ends.
OFF
Disables unsolicited status for job changes.
ON
Enables unsolicited status for page changes. The
printer sends a status message when a printed sheet
reaches the standard output bin.
OFF
Disables unsolicited status for page changes.
5 to 300 in seconds
Enables timed unsolicited status. The printer
automatically sends status at a specified time interval.
0
Disables timed unsolicited status.
JOB
PAGE
TIMED
USTATUSOFF Command
This command turns off unsolicited status. Unsolicited status may also be turned off
by using the USTATUS command on each variable.
Syntax:
@PJL USTATUSOFF[<CR>]<LF>
3-61
PJL
Status Message Format
The format of the returned information from the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE,
and USTATUS TIMED commands is described in this section.
Information Messages
Information messages are returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
Table 3-12: PJL Information Messages
Printer State
Status Code Display String
Online Status
Ready
10001
Ready
TRUE
Ready
10001
RDYMSG
TRUE
Ready with Ink Low
10006
88 Ink Low
TRUE
Not Ready
10002
Not Ready
FALSE
In the Menus
10002
Not Ready
FALSE
Printer reset
10005
Resetting the Printer
FALSE
Ready with Toner Low
10006
88 Toner Low
TRUE
Ready with Toner Low
10006
88 Yellow Toner Low
TRUE
Ready with Toner Low
10006
88 Magenta Toner Low
TRUE
Ready with Toner Low
10006
88 Cyan Toner Low
TRUE
Ready with Toner Low
10006
88 Black Toner Low
TRUE
Ready with Toner Low
10006
88 Color Print Cartridge Low
TRUE
Ready with Toner Low
10006
88 Black Print Cartridge Low
TRUE
Ready with Toner Low
10006
88 Photo Print Cartridge Low
TRUE
Ready with Replace Toner
10006
Replace Toner
TRUE
Ready with Replace PC Kit
10006
Replace PC Kit
TRUE
Ready with Replace Fuser
10006
Replace Fuser
TRUE
x represents an input source code. For more information on input source codes, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes” on page 3-74.
yy represents a size code. For more information on size codes, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74.
ww represents the bin code. For more information on bin codes, see “Table 3-18: Output Bin Codes” on page 3-75.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display message longer than one line shows only the first line
of the message.
3-62
PJL
Table 3-12: PJL Information Messages
Printer State
Status Code Display String
Online Status
Ready with Replace Transfer
10006
Replace Transfer
TRUE
Power Saver with Ink Low
10006
88 Ink Low
TRUE
Power Saver mode with Toner Low
10006
88 Toner Low
TRUE
Power Saver mode with Replace Toner
10006
Replace Toner
TRUE
Power Saver mode with Replace PC Kit
10006
Replace PC Kit
TRUE
Power Saver mode with Replace Fuser
10006
Replace Fuser
TRUE
Power Saver mode with Replace Transfer
10006
Replace Transfer
TRUE
Cancelling Job
10007
Cancelling Job
TRUE
Busy
10023
Busy
TRUE
Waiting
10024
Waiting
TRUE
Input Source Empty
11xyy
Tray <source #> Empty
TRUE
Input Source Missing
12xyy
Tray <source #> Missing
TRUE
Output Bin Full
15ww1
Bin <bin #> Full
TRUE
Resolution Reduced
35029
Res Reduced
TRUE
Power Saver
35078
Powersaver
TRUE
x represents an input source code. For more information on input source codes, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes” on page 3-74.
yy represents a size code. For more information on size codes, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74.
ww represents the bin code. For more information on bin codes, see “Table 3-18: Output Bin Codes” on page 3-75.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display message longer than one line shows only the first line
of the message.
3-63
PJL
Auto-Continuable Conditions
These status messages are returned independent of the state of the Auto Continue
menu item. Auto-continuable messages are returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
To determine which messages your printer supports, see “Table B-10: PJL Messages
for Auto-Continuable Conditions” on page B-14.
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions
Status
Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
PPDS font error
30014
50 PPDS Font Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
insufficient collation area
30016
37 Insufficient Collation Area
FALSE
Intervention required:
insufficient defragment memory
30016
37 Insufficient Defrag Memory
FALSE
Intervention required:
insufficient memory
30016
37 Insufficient Memory
FALSE
Intervention required:
memory full
30016
38 Memory Full
FALSE
Intervention required:
held jobs may not be restored
30016
Held Jobs May Not Be Restored
FALSE
Intervention required:
configuration change
30016
57 Configuration Change
FALSE
Intervention required:
complex page
30017
39 Complex Page
FALSE
Intervention required:
standard serial error
30018
54 Standard Serial Error
FALSE
Intervention required: serial option error
30018
54 Serial Option 1 Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
parallel error
30018
54 Parallel Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
network software error
30018
54 Std Network Software Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
standard serial fax connection lost
30018
54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost
FALSE
Intervention required:
standard serial disabled
30018
56 Standard Serial Disabled
FALSE
Printer State
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of
the message.
3-64
PJL
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
Status
Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
serial option disabled
30018
56 Serial 1 Port Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
standard parallel port disabled
30018
56 Standard Parallel Port Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
parallel port disabled
30018
56 Parallel Port Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
parallel port error
30018
56 Parallel Port x Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
standard USB port disabled
30018
56 Standard USB Port Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
resource save off deficient memory
30019
35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory
FALSE
Intervention required:
insufficient fax buffer
30026
55 Insufficient Fax Buffer
FALSE
Intervention required:
standard parallel ENA connection lost
30027
54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost
FALSE
Intervention required: standard parallel port
disabled
30027
56 Std Parallel Port Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required: resolution reduced
30029
36 Resolution Reduced
FALSE
Intervention required:
print jobs on disk request
30031
Print Jobs on Disk? or
Print Jobs on Disk. Go/Stop?
FALSE
Intervention required:
printer powered off, disk installed with Print
and Hold jobs on the disk
30031
Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop?
FALSE
Intervention required:
short paper
30034
34 Short Paper
FALSE
Intervention required:
flash full
30035
52 Flash Full
FALSE
Intervention required:
disk full
30035
62 Disk Full
FALSE
Intervention required:
defective flash
30036
51 Defective Flash
FALSE
Intervention required:
unformatted flash
30036
53 Unformatted Flash
FALSE
Intervention required:
defective disk
30036
61 Defective Disk
FALSE
Intervention required:
unformatted disk
30036
63 Unformatted Disk
FALSE
Printer State
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of
the message.
3-65
PJL
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
Status
Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
scheduled maintenance
30075
80 Scheduled Maintenance
FALSE
Intervention required:
resource save off deficient memory
30076
35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory
FALSE
Intervention required:
insufficient collation area
30076
37 Insufficient Collation Area
FALSE
Intervention required:
hole punch box full
30107
Empty Hole Punch Box
FALSE
Intervention required:
hole punch box full
30107
Empty Box M
FALSE
Intervention required:
hole punch box missing
30107
Insert Box M
FALSE
Intervention required:
staple cartridge missing
30107
Insert Staple Cartridge
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert stapler
30107
Insert Stapler
FALSE
Intervention required:
priming failed
30107
Priming Failed, Retry. Go/Stop?
FALSE
Intervention required:
network x software error
30112
54 Network x Software Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
serial port x disabled
30112
56 Serial Port x Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
serial option x error
30112
54 Serial Option x Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
serial x fax connection lost
30112
54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost
FALSE
Intervention required:
USB port disabled
30112
56 USB Port x Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
parallel x ENA connection lost
30113
54 Par x ENA Connection Lost
FALSE
Intervention required:
parallel x port disabled
30113
56 Parallel Port x Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
disk operation failed jobs on disk
32001
Operation Failed Jobs on Disk
FALSE
Intervention required:
disk operation failed faxes on disk
32001
Operation Failed Faxes on Disk
FALSE
Intervention required:
flash full
32002
52 Flash Full
FALSE
Printer State
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of
the message.
3-66
PJL
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
Status
Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
disk full
32002
62 Disk Full
FALSE
Intervention required:
disk corrupted
32015
Disk Corrupted. Reformat?
FALSE
Intervention required:
too many flash options installed
32030
58 Too Many Flash Options
FALSE
Intervention required:
unformatted flash
32052
53 Unformatted Flash
FALSE
Intervention required:
unformatted disk
32052
63 Unformatted Disk
FALSE
Intervention required:
unsupported disk format
32052
64 Unsupported Disk Format
FALSE
Intervention required:
defective flash
32056
51 Defective Flash
FALSE
Intervention required:
defective disk
32056
61 Defective Disk
FALSE
Intervention required:
scheduled maintenance
35075
80 Scheduled Maintenance
FALSE
Intervention required:
scheduled maintenance
35075
81 Scheduled Maintenance
FALSE
Intervention required: fuser maintenance
40038
80 Fuser Maintenance
FALSE
Intervention required: fuser maintenance
40038
80 Fuser Life Warning
FALSE
Intervention required: belt maintenance
40038
80 Belt Life Warning
FALSE
Intervention required:
fuser/belt maintenance
40038
80 Fuser/Belt Life Warning
FALSE
Intervention required: fuser maintenance
40038
80 Fuser Exhausted
FALSE
Intervention required: belt maintenance
40038
80 Belt Exhausted
FALSE
Intervention required:
fuser/belt maintenance
40038
80 Fuser/Belt Exhausted
FALSE
Intervention required: ITU maintenance
40038
83 ITU Maintenance
FALSE
Printer State
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of
the message.
3-67
PJL
Attendance Conditions
Attendance conditions require operator intervention. Attendance messages are
returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
To determine which messages your printer supports, see “Table B-11: PJL Messages
for Attendance Conditions” on page B-18.
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
insert coating roll
40010
30 Coating Roll Missing
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert print unit
40010
30 XXXX1 Print Unit Missing
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert hole punch box
40010
Insert Hole Punch Box
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert photoconductor cartridge
40010
Insert PC Cartridge
FALSE
Intervention required:
printer upper door open
40021
Cover Open or Close Top Covers or
Insert Cartridge or Close Door
FALSE
Intervention required:
close toner box cover
40021
Close Cover A
FALSE
Intervention required:
defective print cartridge or defective
ink cartridge
40021
31 Defective Print Cartridge
31 Defective Cartridge XXXX
FALSE
Intervention required:
unsupported print cartridge
40021
32 Unsupported Print Cartridge
FALSE
Intervention required:
unsupported print cartridge
40021
32 Unsupported XXXX Cartridge
FALSE
Intervention required:
unsupported cartridge
40021
32 Unsupported Cartridge
FALSE
Intervention required:
change cartridge invalid refill
40021
Change Cartridge Invalid Refill
FALSE
Intervention required:
cartridge life expired
40021
Cartridge Life Expired XXXX
FALSE
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2 <d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
3 <c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
3-68
PJL
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
cartridge life warning
40021
Cartridge Life Warning XXXX
FALSE
Intervention required:
missing cartridge
40021
31 Missing Cartridge XXXX
FALSE
Intervention required:
missing printhead
40021
31 Missing Printhead
FALSE
Intervention required:
unsupported printhead
40021
32 Unsupported Printhead
FALSE
Intervention required:
size sense error
40021
40 Tray x Size Sense Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
open bin exit tray
40021
41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray
FALSE
Intervention required:
printer cover open
40021
Close Cover
FALSE
Intervention required:
open cover
40021
Open Cover
FALSE
Intervention required:
deflector open
40021
Close Deflector G
FALSE
Intervention required:
open rear door
40021
Open Rear Door
FALSE
Intervention required:
close front door
40021
Close Front Door
FALSE
Intervention required:
close side door
40021
Close Side Door
FALSE
Intervention required:
close finisher door
40021
Close Finisher Door
FALSE
Intervention required:
close finisher side door
40021
Close Finisher Side Door
FALSE
Intervention required:
close finisher top cover
40021
Close Finisher Top Cover
FALSE
Intervention required:
close door <d> 2
40021
Close Door <d>
FALSE
Intervention required:
close cover <c> 3
40021
Close Cover <c>
FALSE
Intervention required:
close tray top cover
40021
Close Tray x Top Cover
FALSE
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2 <d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
3 <c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
3-69
PJL
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
print cartridge missing
40021
Insert Print Cartridge
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
40022
2xx Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
check tray connection
40027
Check Tray <source #> Connection
FALSE
Intervention required:
install tray x or cancel job
40027
Install Tray x or Cancel Job
FALSE
Intervention required:
envelope feeder detached
40028
Reattach Envelope Feeder
FALSE
Intervention required:
multipurpose feeder detached
40028
Reattach MP Feeder
FALSE
Intervention required:
install envelope feeder or cancel job
40028
Install Env Feed or Cancel Job
FALSE
Intervention required:
reattach output bin
40029
Reattach Output Bin <bin #>
FALSE
Intervention required:
reattach bins
40029
Reattach Bins <bin #x - bin #y>
FALSE
Intervention required:
install bin x or cancel job
40029
Install Bin x or Cancel Job
FALSE
Intervention required:
check finisher installation
40029
Check Finisher Installation
FALSE
Intervention required:
check mailbox installation
40029
Check Mailbox Installation
FALSE
Intervention required:
tray configuration error
40030
33 Tray x Config Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
input configuration error
40030
58 Input Config Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
too many trays attached
40030
58 Too Many Trays Attached
FALSE
Intervention required:
too many bins attached
40030
58 Too Many Bins Attached
FALSE
Intervention required:
too many disks installed
40030
58 Too Many Disks Installed
FALSE
Intervention required:
too many disks installed
40036
58 Too Many Disks Installed
FALSE
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2 <d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
3 <c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
3-70
PJL
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
PerfectFinish™ missing
40037
31 PerfectFinish Missing
FALSE
Intervention required:
PerfectFinish empty
40037
87 PerfectFinish Empty
FALSE
Intervention required:
photo developer nearly exhausted
40038
84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning
FALSE
Intervention required:
photo developer nearly exhausted
40038
84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning
FALSE
Intervention required:
color photo developer exhausted
40038
84 All Photo Devs Exhausted
FALSE
Intervention required:
black photo developer exhausted
40038
84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner low
40038
88 Toner Low
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner low
40038
88 Yellow Toner Low
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner low
40038
88 Magenta Toner Low
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner low
40038
88 Cyan Toner Low
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner low
40038
88 Black Toner Low
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner empty
40038
88 Yellow Toner Empty
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner empty
40038
88 Cyan Toner Empty
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner empty
40038
88 Magenta Toner Empty
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner empty
40038
88 Black Toner Empty
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner low
40038
88 Color Print Cartridge Low
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner low
40038
88 Black Print Cartridge Low
FALSE
Intervention required:
toner low
40038
88 Photo Print Cartridge Low
FALSE
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2 <d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
3 <c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
3-71
PJL
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
cartridge low
40038
88 Cartridge Low
<CMYK>
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace photoconductor kit
40038
Replace PC Kit
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace photoconductor kit to continue
40038
Replace PC Kit To Continue
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace toner cartridge
40038
Replace Toner Cartridge
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace toner cartridge to continue
40038
Replace Toner To Continue
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace oil coating roll
40038
Replace Oil Coating Roll
FALSE
Intervention required:
cartridge empty
40039
89 Cartridge Empty
<CMYK>
FALSE
Intervention required:
load staples
40040
Load Staples
FALSE
Intervention required:
priming failed. retry?
40041
Priming Failed. Retry?
FALSE
Intervention required:
OPMSG
40048
Message specified by OPMSG
FALSE
Intervention required:
STMSG
40049
Message specified by STMSG
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace fuser
40050
Replace Fuser
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace transfer kit
40050
Replace Transfer Kit
FALSE
Intervention required:
incompatible bin x
40087
59 Incompatible Bin x
FALSE
Intervention required:
incompatible duplex
40088
59 Incompatible Duplex
FALSE
Intervention required:
incompatible tray x
40089
59 Incompatible Tray x
FALSE
Intervention required:
incompatible envelope feeder
40090
59 Incompatible Envelope Feeder
FALSE
Intervention required:
check duplex connection
40095
Check Duplex Connection
FALSE
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2 <d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
3 <c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
3-72
PJL
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
install duplex or cancel job
40095
Install Duplex or Cancel Job
FALSE
Intervention required:
duplex cover open
40096
Close Duplex Door
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert duplex option
40096
Insert Duplex Option
FALSE
Intervention required:
load staples
40101
Load Staples
FALSE
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2 <d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
3 <c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
Operator Intervention - Paper Handling
When a Load <tray>, Load Manual, or Change <tray> message appears on the printer
operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional, a message is returned to
the host computer indicating the paper source and size for the prompt.
Attendance (operator intervention) messages are returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
The display string is the first line of the message that displays.
3-73
PJL
To determine which messages your printer supports, see “Table B-12: PJL Messages
for Paper Handling” on page B-23.
Table 3-15: PJL Messages for Paper Handling
Status
Code
Display String*
Online Status
Intervention required:
wrong paper size in tray x
30034
34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x
FALSE
Intervention required:
wrong paper size manual feed
30034
34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed
FALSE
Intervention required:
remove paper standard bin
40019
Remove Paper Standard Bin
FALSE
Intervention required:
remove paper output bin
40019
Remove Paper Output Bin <bin #>
FALSE
Intervention required:
remove paper all output bins
40019
Remove Paper All Output Bins
FALSE
Intervention required:
remove paper
40019
Remove Paper <linked set bin name>
FALSE
Intervention required:
check <source> paper guide
4100x
Check <source> Paper Guide
FALSE
Intervention required:
incorrect media
41xyy
34 Incorrect Media
FALSE
Intervention required:
load request
41xyy
Load <source>...
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
FALSE
Intervention required:
load manual request
41xyy
Load Manual
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
FALSE
Intervention required:
change request
41xyy
Change <source>...
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
FALSE
Intevention required:
insert duplex pages & press Go.
412yy
Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go.
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert tray request
4300x
Insert Tray <source #>
FALSE
Printer State
x represents an input source code. For more information, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes” on page 3-74.
yy represents a media size code. For more information, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74.
* Refer to your printer user documentation for more information on printer messages.
3-74
Table 3-16: Tray Codes
X Value
Tray
0
Multipurpose Feeder
1
Manual Feed
2
Tray 1
3
Tray 2
4
Envelope Feeder
5
Tray 3
6
Tray 4
7
Tray 5
Table 3-17: Media Size Codes
YY Value
Media Size
00
Universal
01
Other Envelope
02
Letter Paper
03
Legal Paper
04
A4 Paper
05
Executive Paper
06
11 x 17 (Ledger)
07
A3
08
Com 10 Envelope
09
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)
10
C5 Envelope
11
DL Envelope
12
JIS B4
13
JIS B5 Paper
14
B5 Envelope
15
Custom Media
16
A3+, JB4 Paper
(Model specific)
17
JB5 Paper
18
JPostcard
19
JDoublePostcard
PJL
3-75
PJL
Table 3-17: Media Size Codes
YY Value
Media Size
20
A5
21
Folio
22
Statement
90
Com 9 Envelope
Table 3-18: Output Bin Codes
WW Value
Output Bin
00
Standard Bin
01
Bin 1
02
Bin 2
03
Bin 3
04
Bin 4
05
Bin 5
06
Bin 6
07
Bin 7
08
Bin 8
09
Bin 9
10
Bin 10
Operator Intervention - Paper Jams
When a <#> Paper Jam message appears on the printer operator panel display or
through MarkVision Professional, a message is returned to the host computer
indicating the type and location for the prompt.
Attendance (operator intervention) messages are returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
3-76
PJL
To determine which messages your printer supports, see Table B-13 on page B-24.
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4200x
200 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4201x
201 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4202x
202 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4203x
203 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4204x
204 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4205x
205 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4206x
206 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4207x
207 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4208x
208 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4209x
209 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4210x
210 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4211x
211 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4220x
220 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4221x
221 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4222x
222 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4230x
230 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4231x
231 Paper Jam
FALSE
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* Refer to your printer user documentation for more information on printer messages.
3-77
PJL
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4232x
232 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4233x
233 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4234x
234 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
424yx
24y Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4241wy
241 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4242wy
242 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4243w
243 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4244wy
244 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4245w
245 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4246w
246 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4247wy
247 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4248w
248 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4249w
249 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4250w
250 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4250x
250 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4251wy
251 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4251x
251 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4252w
252 Paper Jam
FALSE
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* Refer to your printer user documentation for more information on printer messages.
3-78
PJL
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4253w
253 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4254wy
254 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4255
255 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4256w
256 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4257w
257 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4258w
258 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4259wy
259 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4260w
260 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4260x
260 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4261w
261 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4261x
261 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
427zx
27z Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4271
271 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4272
272 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4273
273 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4280x
280 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4280x
Clear Staple Job from Finisher
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4280w
280 Paper Jam
FALSE
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* Refer to your printer user documentation for more information on printer messages.
3-79
PJL
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4281w
281 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4281x
281 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4282w
282 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4282x
282 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4283w
283 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4283x
283 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4284w
284 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4284x
284 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4285w
285 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4286w
286 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4287
287 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4288
288 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4289
289 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4290
290 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4291
291 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4292
292 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4293
293 Paper Jam
FALSE
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* Refer to your printer user documentation for more information on printer messages.
3-80
PJL
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4294
294 Paper Jam
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4295
295 Paper Jam
FALSE
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* Refer to your printer user documentation for more information on printer messages.
Service Errors
Error Code 50000 is returned for all 9xx Service Errors when the printer can return a
status code.
To determine whether your printer supports returning service messages, see
“Table B-14: Service Errors” on page B-29.
Device Attendance Commands
To determine which commands your printer supports, see “Table B-15: Device
Attendance Messages” on page B-29.
RDYMSG Command
The RDYMSG command is used to specify a message that appears on the first line of
the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional whenever the
printer is ONLINE (in the Ready or Busy state). This message displays instead of the
Ready or Busy message.
3-81
PJL
Syntax:
@PJL RDYMSG DISPLAY = "message"[<CR>]<LF>
OPMSG Command
When an OPMSG command is received, the message appears and is allotted both
lines of the display. The printer is taken OFFLINE. This message, along with the
STMSG command, is the lowest priority, so if another intervention occurs, it displays
instead.
Note: Refer to your printer user documentation for information about how to return
your printer to the ONLINE state. Once in the ONLINE state, the Ready, Busy,
or Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through
MarkVision Professional.
A printer reset is not available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision
Professional while OPMSG displays.
Syntax:
@PJL OPMSG DISPLAY = "message"[<CR>]<LF>
STMSG Command
When a STMSG command is received, the message appears and is allotted both lines
of the display. The printer is taken OFFLINE. This message, along with the OPMSG
command, is the lowest priority, so if another intervention occurs, it displays instead.
Note: Refer to your printer user documentation for information about how to return
your printer to the ONLINE state. Once in the ONLINE state, the Ready, Busy,
or Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through
MarkVision Professional.
A printer reset is not available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision
Professional while STMSG displays.
Syntax:
@PJL STMSG DISPLAY = "message"[<CR>]<LF>
3-82
PJL
Unique PJL Commands
To determine which commands your printer supports, see “Table B-16: Lexmark
Unique PJL Commands” on page B-29.
LBEEP Command
This command causes the printer to beep three times.
Syntax:
@PJL LBEEP[<CR>]<LF>
LPORTROTATE Command
This command causes the printer to rotate ports at the next job boundary. The
information to rotate ports is specified in the job header. For example, the printer could
switch from parallel interface to serial interface between jobs.
Syntax:
@PJL LPORTROTATE[<CR>]<LF>
3-83
PJL
LPRINT Commands (Information Pages)
Use these commands to print one of the internal information pages.
@PJL testpage[<CR>]<LF>
The supported testpage values are listed in the following table.
Table 3-20: LPRINT testpage Commands
testpage Value
Description
LPRINTDIRECTORY
Prints both the flash and disk directory listings. If neither flash
memory or a disk is installed, the command is ignored.
LPRINTTESTPAGE
Prints the test page.
LPRINTMENUS
Prints the menu settings page.
LPRINTPCLFONTS
Prints the PCL font listing.
LPRINTPSFONTS
Prints the PostScript font listing.
For example, to print a menu settings page:
Syntax:
@PJL LPRINTMENUS[<CR>]<LF>
LESCAPECHAR Command
This command modifies the code point of the escape character for the host computer
specified by the PORT parameter. The escape character is mapped to code point
0x1B for each host interface port.
Syntax:
@PJL LESCAPECHAR CHAR=byte PORT=port [<CR>]<LF>
CHAR parameter
The byte value for the CHAR parameter is the code point of the ASCII character
used for the escape character.
For example, at the factory, the printer uses 0x1B (character <Esc>) for the
escape character. If CHAR = 65 is specified with this command, the printer uses
0x41 (character ‘A’) as the escape character for the host interface port specified
via the PORT parameter.
3-84
PORT parameter
The following ports are valid parameters for LESCAPECHAR:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
INA
INA1
INA2
INA3
LOCALTALK1
LOCALTALK2
LOCALTALK3
PARALLEL
PARALLEL1
PARALLEL2
PARALLEL 3
USB
USB1
USB2
USB3
SERIAL
SERIAL1
SERIAL2
SERIAL3
IR
IR1
IR2
IR3
PJL
3-85
PJL
LFAX PHONENUMBER Command
This command tells the printer that the output resulting from the current job is being
sent to the fax processing device instead of to the printer. The current job is printed
and is not sent to the fax processing device if one of the following occurs:
•
The printer is not configured for fax send capability
•
The command is received with a command that selects an interpreter that
does not support formatting functionality for sending faxes
Syntax:
@PJL LFAX PHONENUMBER=“number” [STATIONID=“station name”][<CR>]<LF>
PHONENUMBER=“number”
The PHONENUMBER parameter is a text string up to 60 characters long. If an
unsupported character is supplied in the PHONENUMBER parameter, the entire
LFAX PHONENUMBER command is ignored.
Table 3-21: LFAX PHONENUMBER “number” Values
Character
Description
0-9
DTMF1
*
DTMF1 character *
#
DTMF1 character #
A-D
DTMF1 characters A, B, C, and D
!
Flash
W
Wait for dial tone
@
Wait for silence
&
Wait for credit card tone
, (comma)
Pause
^
Toggles between tone and pulse modes
1
digits 0 to 9
DTMF, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency, is the system used by touch-tone telephones which assigns a
specific frequency, or tone, to each key so it can easily be identified by a microprocessor.
[STATIONID=“station name”]
The STATIONID parameter specifies a station name that is sent to the receiving fax
machine to indicate the origin of an incoming fax. The “station name” is a text string
which is truncated to 20 characters. A null value (“ “) indicates no station ID is
specified. If no station name is specified, the default station name of the printer is
used.
3-86
PJL
LDOWNLOADTARGET Command
This command specifies which device is the target for downloaded files. The target
can be RAM, flash, or disk.
Syntax:
@PJL SET LDOWNLOADTARGET=variable [<CR>]<LF>
File Commands for Flash or Disk
Use the following commands to manage resources on flash and disk devices:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LOPENFILE
LCLOSEFILE
LREADFILE
LWRITEFILE
LRUNFILE
LRENAMEFILE
LDELETEFILE
LFORMAT
LDEFRAG
Syntax:
@PJL LOPENFILE DEVICE=filedevice FILENAME=fname ACCESS=accesstype
[<CR>]<LF>
See Chapter 6: “Flash Memory and Disk” for more information.
3-87
PJL
Table 3-22 lists the parameters used with most of the commands. Additional
parameters are noted in the description of each command.
Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands
Parameter
Syntax
Description
accesstype
ACCESS = accesstype
One of the following access types must be specified when a file is opened:
RO
WO
RW
AP
Open for read only. File must already exist on specified device.
Create a new file. If the file already exists, its contents will be
discarded and a new file will be created.
Open for reading and writing. File must already exist.
Open for reading and writing, and position the file pointer to the end
of the file. File must already exist.
Access types are case sensitive.
The LREADFILE command is ignored if the file was not opened with an
accesstype of RO, RW, or AP. The LWRITEFILE command is ignored if the
file was not opened with an accesstype of WO, RW, or AP.
bytecount
LENGTH = bytecount
The amount of data in bytes to be read or written. The parameter is optional
for both the LREADFILE and LWRITEFILE commands.
If the LENGTH parameter is omitted from the LREADFILE command,
bytecount is assumed to be equal to the entire file beginning at the START
location. If the LENGTH parameter is omitted from the LWRITEFILE
command, an @PJL END DATA command must be placed at the end of the
data. All data up to ‘@’ in @PJL END DATA is written to the file.
Note: The LWRITEFILE command requires that either the LENGTH
parameter or the @PJL END DATA command be specified, but not both.
If the LENGTH is greater than the file size on a LREADFILE command, it is
assumed to be the entire file beginning at the START location.
3-88
PJL
Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands (Continued)
Parameter
Syntax
Description
filedevice
DEVICE = filedevice
File storage media. Case insensitive.
flash
flash1
disk
disk1
rom
The rom value is used for the LRUNFILE command only.
Note: The command is ignored if the device is not installed.
flashdevice DEVICE = flashdevice
File storage media.
flash
flash1
filename
FILENAME = "fname"
OLDFILENAME = "fname"
NEWFILENAME = "fname"
Fname is comprised of a filename, a unique identifier for a file, and a filetype,
which specifies the type of file. The format is filename.filetype.
The filename must be one of the following:
macro ID
symbol set ID
font ID
actual filename
PCL macros
PCL symbol sets
PCL fonts
data, Type 1 fonts, demo files
(case sensitive)
The filetype must be one of the following:
t1
sFnt5
bFnt5
MAC5
data
type1
demo
p5scalable
p5bitmap
p5macro
p5symset
ppdsbm
xlmacro
PostScript font
PCL scalable font
PCL bitmap font
PCL macro
User Data
PostScript font
Demo
PCL scalable font
PCL bitmap font
PCL macro
PCL symbol set
PPDS bitmap font
PCL XL user stream
All fname specifications must be enclosed in quotation marks and cannot
exceed 127 characters.
If the file is password-protected, the password must be provided in order to
unlock the file.
For additional information about passwords, see “File and Device Protection
Commands” on page 3-93.
3-89
PJL
Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands (Continued)
Parameter
Syntax
Description
location
START = location
The location in the file to begin writing or reading. Use an integer that
represents an offset in bytes from the beginning of the file.
Optional for both LREADFILE and LWRITEFILE commands. If omitted on an
LREADFILE command, location of 0 (beginning of the file) is assumed. If
omitted on an LWRITEFILE command with an accesstype of RW,
location of 0 is also assumed.
If a START location is provided but it is greater than the file size, the
LREADFILE command response will contain no file data. Similarly, an
LWRITEFILE command with an accesstype of RW functions like an
LWRITEFILE command with an accesstype of AP.
Note: If PostScript emulation is used to create the file on the device, it may
automatically attach a .data extension to the fname. See “Filename
Extensions” on page 6-10 for more information. For example, if "myfile" is
downloaded to flash through PostScript emulation, the fname on the PJL
commands is "myfile.data".
LOPENFILE Command
Use this command to open a file on a storage device.
Syntax:
@PJL LOPENFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"
ACCESS = accesstype[<CR>]<LF>
LCLOSEFILE Command
Use this command to close a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if the
file doesn’t exist on the device or if the file is not open.
Syntax:
@PJL LCLOSEFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"[<CR>]<LF>
3-90
PJL
LREADFILE Command
Use this command to read data from a file on a storage device.
Syntax:
@PJL LREADFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"
[START = location] [LENGTH = bytecount][<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL LREADFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"
START = location LENGTH = bytecount<CR><LF>
<requested data from the file>@PJL END DATA<CR><LF><FF>
Notes:
•
The file must be closed using the LCLOSEFILE command once all operations
are complete.
•
The command is ignored if the file doesn’t exist on the device or has not
already been opened with LOPENFILE with an accesstype of RO, RW, or AP.
•
If START = location parameter is omitted, location 0 (beginning of the file) is
assumed.
•
If a START location is provided but it is greater than the file size, the response
will contain no file data.
•
If the LENGTH parameter is omitted, bytecount is assumed to be equal to
the entire file beginning at the START location.
•
If the LENGTH is greater than the file size on a LREADFILE command, it is
assumed to be the entire file beginning at the START location.
3-91
PJL
LWRITEFILE Command
Use this command to write data to a file on a storage device.
Syntax:
@PJL LWRITEFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"
[START = location] [LENGTH = bytecount][<CR>]<LF><data>
[@PJL END DATA][<CR>]<LF>
Notes:
•
The file must be closed using the LCLOSEFILE command once all operations
are complete.
•
The command is ignored if the file doesn’t exist on the device. The command
is ignored if the file isn’t already open with a write accesstype.
•
If START = location is omitted on a file with an accesstype of RW, location 0
is assumed.
•
If START = location is greater than file size and the accesstype is RW, it
positions the file pointer at the end of the file.
•
If the LENGTH is omitted from a LWRITEFILE command, an @PJL END
DATA must be placed at the end of the data. All data up to ‘@’ in @PJL END
DATA is written to the file. The command requires either the LENGTH
parameter or the @PJL END DATA be specified, but not both.
LRUNFILE Command
Use this command to load and execute a file on a storage device. For example, use
this command to run the resident demo file or a demo file stored on flash or disk.
Syntax:
@PJL LRUNFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"[<CR>]<LF>
3-92
PJL
LRENAMEFILE Command
Use this command to rename a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if
the filename specified as OLDFILENAME doesn’t exist on the device, or if the
filename specified as NEWFILENAME already exists on the device.
Syntax:
@PJL LRENAMEFILE DEVICE = filedevice OLDFILENAME = "fname"
NEWFILENAME = "fname"[<CR>]<LF>
LDELETEFILE Command
Use this command to delete a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if the
file doesn’t exist on the device.
Syntax:
@PJL LDELETEFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"[<CR>]<LF>
LFORMAT Command
Use this command to format a device for storage.
Syntax:
@PJL LFORMAT DEVICE = filedevice[<CR>]<LF>
LDEFRAG Command
Use this command to recover storage space on a flash device.
Syntax:
@PJL LDEFRAG DEVICE = flashdevice[<CR>]<LF>
3-93
PJL
File and Device Protection Commands
The following information applies to password protection.
•
You can set both read/write and write passwords for a resource. If both
passwords are set, the read/write password has precedence over the write
password.
•
If you attempt to password protect a non-existing resource, the PJL
interpreter will return a warning (CODE = 25001).
•
If a resource has already been password protected, the resource must be
“unlocked” before you can specify a different password for that resource.
•
Several restrictions with passwords apply to flash due to the nature of the
technology:
– You can create/change passwords for the whole flash multiple times, but
each change uses up free space in the flash that can only be recovered by
reformatting the whole flash.
– You can create passwords for individual resources on the flash only once.
You can also delete this password once. If this is done, you must recreate
the resource before using the password feature again.
Protecting a File or Device
Use the DEFAULT command to set a password on the entire flash or disk or on an
individual macro or font in flash.
Password Protection for a File
LRWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a file or device for reading and writing.
LWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a file or device for writing only.
3-94
PJL
Syntax:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype"
LRWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF>
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype"
LWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF>
The filename used depends on whether you wish to put a password on a font or a
macro.
The filename for a font is a five digit ID from the print directory page (add zeros to the
left of the ID to fill the five digits) followed by a three digit instance number. The first
time a font is downloaded after a flash has been formatted, the instance number is 0.
Filetypes are described under filename in “Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE
Variables” on page 3-53. For example, to write password protect a PCL emulation
bitmapped font (filetype of p5bitmap) with an ID of 127, which has not been
downloaded since flash was formatted:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"flash:00127000.p5bitmap"
LWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF>
To password protect a macro, the filename is the ID taken from the print directory
page, followed by the filetype. For example, to read/write password protect a
PCL emulation macro (filetype is p5macro) saved to flash with an ID of 1023:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"flash:1023.p5macro"
LRWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF>
Note: If the filename is incorrect, the printer applies the password to the entire
device.
Password for an Entire Device
If you want to set a password on a device, not just a single file, omit the filename.
LRWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a device for reading and writing. LWLOCK
with DEFAULT specified locks a device for writing only.
Syntax:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"device:" LRWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF>
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"device:" LWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF>
3-95
PJL
Unlocking a Protected File or Device
Use the LDECLARE command to specify a password so a protected file or device may
be accessed or “unlocked.” The LDECLARE command is only allowed within a JOB/
EOJ combination.
LRWLOCK with LDECLARE specified unlocks a file or device for reading and writing.
LWLOCK with LDECLARE specified unlocks a file or device for writing only. The file
or device must be re-locked using the LDELETEPASSWORD command after the job
is completed. The file or device is not automatically re-locked with the EOJ command.
Syntax:
@PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"
LRWLOCK = "password"[<CR>]<LF>
@PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"
LWLOCK = "password"[<CR>]<LF>
LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
device
flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
filename
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a
PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and
demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case
sensitive.
filetype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL
macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table
beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file
types. The filetype is case sensitive.
LRWLOCK = "password" or LWLOCK = "password"
See “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-52 for information
about values for LRWLOCK = "password" and LWLOCK = "password" parameters.
Note: This should be the same password that was defined in the DEFAULT
command. See “Password Protection for a File” on page 3-93 and “Password
for an Entire Device” on page 3-94 for examples.
3-96
PJL
Re-Locking a Protected File or Device
Use the LDELETEPASSWORD command to re-lock a password-protected file or
device that has been unlocked using the LDECLARE command.
If an LRESOURCE is not specified, all unlocked files or devices are re-locked.
Syntax:
@PJL LDELETEPASSWORD [LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"][<CR>]<LF>
LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
device
flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
filename
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a
PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and
demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case
sensitive.
filetype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL
macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table
beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported
filetypes. The filetype is case sensitive.
3-97
PJL
Unlocking a Protected File or Device for the Current Job
The file or device unlocked by the execution of this command is automatically
re-locked upon execution of the EOJ command or by a printer language change.
Syntax:
@PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"
LRWLOCKJ = "password"[<CR>]<LF>
@PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"
LWLOCKJ = "password"[<CR>]<LF>
LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
device
flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
filename
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a
PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and
demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case
sensitive.
filetype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL
macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table
beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file
types. The filetype is case sensitive.
LRWLOCK = "password" or LWLOCK = "password" Parameters
See “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-52 for information
about values for LRWLOCK = "password" and LWLOCK = "password" parameters.
3-98
PJL
Recovering Lost Passwords
Use the LQUERYSEED and LBYPASSPASSWORD commands to recover lost
passwords.
Syntax:
@PJL LQUERYSEED[<CR>]<LF>
@PJL LBYPASSPASSWORD KEY = "key"[<CR>]<LF>
Use the following steps to retrieve lost passwords:
1
Send the LQUERYSEED command to the printer by one of the host computer
interfaces.
This command causes a value, the “seed,” to display on the printer operator
panel, through MarkVision Professional or, if there isn’t an LCD panel, to print on
the Menu Settings Page. The value of the “seed” determines the key.
2
Obtain the key from the Lexmark Customer Support Center.
You must have the “seed” value.
3
Send the @PJL LBYPASSPASSWORD command to the printer by any port.
If the correct key is specified, a modified version of the directory is produced.
The directory indicates the appropriate passwords for the flash or disk.
4-1
PostScript
CHAPTER 4: PostScript Emulation
This section explains PostScript emulation supplemental operators in detail. For more
information, refer to the PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by
Adobe Systems, Inc.
To determine which commands your printer supports, see Appendix C: “PostScript
Support” on page C-1.
Selecting PostScript Emulation
Using SmartSwitch
When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface, the printer
automatically switches to the printer language being sent by your software program.
The printer is shipped with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages and all
interfaces. The printer examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between
PostScript emulation and PCL emulation.
Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional
You may select PostScript emulation from the printer operator panel or through
MarkVision Professional. To disable the automatic switching and have all input
interpreted as PostScript language, turn PCL SmartSwitch Off and set the printer
language default to PostScript emulation. Refer to your printer user documentation for
information on changing menu settings.
4-2
PostScript
Using Your Software Program
To select PostScript emulation, use the ENTER LANGUAGE command, which is a
Printer Job Language (PJL) command. See “ENTER LANGUAGE Command” on
page 3-3. See “Printer Job Language” on page 3-1 for syntax and use of PJL.
Warning: When you change printer languages, you may lose all previously
downloaded fonts and macros, unless Resource Save is set to On or the
resources are stored in flash memory or on disk.
4-3
PostScript
Page Formatting
The printable areas and logical pages for PostScript emulation, both portrait and
landscape orientation, are illustrated below. See the Legend that follows for definitions
of areas A through F.
Printable Areas
Portrait
Landscape
Legend:
A
Distance between the edge of the physical page and the printable area for the left side of
a portrait page; distance between the edge of the physical page and the printable area
for the top of a landscape page
B
Portrait printable area width; landscape printable area length
C
Portrait printable area length; landscape printable area width
D
Distance between the edge of the physical page and the printable area for the top of a
portrait page; distance between the edge of the physical page and the printable area for
the left side of a landscape page
E
Distance between the edge of the physical page and the printable area for the right side
of a portrait page; distance between the edge of the physical page and the printable area
for the bottom of a landscape page
F
Distance between the edge of the physical page and the printable area for the bottom of
a portrait page; distance between the edge of the physical page and the printable area
for the right side of a landscape page
4-4
PostScript
Logical Page Size
See the following tables for the logical page size dimensions your printer supports. If
information about your printer is not included in the following tables, see page 1-1 for
information on how to get a Technical Reference for your printer.
Lexmark C510(n)
The following table lists the exact width and length of the printable areas for all paper
and envelope sizes the Lexmark C510(n) printer supports. Areas A through F in the
table are described in the Legend under “Printable Areas” on page 4-3.
Table 4-1: Lexmark C510(n) PostScript 3 Emulation Printable Area
Selection
Paper Dimensions
Name
Millimeters
Dimensions by Area (pels) in 600th of an Inch
Inches
A
B
C
D
E
F
Paper
A4 (203 mm)
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
80
4810
6814
100
70
100
A5
148 x 210
5.83 x 8.27
100
3296
4760
100
100
100
JIS B5 Paper
182 x 257
7.2 x 10.1
100
4114
5870
100
86
100
Executive
184 x 267
7.25 x 10.5
100
4150
6100
100
100
100
1
216 x 330
8.5 x 13
100
4900
7600
100
100
100
Letter
216 x 279
8.5 x 11
100
4900
6400
100
100
100
Legal1
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
4900
8200
100
100
100
Statement
140 x 216
5.5 x 8.5
100
3100
4900
100
100
100
1
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
4900
8200
100
100
100
Folio
Universal
Envelope
DL
110 x 220
4.33 x 8.66
100
2482
4996
100
16
100
C5
162 x 229
6.38 x 9.02
100
3698
5208
100
28
100
B5 Envelope
176 x 250
6.93 x 9.84
100
4048
5704
100
8
100
Other Envelope1
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
4900
8200
100
100
100
9 (Com 9)
98 x 225
3.875 x 8.875
100
2224
5124
100
2
100
10 (Com 10)
105 x 241
4.125 x 9.5
100
2352
5500
100
22
100
1
The Lexmark C510(n) supports this size media only with an optional legal tray.
4-5
PostScript
Lexmark X422
The following table lists the exact width and length of the printable areas for all paper
and envelope sizes the Lexmark X422 printer supports. Areas A through F in the table
are described in the Legend under “Printable Areas” on page 4-3.
Table 4-2: Lexmark X422 PostScript 3 Emulation Printable Area
Selection
Paper/Envelope Dimensions
Dimensions by Area (pels) in 600th of an Inch
Name
Millimeters
A
Inches
B
C
D
E
F
Paper
JIS B4
257 x 364
10.1 x 14.3
100
5870
8400
100
100
100
JIS B5 Paper
182 x 257
7.2 x 10.1
100
4114
5870
100
86
100
A4 (203 mm)
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
80
4828
6814
100
52
100
A5
148 x 210
5.83 x 8.27
100
3296
4760
100
100
100
Executive
184 x 267
7.25 x 10.5
100
4150
6100
100
100
100
Folio
216 x 330
8.5 x 13
100
4900
7600
100
100
100
Letter
216 x 279
8.5 x 11
100
4900
6400
100
100
100
Legal
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
4900
8200
100
100
100
Statement
140 x 216
5.5 x 8.5
100
3100
4900
100
100
100
Universal
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
5100
8500
100
100
100
Envelope
DL
110 x 220
4.33 x 8.66
100
2482
4996
100
16
100
C5
162 x 229
6.38 x 9.02
100
3698
5208
100
28
100
B5 Envelope
176 x 250
6.93 x 9.84
100
4048
5704
100
8
100
Other Envelope
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
4900
8200
100
100
100
7-3/4 Monarch
98 x 191
3.875 x 7.5
100
2224
4300
100
2
100
9 (Com 9)
98 x 225
3.875 x 8.875
100
2224
5124
100
2
100
10 (Com 10)
105 x 241
4.125 x 9.5
100
2352
5500
100
22
100
4-6
PostScript
Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n
The following table lists the exact width and length of the printable areas for all paper
and envelope sizes the Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, and E332 printers
support. Areas A through F in the table are described in the Legend under “Printable
Areas” on page 4-3.
Table 4-3: Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n PostScript 3 Emulation Printable Area
Selection
Paper/Envelope Dimensions
Dimensions by Area (pels) in 600th of an Inch
Name
Millimeters
A
Inches
B
C
D
E
F
Paper
JIS B4
257 x 364
10.1 x 14.3
100
5870
8400
100
100
100
JIS B5 Paper
182 x 257
7.2 x 10.1
100
4114
5870
100
86
100
A4 (203 mm)
210 x 297
8.3 x 11.7
80
4828
6814
100
52
100
A5
148 x 210
5.83 x 8.27
100
3296
4760
100
100
100
Executive
184 x 267
7.25 x 10.5
100
4150
6100
100
100
100
Folio
216 x 330
8.5 x 13
100
4900
7600
100
100
100
Letter
216 x 279
8.5 x 11
100
4900
6400
100
100
100
Legal
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
4900
8200
100
100
100
Statement
140 x 216
5.5 x 8.5
100
3100
4900
100
100
100
Universal
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
5100
8500
100
100
100
Envelope
DL
110 x 220
4.33 x 8.66
100
2482
4996
100
16
100
C5
162 x 229
6.38 x 9.02
100
3698
5208
100
28
100
B5 Envelope
176 x 250
6.93 x 9.84
100
4048
5704
100
8
100
Other Envelope
216 x 356
8.5 x 14
100
4900
8200
100
100
100
7-3/4 Monarch
98 x 191
3.875 x 7.5
100
2224
4300
100
2
100
9 (Com 9)
98 x 225
3.875 x 8.875
100
2224
5124
100
2
100
10 (Com 10)
105 x 241
4.125 x 9.5
100
2352
5500
100
22
100
4-7
PostScript
PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark X422
The Lexmark X422 printer has 91 resident fonts in PostScript emulation.
AlbertusMT
Helvetica-LightOblique
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
AlbertusMT-Italic
Helvetica-Black
Optima
AlbertusMT-Light
Helvetica-BlackOblique
Optima-Bold
AntiqueOlive-Roman
Helvetica
Optima-BoldItalic
AntiqueOlive-Italic
Helvetica-Oblique
Optima-Italic
AntiqueOlive-Bold
Helvetica-Bold
Palatino-Roman
AntiqueOlive-Compact
Helvetica-BoldOblique
Palatino-Italic
ArialMT
Helvetica-Narrow
Palatino-Bold
Arial-ItalicMT
Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
Palatino-BoldItalic
Arial-BoldMT
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
Symbol
Arial-BoldItalicMT
Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
Times-Roman
AvantGarde-Book
Intl-CG-Times
Times-Italic
AvantGarde-BookOblique
Intl-CG-Times-Italic
Times-Bold
AvantGarde-Demi
Intl-CG-Times-Bold
Times-BoldItalic
AvantGarde-DemiOblique
Intl-CG-Times-BoldItalic
TimesNewRomanPSMT
Bookman-Light
Intl-Univers-Medium
TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT
Bookman-LightItalic
Intl-Univers-MediumItalic
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT
Bookman-Demi
Intl-Univers-Bold
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT
Bookman-DemiItalic
Intl-Univers-BoldItalic
Univers
Coronet-Regular
Intl-Courier
Univers-Oblique
Courier
Intl-Courier-Oblique
Univers-Bold
Courier-Oblique
Intl-Courier-Bold
Univers-BoldOblique
Courier-Bold
Intl-Courier-BoldOblique
Univers-Condensed
Courier-BoldOblique
LetterGothic
Univers-CondensedOblique
Garamond-Antiqua
LetterGothic-Slanted
Univers-CondensedBold
Garamond-Halbfett
LetterGothic-Bold
Univers-CondensedBoldOblique
Garamond-Kursiv
LetterGothic-BoldSlanted
Wingdings-Regular
Garamond-KursivHalbfett
Marigold
ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
GoldSansMM
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
ZapfDingbats
GoldSerifMM
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
Helvetica-Light
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
4-8
PostScript
PostScript emulation also has a backward compatibility mode that changes the
metrics of eight of the resident fonts to match the fonts in the Lexmark Optra S family
of printers. The eight fonts are:
AntiqueOlive
LetterGothic-Bold
AntiqueOlive-Bold
LetterGothic-Italic
AntiqueOlive-Italic
Marigold
LetterGothic
Univers-Bold
Note: In backward compatibility mode, the LetterGothic-BoldSlanted font is
unavailable.
Your printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode and the Lexmark PostScript
driver uses this mode. For backward compatibility with the Lexmark Optra S family of
printers, use the latest version of the Lexmark Optra S driver which sends the
PostScript command to switch to backward compatibility mode. (The original Lexmark
Optra S driver does not send this command.)
See Table 4-4 to determine which Lexmark Optra S driver you should use.
Table 4-4: Lexmark Optra S Drivers
If you need the Lexmark Optra S driver for ...
Use ...
Windows 2000, WindowsXP
Version 7.2 or later of LEXPSNT
Windows NT 4.0
Version 1.8 or later of LEXPSNT
Windows 9x, Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
Version 4.32 or later of LEXPS
Windows 3.x
Version 4.02 or later of LEXPS
The PostScript commands to switch the compatibility modes are:
Forward compatibility:
statusdict begin PS3fonts end
(temporary, changes the PostScript job only)
<</UseOldfonts false>> setsystemparams (permanent, changes the default in NVRAM)
Backward compatibility:
statusdict begin PS2fonts end
(temporary, changes the PostScript job only)
<</UseOldfonts true>> setsystemparams
(permanent, changes the default in NVRAM)
With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software application
enumerates and selects the available PostScript fonts.
4-9
PostScript
PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark C510(n)
The Lexmark C510(n) printer has 158 resident fonts in PostScript emulation. The fonts
match the 136 Adobe PostScript 3 resident fonts and include 22 extra fonts. Since the
fonts are designed to match Adobe PostScript 3, this is called forward compatibility
mode. The following table lists the 158 resident fonts in PostScript emulation.
AlbertusMT
HoeflerText-BlackItalic
Bodoni-Poster
AlbertusMT-Italic
HoeflerText-Ornaments
Bodoni-PosterCompressed
AlbertusMT-Light
Univers-ExtendedObl
Helvetica-Light
AntiqueOlive-Roman
Univers-BoldExt
Helvetica-LightOblique
AntiqueOlive-Italic
Univers-BoldExtObl
Helvetica-Black
AntiqueOlive-Bold
Univers-Light
Helvetica-BlackOblique
AntiqueOlive-Compact
Univers-LightOblique
Helvetica
ArialMT
Clarendon
Helvetica-Oblique
Arial-ItalicMT
Clarendon-Light
Helvetica-Bold
Arial-BoldMT
Clarendon-Bold
Helvetica-BoldOblique
Arial-BoldItalicMT
Helvetica-Condensed
Helvetica-Narrow
AvantGarde-Book
Helvetica-Condensed-Bold
Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
AvantGarde-BookOblique
Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
AvantGarde-Demi
Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique
Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
AvantGarde-DemiOblique
StempelGaramond-Bold
Intl-CG-Times
Bookman-Light
StempelGaramond-BoldItalic
Intl-CG-Times-Italic
Bookman-LightItalic
StempelGaramond-Italic
Intl-CG-Times-Bold
Bookman-Demi
StempelGaramond-Roman
Intl-CG-Times-BoldItalic
Bookman-DemiItalic
Apple-Chancery
Intl-Univers-Medium
Coronet-Regular
Chicago
Intl-Univers-MediumItalic
Courier
Geneva
Intl-Univers-Bold
Courier-Oblique
Monaco
Intl-Univers-BoldItalic
Courier-Bold
NewYork
Intl-Courier
Courier-BoldOblique
Oxford
Intl-Courier-Oblique
Garamond-Antiqua
Taffy
Intl-Courier-Bold
Garamond-Halbfett
MonaLisa-Recut
Intl-Courier-BoldOblique
Garamond-Kursiv
Candid
LetterGothic
Garamond-KursivHalbfett
Bodoni
LetterGothic-Slanted
GoldSansMM
Bodoni-Italic
LetterGothic-Bold
4-10
GoldSerifMM
Bodoni-Bold
Univers-Extended
Bodoni-BoldItalic
LetterGothic-BoldSlanted
JoannaMT
Marigold
JoannaMT-Italic
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
JoannaMT-Bold
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
JoannaMT-BoldItalic
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
LubalinGraph-Book
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
LubalinGraph-BookOblique
Optima
LubalinGraph-Demi
Optima-Bold
LubalinGraph-DemiOblique
Optima-BoldItalic
Palatino-Roman
Optima-Italic
Palatino-Italic
CooperBlack
Palatino-Bold
CooperBlack-Italic
Palatino-BoldItalic
Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC
Symbol
Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC
Times-Roman
Eurostile
Times-Italic
Eurostile-Bold
Times-Bold
Eurostile-ExtendedTwo
Times-BoldItalic
Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo
TimesNewRomanPSMT
GillSans
TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT
GillSans-Italic
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT
GillSans-Bold
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT
GillSans-BoldItalic
Univers
GillSans-Condensed
Univers-Oblique
GillSans-BoldCondensed
Univers-Bold
GillSans-Light
Univers-BoldOblique
GillSans-LightItalic
Univers-Condensed
GillSans-ExtraBold
Univers-CondensedOblique
Goudy
Univers-CondensedBold
Goudy-Italic
Univers-CondensedBoldOblique
Goudy-Bold
Wingdings-Regular
Goudy-BoldItalic
ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
Goudy-ExtraBold
ZapfDingbats
HoeflerText-Regular
HoeflerText-Italic
HoeflerText-Black
PostScript
4-11
PostScript
PostScript emulation also has a backward compatibility mode that changes the
metrics of eight of the resident fonts to match the fonts in the Lexmark Optra S family
of printers. The eight fonts are:
AntiqueOlive
LetterGothic-Bold
AntiqueOlive-Bold
LetterGothic-Italic
AntiqueOlive-Italic
Marigold
LetterGothic
Univers-Bold
Note: In backward compatibility mode, the LetterGothic-BoldSlanted font is
unavailable.
Your printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode and the Lexmark PostScript
driver uses this mode. For backward compatibility with the Lexmark Optra S family of
printers, use the latest version of the Lexmark Optra S driver which sends the
PostScript command to switch to backward compatibility mode. (The original Lexmark
Optra S driver does not send this command.)
See Table 4-5 to determine which Lexmark Optra S driver you should use.
Table 4-5: Lexmark Optra S Drivers
If you need the Lexmark Optra S driver for ...
Use ...
Windows 2000, WindowsXP
Version 7.2 or later of LEXPSNT
Windows NT 4.0
Version 1.8 or later of LEXPSNT
Windows 9x, Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
Version 4.32 or later of LEXPS
Windows 3.x
Version 4.02 or later of LEXPS
The PostScript commands to switch the compatibility modes are:
Forward compatibility:
statusdict begin PS3fonts end
(temporary, changes the PostScript job only)
<</UseOldfonts false>> setsystemparams (permanent, changes the default in NVRAM)
Backward compatibility:
statusdict begin PS2fonts end
(temporary, changes the PostScript job only)
<</UseOldfonts true>> setsystemparams
(permanent, changes the default in NVRAM)
With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software application
enumerates and selects the available PostScript fonts.
4-12
PostScript
PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark E234(n),
E330, E332n
The Lexmark E234(n), E330, and E332n printers have 91resident fonts in PostScript
emulation. Since the fonts are designed to match Adobe PostScript 3, this is called
forward compatibility mode. The following table lists the 91resident fonts in PostScript
emulation.
AlbertusMT
Helvetica-Oblique
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
AlbertusMT-Italic
Helvetica-Bold
Optima
AlbertusMT-Light
Helvetica-BoldOblique
Optima-Italic
AntiqueOlive-Roman
Helvetica-Light
Optima-Bold
AntiqueOlive-Italic
Helvetica-LightOblique
Optima-BoldItalic
AntiqueOlive-Bold
Helvetica-Black
Palatino-Roman
AntiqueOlive-Compact
Helvetica-BlackOblique
Palatino-Italic
ArialMT
Helvetica-Narrow
Palatino-Bold
Arial-ItalicMT
Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
Palatino-BoldItalic
Arial-BoldMT
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
Symbol
Arial-BoldItalicMT
Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
Times-Roman
AvantGarde-Book
Intl-CG-Times
Times-Italic
AvantGarde-BookOblique
Intl-CG-Times-Italic
Times-Bold
AvantGarde-Demi
Intl-CG-Times-Bold
Times-BoldItalic
AvantGarde-DemiOblique
Intl-CG-Times-BoldItalic
TimesNewRomanPSMT
Bookman-Light
Intl-Courier
TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT
Bookman-LightItalic
Intl-Courier-Oblique
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT
Bookman-Demi
Intl-Courier-Bold
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT
Bookman-DemiItalic
Intl-Courier-BoldOblique
Univers
Coronet-Regular
Intl-Univers-Medium
Univers-Oblique
Courier
Intl-Univers-MediumItalic
Univers-Bold
Courier-Oblique
Intl-Univers-Bold
Univers-BoldOblique
Courier-Bold
Intl-Univers-BoldItalic
Univers-Condensed
Courier-BoldOblique
LetterGothic
Univers-CondensedOblique
Garamond-Antiqua
LetterGothic-Slanted
Univers-CondensedBold
Garamond-Halbfett
LetterGothic-Bold
Univers-CondensedBoldOblique
Garamond-Kursiv
LetterGothic-BoldSlanted
Wingdings-Regular
Garamond-KursivHalbfett
Marigold
ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
4-13
GoldSansMM
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
GoldSerifMM
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
Helvetica
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
PostScript
ZapfDingbats
PostScript emulation also has a backward compatibility mode that changes the
metrics of 8 of the resident fonts to match the fonts in the Lexmark Optra S family of
printers. The 8 fonts are:
AntiqueOlive
LetterGothic-Italic
AntiqueOlive-Italic
LetterGothic-Bold
AntiqueOlive-Bold
Marigold
LetterGothic
Univers-Bold
Note: In backward compatibility mode, the LetterGothic-BoldSlanted font is
unavailable.
Your printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode and the Lexmark PostScript
driver uses this mode. For backward compatibility with the Lexmark Optra S family of
printers, use the latest version of the Lexmark Optra S driver which sends the
PostScript command to switch to backward compatibility mode. (The original Lexmark
Optra S driver does not send this command.)
See Table 4-6 to determine which Lexmark Optra S driver you should use.
Table 4-6: Lexmark Optra S Drivers
If you need the Lexmark Optra S driver for ...
Use ...
Windows 2000, Windows XP
Version 7.2 or later of LEXPSNT
Windows NT 4.0
Version 1.8 or later of LEXPSNT
Windows 9x, Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
Version 4.32 or later of LEXPS
Windows 3.x
Version 4.02 or later of LEXPS
The PostScript commands to switch the compatibility modes are:
Forward compatibility:
statusdict begin PS3fonts end
(temporary, changes the PostScript job only)
<</UseOldfonts false>> setsystemparams (permanent, changes the default in NVRAM)
4-14
PostScript
Backward compatibility:
statusdict begin PS2fonts end
(temporary, changes the PostScript job only)
<</UseOldfonts true>> setsystemparams
(permanent, changes the default in NVRAM)
With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software program
enumerates and selects the available PostScript fonts.
Supplemental Operators
This section explains PostScript emulation supplemental operators in detail. These
supplemental operators are extensions to the standard PostScript language. For each
supplemental operator, the exact syntax is listed, as well as the values returned on the
stack and possible error messages.
Tips for PostScript emulation command extensions:
•
Set operators are effective until the end of a job. At the end of a job, these
values return to their default values.
•
Setdefault operators do not become effective until the end of a job. However,
the value may be queried immediately.
•
Unless otherwise noted, all of these operators are located in the statusdict
dictionary.
•
In userdict, #copies is initialized at the beginning of each job to the number
of copies selected either by PJL or from the printer operator panel.
To determine which operators your printer supports, see Table C-1 on page C-1.
Command Format
The PostScript emulation supplemental operators are described in this chapter in the
following format:
4-15
PostScript
nameofoperator
— nameofoperator variable
Brief description of the command function.
Description of variables.
Error: bold font
Paper Size Support
The operators in this section relate to the paper used in the printer.
The literal names described in the following table are also supported as operators in
userdict. When the literal names are used as operators:
•
•
•
They execute setpagedevice to request a specific paper size.
They use the specified size as a page device PageSize parameter.
They set PageSize Policy to 7.
Therefore, PageSize applies to the media currently installed in the tray without
disabling media selection, which may clip the image. For example, if you execute the
legal operator when letter size paper is installed, part of the image is clipped from the
page.
When the literal names are used as operators, the action is equivalent to executing the
following PostScript emulation sequence. This example uses letter-size paper.
Note: In the following command, “<<” and “>>” are dictionary mark objects.
<< /Policies << /PageSize 7 >> /PageSize [612 792] >> setpagedevice
Refer to your printer user documentation for a list of supported paper sizes.
4-16
PostScript
Table 4-7: Paper Sizes Supported
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
Paper Sizes
E23x
E33x
X422
C510(n)
Printer Model
Literal Name
Size (mm)
Size (inches)
Size (points)
letter
215.9 x 279.4
8.5 x 11.0
612 x 792
✓
✓
✓
legal2
215.9 x 355.6
8.5 x 14.0
612 x 1008
✓
✓
✓
b51
182.0 x 257.0
7.17 x 10.1
516 x 729
✓
✓
✓
a4
210.0 x 297.0
8.27 x 11.7
595 x 842
✓
✓
✓
executivepage
184.2 x 266.7
7.25 x 10.5
522 x 756
✓
✓
✓
a5
148.0 x 210.0
5.83 x 8.27
419 x 595
✓
✓
✓
b4
257 x 364
10.12 x 14.33
729 x 1032
✘
✘
✘
a3
297 x 420
11.7 x 16.54
842 x 1191
✘
✘
✘
a3+
328 x 453
12.91 x 17.83
930 x 1284
✘
✘
✘
11x17
279.4 x 431.8
11 x 17
792 x 1224
✘
✘
✘
ledger
431.8 x 279.4
17 x 11
1224 x 792
✘
✘
✘
folio2
216 x 330
8.5 x 13
612 x 936
✓
✓
✓
statement
140 x 216
5.5 x 8.5
396 x 612
✓
✓
✓
custom2
215.9 x 355.6
8.5 x 14.0
612 x 1020
✓
✓
✓
custom
297 x 431.8
11.7 x 17
842 x 1224
✘
✘
✘
custom
320 x 559
12.6 x 22
908 x 1584
✘
✘
✘
custom
297 x 914
11.7 x 36
842 x 2592
✘
✘
✘
1
B5 is a Japanese Industry Standard (JIS) paper size. The same B5 designation
is used by JIS and International Standards Organization (ISO) for different paper
sizes.
2 The Lexmark C510(n) supports this size media only with an optional legal tray.
4-17
PostScript
currentuniversalsize
— currentuniversalsize integer integer integer (string)
queries the current settings for the Universal paper size. Three integers and
one string are returned on the stack:
Universal Width
Universal Height
Universal Feed Direction
Custom Universal Prompt String
Error: stackoverflow
ignoresize
— ignoresize integer
queries whether or not text is being oriented based on page size.
An integer value is returned on the stack:
0
1
2
perform automatic orientation of text based on page size
treat the page size as an envelope
treat the page size as paper
Error: stackoverflow
setignoresize
integer setignoresize —
overrides the automatic page orientation selected by the printer to support
custom media sizes. This operator determines whether or not to adjust the text
based on the page size.
integer value may be:
0
1
2
perform automatic orientation of text based on page size (default)
treat the page size as an envelope
treat the page size as paper
A value set by this operator takes effect on a subsequent setpagedevice only if
PageSize Policy is set to 7.
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-18
PostScript
setuniversalsize
— integer integer integer (string) setuniversalsize
changes the current settings for the Universal paper size. Each parameter on the
stack indicates:
Universal Width
minimum to maximum width in points
Universal Height
minimum to maximum height in points
Universal Feed Direction
0 short edge
1 long edge
Custom Universal Prompt String
String must be 16 characters or less.
Error: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
Paper Tray Support
When the printer receives one of the operators listed in “Table 4-8: Tray Selected with
Tray Operators” on page 4-20, it performs the actions listed as follows. This paper tray
selection process ends as soon as a suitable paper source is chosen and paper is fed
from this tray.
•
The printer checks the value of manualfeed in statusdict and the
ManualFeed page device parameter. If either one is true, the printer sends a
message to load the requested size in the manual feed tray or multipurpose
feeder.
•
The PageSize Policy is set to 0 by means of setpagedevice.
•
The printer checks the paper size loaded in the current active source to
determine if it matches the requested size. If the sizes match, the paper is fed
from the active source.
Note: The current active tray is the last source that was selected from the
printer operator panel or by the printer language.
•
If the requested size and the size loaded in the active source do not match,
the sources are searched in the order defined by the Priority array in the
InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary.
4-19
•
If the requested media size is not found by the previous search, the following
search order is used:
–
–
–
–
–
–
•
PostScript
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Multipurpose Feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
If the requested size cannot be located in any automatic source, a
configurationerror is issued and the job is flushed.
For printers that support automatic duplexing:
•
Automatic duplexing is not supported for custom-size paper or for envelopes
in the multipurpose feeder. Automatic duplexing is supported from the
multipurpose feeder for all other papers.
•
If the paper source is changed before the back side of a duplexed page prints,
a blank back page prints, the paper source changes, and the information for
the back side of the page is printed on the front side of a page sent from the
new paper source.
When these operators are used, it is equivalent to executing the following PostScript
emulation sequence:
<< /PageSize [x y] /ImagingBBox null /Policies << /PageSize 0>> >>
setpagedevice
where x y are the PageSize in points.
4-20
PostScript
Table 4-8: Tray Selected with Tray Operators
E23x
E33x
X422
Printer Model
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
Operator
Tray Selected
(Corresponding image size is set)
a3tray
tray with A3 size paper
✘
✘
✘
a4tray
tray with A4 size paper
✓
✓
✓
a5tray
tray with A5 size paper
✓
✓
✓
b4tray
tray with B4 size paper
✘
✘
✘
b5tray
tray with B5 size paper
✓
✓
✓
customtray
tray with custom size paper
✘
✘
✘
executivetray
tray with executive size paper
✓
✓
✓
foliotray
tray with folio size paper
✓
✓
✓
ledgertray
tray with ledger size paper
✘
✘
✘
legaltray
tray with legal size paper
✓
✓
✓
lettertray
tray with letter size paper
✓
✓
✓
statementtray
tray with statement size paper
✓
✓
✓
11x17tray
tray with 11 x 17 size paper
✘
✘
✘
4-21
PostScript
manualfeed
/manualfeed boolean def
in statusdict indicates if a manual feed source has been selected. The boolean
value can be:
true
false
prints from a manual feed source (default)
prints from an automatic feed source
This boolean key can be redefined to affect manual feed for the current job.
If the value of the manualfeed operator or the ManualFeed page device
parameter is true when showpage or copypage is executed, the page is fed
manually. If both have a value of false when showpage or copypage is
executed, the page is fed from an automatic source. These two values are
independent of each other.
Note: If manualfeed is redefined between printing the front and back page of
a duplexed page, the information for the front and back pages is printed on
the same page.
Error: stackoverflow
papertray
— papertray integer
queries the paper tray that is currently selected. An integer is returned on the
stack indicating which paper tray is currently in use. Valid integers are:
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
Tray 1
Tray 2
Multipurpose Feeder or Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Tray 3
Multipurpose Feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
Error: stackoverflow
4-22
PostScript
setpapertray
integer setpapertray —
changes the active paper source for the next page through the end of job by
setting the PageSize entry in the page device to the size loaded in the selected
source and by setting MediaPosition to the selected source. This operator
executes a setpagedevice.
The PageSize Policy page device parameter is not altered by this operator.
Use the following integers to set the paper tray:
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
Tray 1
Tray 2
Multipurpose Feeder or Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Tray 3
Multipurpose Feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
Notes:
• If the Manual Paper or Manual Envelope source is selected, the ManualFeed page device parameter is set to true.
• A rangecheck error is returned if a paper source that is not installed is
selected.
• If a setpapertray operator is issued for the back of a duplexed page, the
printer ejects a blank back page, changes the paper source, and prints the
information for the back side of the page on the front side of a page from
the new paper source.
The setting returns to the user default setting for the Paper Source menu item at
the end of the print job.
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-23
PostScript
Envelope Size Support
The literal names in Table 4-9 are also supported as operators in userdict. These
operators change the image size, but do not change the active paper source.
Therefore, when these operators are used, part of the image may be clipped.
When these literal names are used as operators, it is equivalent to executing the
following PostScript emulation sequence. The following example uses a 3.875 x 7.5
envelope.
<</Policies <</PageSize 7>> /PageSize [279 540]>> >>setpagedevice
Table 4-9: Envelope Sizes Supported
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
E23x
E33x
X422
C510(n)
Printer
Model
Envelope Sizes
Literal Name
Size (mm)
Size (inches)
Size (points)
3.875x7.5envelope
98.4 x 190.5
3.875 x 7.5
[279 540]
✘
✓
✓
3.875x8.875envelope 98.4 x 225.4
3.875 x 8.875
[279 639]
✓
✓
✓
4.125x9.5envelope
104.8 x 241.3
4.125 x 9.5
[297 684]
✓
✓
✓
110x220envelope
110 x 220
4.33 x 8.66
[312 624]
✓
✓
✓
162x229envelope
162 x 229
6.38 x 9.01
[459 649]
✓
✓
✓
176x250envelope
176 x 250
6.93 x 9.84
[499 708]
✓
✓
✓
otherenvelope1
Other
[612 996]
✓
✓
✓
otherenvelope
Other
[841 842]
✘
✘
✘
1
For other envelopes, the page is formatted to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless a
size is specified by your software program.
4-24
PostScript
The literal names in Table 4-10 are supported as PostScript emulation compatible
operators.
Table 4-10: Literal Names Supported
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
Literal Names
E23x
E33x
X422
C510(n)
Printer Model
Literal Name
Compatible Literal Name
monarcenvelope
3.875x7.5envelope
✘
✓
✓
com10envelope
4.125x9.5envelope
✓
✓
✓
dlenvelope
110x220envelope
✓
✓
✓
c5envelope
162x229envelope
✓
✓
✓
b5envelope
176x250envelope
✘
✘
✘
Note: Duplexing is not supported on any envelope size. If duplex printing is
requested and one of the envelope size operators is sent to the printer,
duplexing is suspended until a paper size is requested that is supported for
duplex printing.
4-25
PostScript
Envelope Tray Support
If manualfeed in statusdict and the ManualFeed page device parameter are false
when the printer receives one of the envelopetray operators listed in
“Table 4-11: Envelopetray Operator Selections” on page 4-26, the printer:
•
Sets the PageSize Policy to 0.
•
Checks the active source to see if it matches the requested envelope size. If
the sizes match, the envelope is fed from the active source.
Note: The active source is the last source selected from the printer operator
panel or data stream.
•
If the requested size and the size loaded in the active source do not match,
the sources are searched in the order defined by the Priority array in the
InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary.
•
If the requested media size is not found by the previous search, the following
search order is used:
– Envelope Feeder
– Multipurpose Feeder
•
If the requested size and type is not available from any automatic source, you
are prompted to load the requested envelope size and type in the manual
feed source.
•
If the size is still not available, a configurationerror is issued and the print
job is flushed.
If manualfeed or ManualFeed is true, the printer prompts you to load the requested
size manually. If no manual feed exists on the printer, a rangecheck error message is
generated.
The envelope tray the printer selects when it receives an envelopetray operator is
listed in Table 4-11. These operators are equivalent to executing the following
PostScript emulation sequence:
<</PageSize [x y] /ImagingBBox null /Policies<</PageSize 0>> >>
setpagedevice
where x y are the PageSize in points.
4-26
PostScript
Table 4-11: Envelopetray Operator Selections
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
Tray Operators
E23x
E33x
X422
C510(n)
Printer Model
Operator
Tray Selected (Corresponding image size is set)
110x220envelopetray
tray with 110 x 220 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
dlenvelopetray
tray with 110 x 220 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
162x229envelopetray
tray with 162 x 229 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
c5envelopetray
tray with 162 x 229 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
176x250envelopetray
tray with 176 x 250 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
b5envelopetray
tray with 176 x 250 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
3.875x7.5envelopetray
tray with 3.875 x 7.5 size envelopes
✘
✓
✓
monarcenvelopetray
tray with 3.875 x 7.5 size envelopes
✘
✓
✓
3.875x8.875envelopetray tray with 3.875 x 8.875 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
4.125x9.5envelopetray
tray with 4.125 x 9.5 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
com10envelopetray
tray with 4.125 x 9.5 size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
otherenvelopetray
tray with other size envelopes
✓
✓
✓
4-27
PostScript
Supplemental Operator Summary
To determine which operators your printer supports, see Table C-1 on page C-1.
appletalktype
— appletalktype (string)
in statusdict, this string reflects the current value of the LocalTalkType device
parameter from the %LocalTalk% device. The default string is LaserWriter. To
change the type portion (appletalktype) of the AppleTalk network name and
redefine the string, execute the following:
/appletalktype (string) def
When you redefine a string inside the normal server loop, it is reset to the default
value at the end of the print job. When you define it outside the normal server
loop, it is reset to the default value when the printer is switched to a printer
language other than PostScript emulation or when a power-on reset occurs.
Errors: rangecheck, stackoverflow, typecheck
buildtime
— buildtime integer
returns the BuildTime system parameter, which is a timestamp that identifies
the specific build of the PostScript emulation interpreter.
Error: stackoverflow
byteorder
byteorder boolean
returns a boolean on the stack with the same value as the system parameter
ByteOrder. Indicates the printer microprocessor native byte order. The boolean
values indicate:
true
false
low-order byte first
high-order byte first
Error: stackoverflow
4-28
PostScript
checkpassword
integer checkpassword or
(string) checkpassword
checks the passwords for both the SystemParamsPassword system parameter
and the StartJobPassword system parameter stored in the printer.
If the integer form is used, the integer is converted into a string before the
password check occurs. A boolean is returned on the stack to indicate if the
specified password matches either password. The boolean value can be:
true
false
correct password
incorrect password
After the boolean is returned, the printer waits 1 second before it continues
processing.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
Note: The password is defined as a 4-byte number.
currentfilenameextend
currentfilenameextend boolean
returns a boolean on the stack to indicate whether the extension should be
automatically added to any filename. The boolean value is either:
true
false
adds the extension
does not add the extension
See “Filename Extensions” on page 6-10.
Error: stackoverflow
currentmanualduplexmode
integer currentmanualduplexmode
queries the current value of the manual duplex mode. An integer is returned on
the stack:
0
1
2
current job manual duplex mode is no manual duplex
current job manual duplex mode is printing first sides of job
current job manual duplex mode is printing second sides of job
Error: stackoverflow
4-29
PostScript
defaulttimeouts
— defaulttimeouts job manualfeed wait
queries the user default settings of all timeouts. Three integers are returned on
the stack:
• JobTimeout system parameter
0
disabled (default)
15...65535 seconds
• ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter
0
disabled
1...65535 seconds (default is device dependent)
To find the default for your printer, see Table C-2 on page C-4.
• WaitTimeout system parameter
0
disabled
15...65535 seconds (default is 40 seconds)
Error: stackoverflow
deletefile
filename deletefile
deletes the specified file from the disk. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck,
undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
4-30
PostScript
devcontrol
string integer devcontrol boolean
allows a host computer utility to manage resources on the flash or disk. It
requires a string device name parameter, an integer command name parameter,
and two command argument parameters. The device control operator performs
a specified command on the specified device. The return values on the stack
indicate:
true
false
the command is successful
the command is unsuccessful and returns an error code
Table 4-12: devcontrol Operator Parameters
Integer Command
Name Parameter
Argument Parameter
Description
1
null null
Park disk heads
5
file null
Make contiguous flash file
8
filename description
Set description of file
9
password null
Set device read/write password
10
password null
Set device write password
11
filename password
Set file read/write password
12
filename password
Set file write password
13
password null
Declare device read/write password
14
password null
Declare device write password
15
filename password
Declare file read/write password
16
filename password
Declare file write password
17
null null
Reset device password list
18
null null
Reset file password list
19
devicename password
Get device password
19
filename password
Get file password
20
devicename null
Determine if device password is properly declared
20
filename null
Determine if file password is properly declared
21
null null
Scan for bad block
22
null null
Abort bad block scan
23
null null
Quick bad block scan
24
null null
Flush the disk cache
27
file null
Be quiet when writing to disk
4-31
PostScript
Table 4-13: Unsuccessful devcontrol Parameter Error Codes
Code
Meaning
1
File system access has not been initialized
2
Could not allocate file descriptor
3
Some invalid argument was passed
4
No such device
5
Invalid access to file requested
6
Argument too large (filename, buffer)
7
Invalid file descriptor or filename
8
Catch all error or device error
9
Unable to allocate memory for buffer, data structure
10
Device busy
11
Device not currently mounted
12
Attempt to perform illegal IO operation
13
No space to update or create file
14
Major change in file system for findnext() to function properly
15
Corrupted file system on device
16
Device already mounted
17
Could not initialize file system
18
Device not mounted
19
No file entry located
20
Bad file system on device
21
Password required
22
Aborted by callback
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, typecheck
devdismount
device devdismount —
dismounts the specified device by setting the Mounted device parameter for the
specified device to false. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs when an invalid device name is
used.
4-32
PostScript
devforall
proc scratchstring devforall —
executes the specified proc procedure for each storage device after pushing a
substring on the stack that is the portion of the scratch string containing the
device name. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow,
typecheck, undefined
devformat
devicename pages action devformat —
formats (erases all data from) the specified device. This operator is in
systemdict.
pages
Sets the LogicalSize device parameter for the specified device:
0
entire device is formatted
1,2,3
an ioerror occurs
action 1 is added to the action argument. The result is used for the
InitializeAction device parameter for the same device.
A devformat on a flash device formats the entire device regardless of the
LogicalSize specified.
Errors: invalidaccess, ioerror, limitcheck, rangecheck, stackunderflow,
typecheck, undefined, undefinedfilename
Note: An invalidaccess error occurs if devformat is not executed through
exitserver or startjob.
4-33
PostScript
devmount
device devmount boolean
sets the Mounted device parameter for the specified device to true. It also
returns the value of the Mounted device parameter for the specified device. This
operator is in systemdict.
The boolean values indicate:
true
false
device successfully mounted, or was already mounted
device not mounted
If a device with the specified device name is not installed, an
undefinedfilename error occurs.
This operator may change the search order. See “Device Search Order” on
page 6-12.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, undefinedfilename
devstatus
devicename devstatus false or
devicename devstatus searchable writeable hasnames mounted removable
searchorder free size true
returns on the stack the status of a specified device. This operator is in
systemdict. A value of false is returned if the device is not present. If the
device is present, five boolean values and three integers (see the following
description) followed by a value of true are returned.
The five boolean values are:
searchable
true, if the device is included in the search order and is to be searched for
the file operators that do not specify a device name. Same as the value of
the Searchable device parameter from the specified IODevice.
writeable
true, if the device can be written to. This value is the same as the Writeable
device parameter from the specified IODevice.
hasnames
true, if the device supports named files. This value is the same as the
HasNames device parameter from the specified IODevice.
4-34
PostScript
mounted
true, if the device is mounted. This value is the same as the Mounted
device parameter from the specified IODevice.
removable
true, if the device is removable and must be mounted before it is
referenced. This value is the same as the Removable device parameter
from the specified IODevice.
The three integers are:
searchorder
The position in the search order. This value is the same as the SearchOrder
device parameter from the specified IODevice.
free
The number of free bytes on the device. This value is the same as the Free
device parameter from the specified IODevice.
size
The total number of bytes on the device. This value is the same as the
LogicalSize device parameter from the specified IODevice.
Error: typecheck
diskonline
— diskonline boolean
returns the value of the Writeable device parameter (which is a boolean) for the
%disk1% IODevice.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
(%disk1%) currentdevparams /Writeable get
Error: stackoverflow
4-35
PostScript
diskstatus
— diskstatus free logicalsize
returns on the stack the following two integers:
• Number of pages that are free on the optional disk. The value of the Free
device parameter from the %disk1% IODevice.
• Total number of pages (1024 bytes) that are on the optional disk. The value
of the LogicalSize device parameter from the %disk1% IODevice.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
(%disk1%) currentdevparams dup /Free get exch /LogicalSize get
Error: stackoverflow
displayoperatormsg
(string) displayoperatormsg
sets a custom paper message. The string parameter is used as a prompt string
when a page prints. The string value can be any string up to 16 characters. The
string is cleared at the end of a print job.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
doidlefonts
— doidlefonts false
returns a constant boolean value of false.
Error: stackoverflow
4-36
PostScript
dojamrecovery
— dojamrecovery boolean
queries the user default setting of the Jam Recovery menu item. A boolean value
is returned on the stack:
true
false
reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to On) (default)
do not reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to Off)
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /ExitJamRecovery get
Error: stackoverflow
doprinterrors
— doprinterrors boolean
returns a boolean with the same value as the system parameter DoPrintErrors.
It also indicates the current value of the Print PS Error printer setting. The
DoPrintErrors system parameter must be present for the doprinterrors
operator to be present.
Error: stackoverflow
doret
— doret integer
returns the PQET setting for the current print job. An integer value is returned on
the stack:
0
1
Off
On
Note: For printers that do not support PQET, doret returns a 0.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /PostRenderingEnhanceDetails get /REValue get
Error: stackoverflow
4-37
PostScript
dostartpage
— dostartpage boolean
returns a boolean with the same value as the system parameter DoStartPage.
The DoStartPage system parameter must be present for the compatibility
operator dostartpage to be present.
Error: stackoverflow
dosysstart
— dosysstart boolean
returns the current value of the StartupMode system parameter. A boolean
value is returned:
true
false
StartupMode set to 1 or 11
StartupMode other than 1 or 11
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemsparams /StartupMode get
Error: stackoverflow
duplexer
— duplexer boolean
queries if a duplex unit is installed. A boolean value is returned on the stack:
true
false
duplex unit is installed
duplex unit is not installed
Note: For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always false.
Error: stackoverflow
4-38
PostScript
duplexmode
— duplexmode boolean
queries the current value for the Duplex page device parameter.
true
false
printing mode is duplex
printing mode is simplex
Note: For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always false.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /Duplex get
Error: stackoverflow
enginesync
— enginesync boolean
indicates if the printer waits for the last page of a job to print before returning a
Ctrl-D to the host computer.
Error: stackoverflow
4-39
PostScript
file
filename access file file
creates a file object with specified filename and access. The access values are:
r
w
a
r+
w+
a+
open the file for reading only
create a file if one does not already exist, or truncate and overwrite it if
it does exist. File is opened for writing only.
create a file if one does not already exist or append it if it does exist.
File is opened for writing only.
open the file for reading and writing. An undefinedfilename error
occurs if the file does not exist.
create a file if it does not already exist, or truncate and overwrite if it
does exist. File is opened for reading and writing.
create a file if it does not exist or append it if it does exist. File is
opened for reading and writing.
This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, limitcheck, stackunderflow, typecheck,
undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
filenameforall
pattern proc scratchstring filenameforall
lists all the files with names that match a specified pattern string, copies the
filename for each of these files into a specified scratch string, and calls a
specified proc procedure. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: ioerror, stackoverflow, stackunderflow, typecheck
fileposition
file fileposition position
indicates the current position on an open file. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
4-40
PostScript
firstside
— firstside boolean
indicates whether the current imaging area is on the front side of the page.
true
false
front side is currently being imaged
back side is currently being imaged
Error: stackoverflow
fontnonzerowinding
— boolean fontnonzerowinding
sets the winding rule for Type 1 fonts. No query operation is performed since the
winding rule is reset to true at the beginning of each print job. The boolean
value can be:
true
false
non-zero winding used by the interpreter
even or odd winding rule used by interpreter
Error: stackoverflow
hardwareiomode
— hardwareiomode boolean
queries the user default setting of the Parallel Protocol menu item. This operator
returns the value of the Parallel Protocol, either Standard or Fastbytes. An
integer value is returned on the stack:
1
2
Parallel Fastbytes Off (Standard)
Parallel Fastbytes On (Fastbytes)
Error: stackoverflow
idlefonts
— idlefonts mark
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed and returns a mark on the stack.
Error: stackoverflow
4-41
PostScript
ignoresize
See page 4-17.
initializedisk
pages action initializedisk —
initializes the disk with the page count and action as integer arguments. The
arguments set the (%disk1%) IO device parameters as follows:
• LogicalSize parameter is set to pages.
• If a value of 0 is set as pages, the entire disk is formatted.
• If a value of 1, 2, or 3 is set as pages, an ioerror is generated.
• InitializeAction parameter is set to action plus 1.
Errors: invalidaccess, ioerror, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
jobname
— jobname (string)
identifies each print job selection. This string in statusdict queries and changes
the current setting of the JobName user parameter. Originally, jobname is set to
null.
• To query jobname: jobname or
currentuserparams /JobName get.
A string indicating the job name is returned on the stack.
• To change jobname: /jobname (string) def or
<< /JobName (string) >> setuserparams
where string is the new job name.
Error: stackoverflow
4-42
PostScript
jobsource
— jobsource (string)
indicates the current value of the CurInputDevice system parameter. A string is
returned on the stack indicating the job source. Valid values are:
%LocalTalk%
%SerialA%
%SerialB%
%SerialC%
%SerialD%
%ParallelA%
%ParallelB%
%ParallelC%
%ParallelD%
%IR_A%
%IR_B%
%IR_C%
%IR_D%
%USB_A%
%USB_B%
%USB_C%
%USB_D%
%EtherTalkB%
%EtherTalkC%
%EtherTalkD%
%TokenTalkB%
%TokenTalkC%
%TokenTalkD%
%LexLinkB%
%LexLinkC%
%LexLinkD%
%PrintServerB%
%PrintServerC%
%PrintServerD%
%RemotePrinterB%
%RemotePrinterC%
%RemotePrinterD%
%AppSocketB%
%AppSocketC%
%AppSocketD%
4-43
PostScript
%LPR_B%
%LPR_C%
%LPR_D%
%UnknownDevice%
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemparams /CurInputDevice get
Error: stackoverflow
jobtimeout
— jobtimeout integer
queries the current user default setting for the JobTimeout parameter. An
integer is returned on the stack:
disabled
15...65355 seconds
0
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentuserparams /JobTimeout get
Error: stackoverflow
manualfeed
See page 4-21.
4-44
PostScript
manualfeedtimeout
/manualfeedtimeout integer def
is an integer key in statusdict that works with the ManualFeedTimeout page
device parameter to determine the manualfeed timeout for a given page.
If during a print job, manualfeedtimeout is defined as an integer value in
statusdict, that value is used instead of the ManualFeedTimeout page device
parameter.
The value of the ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter and
manualfeedtimeout key in statusdict are independent of each other; the value
of one does not affect the value of the other.
disabled
1...65355 seconds
0
An undefined error results if manualfeedtimeout is queried before the value is
set.
Errors: stackoverflow, undefined
newsheet
— newsheet —
causes the current page to start on the front side of a new sheet.
Error: none
pagecount
— pagecount integer
queries the value of the PageCount system parameter. An integer is returned on
the stack indicating the current page count.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemparams /PageCount get
Error: stackoverflow
4-45
PostScript
pagesprinted
- pagesprinted
queries the number of pages of the current job submitted by the PostScript
interpreter to the printer.
Error: stackoverflow
papertray
See page 4-21.
printername
(string) printername (substring)
returns the value of the PrinterName system parameter that is defined by the
setprintername operator. The value of the string defines the printer name. A
maximum of 32 characters are returned on the stack.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemparams /PrinterName get
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
product
— product (string)
queries the name of the product that is defined in statusdict. A string is returned
on the stack indicating the name of the product. The product string in
systemdict cannot be changed.
To change this product string in statusdict:
/product (string) def
Error: stackoverflow
4-46
PostScript
PS2fonts
- PS2fonts
redefines the following PostScript resident fonts to match the character designs
and metrics defined in PostScript Level 2. The font names in parentheses are the
equivalent PostScript 3 font names for the associated PostScript Level 2 names.
Antique Olive
(Antique Olive Roman)
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
(Letter Gothic Slanted)
Marigold
Univers Bold
Error: none
PS3fonts
- PS3fonts
restores the font compatibility to PostScript 3.
Error: none
quiet
— quiet integer
queries the PowerSave page device parameter. An integer is returned on the
stack:
0
Power Saver is Off
1 to 120 or 1 to 240 (Model specific)
Number of minutes elapsed after last page prints before
Power Saver is invoked.
Power Saver reduces power consumption when the printer is idle. When quiet is
enabled, it takes longer to print the first page after the printer has been idle.
4-47
PostScript
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy
Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /PowerSave get
Error: stackoverflow
ramsize
— ramsize integer
queries the current setting of the RamSize system parameter. An integer is
returned on the stack showing total RAM in bytes.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemparams /RamSize get
Error: stackoverflow
realformat
— realformat boolean
returns a boolean with the same value as the RealFormat system parameter. It
indicates the printer microprocessor native real number representation. A query
determines if the printer real number representation matches the application real
number representation and compensates if necessary.
Error: stackoverflow
renamefile
oldfilename newfilename renamefile
renames the oldfilename to the newfilename. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck,
undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
4-48
PostScript
resolution
— resolution integer
queries the resolution for the current print job. An integer is returned on the
stack:
300 dpi is set to On
600 600 dpi is set to On
1200 1200 dpi is set to On
300
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /HWResolution get 0 get
Error: stackoverflow
revision
— revision integer
queries the Revision system parameter. An integer is returned on the stack to
indicate the revision level.
Error: stackoverflow
4-49
PostScript
sccbatch
channel sccbatch baud option
returns the user default settings for serial communication parameters.
channel has the following valid integer values:
9
25
If only one serial interface port is available on the printer, both 9 and 25 return
the same values. Baud and option values are returned on the stack.
baud returns the value of the Baud menu item.
option returns an 8 bit value as defined in the following illustration:
7
Stop Bits
6
5
Data Style
4
3
Flow Control
2
1
0
Parity
Stop Bits
This bit is always set to zero.
Data Style
01
11
7 data bits
8 data bits
Flow Control
000
001
101
110
111
XON/XOFF
DTR/DSR
DTR
XON/XOFF/DTR
XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR
Parity
00
01
10
11
ignore
odd
even
none
Errors: rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-50
PostScript
sccinteractive
channel sccinteractive baud options
provided for parsing compatibility purposes. A value of 0 is returned.
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow,
typecheck
setcoverpage
boolean setcoverpage —
specifies a cover page for a fax job. The default value is false.
The boolean values indicate:
true
false
the current page that is processing is moved to the first page of the
current fax job
the current page that is processing is unaffected
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setdefaulttimeouts
job manualfeed wait setdefaulttimeouts —
changes the values for all timeouts. Valid values are:
JobTimeout system parameter
disabled
15...65355 seconds
0
ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter
0
disabled
1...65355 seconds
WaitTimeout system parameter
disabled
15...65355 seconds
0
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-51
PostScript
setdoidlefonts
boolean setdoidlefonts —
is parsed and discarded. A boolean value is required.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setdojamrecovery
boolean setdojamrecovery —
changes the user default setting of the Jam Recovery menu item. The changes
are not effective until the end of the print job.
The boolean values indicate:
true
false
reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to On)
do not reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to Off or Auto
[model dependent])
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
%Go into exitserver or startjob context
<< /ExitJamRecovery boolean >> setpagedevice
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setdoprinterrors
boolean setdoprinterrors
sets the system parameter DoPrintErrors to the value of boolean. It also
indicates the current value of the Print PS Error printer setting. The
DoPrintErrors system parameter must be present for the setdoprinterrors
operator to be present.
The boolean values indicate:
true
Print PS Error is set to On
false
Print PS Error is set to Off
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-52
PostScript
setdoret
integer setdoret —
changes the PQET setting for the next page through the end of the print job.
The integer values allowed are:
0
1
2
3
4
turn PQET Off
turn PQET On
turn PQET On
turn PQET On
turn PQET On
The value you select for PQET returns to the user default setting when the print
job is finished.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<<//PostRenderingEnhanceDetails << /REValue integer >> >>
setpagedevice
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setdostartpage
boolean setdostartpage
sets the DoStartPage system parameter to the value of boolean. The
DoStartPage system parameter must be present for the setdostartpage
operator to be present. For more information, see “DoStartPage” on page 4-81.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-53
PostScript
setdosysstart
boolean setdosysstart —
modifies the value of the StartupMode system parameter.
true
false
StartupMode set to 1
StartupMode set to 0 (default)
• If true, the printer executes a Sys/Start file from flash or disk when the
PostScript emulation interpreter is initialized. If no flash or disk is installed,
no action occurs.
• If a Sys/Start file is on both flash and disk, the search order for the devices
determines which one is executed.
• If false, the printer does not execute a Sys/Start file.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setduplexmode
boolean setduplexmode —
sets the value of the Duplex page device parameter for the current print job.
sets printing mode to duplex
false
sets printing mode to simplex
At the start of the next print job, the value is reset to the user default setting.
true
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<< /Duplex boolean >> setpagedevice
Errors: configurationerror, stackunderflow, typecheck
Notes:
• If simplex printing is requested between the front side and back side of a
sheet, a blank back side is printed and information for the back side is
printed on the front side of the next sheet.
• For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always set to false.
4-54
PostScript
setenginesync
boolean setenginesync —
changes the setting that indicates whether the printer waits for the last page of a
job to print before returning a Ctrl-D to the host computer.
The boolean values indicate:
true
false
printer waits for the last page of the job to print
printer does not wait for the last page of the job to print
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setethernetaddress
string setethernetaddress
sets the EthernetAddress parameter in the EtherTalk communication
parameter set. The EthernetAddress parameter is the Ethernet address of the
Ethernet internal print server (also called an internal network adapter or INA).
The string value can be any string up to 17 characters.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setfilenameextend
boolean setfilenameextend
sets whether the extension should be automatically added to any filename.
true
false
adds the extension
does not add the extension
The default setting is true.
See “Filename Extensions” on page 6-10.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
4-55
PostScript
setfileposition
file position setfileposition
moves the read pointer in an open file to the new specified file position. This is
defined as the number of bytes from the start of the file. The next read operation
starts at the new file position. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
sethardwareiomode
integer sethardwareiomode —
is parsed and discarded. In addition, one integer is removed from the stack. It
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setidlefonts
mark... setildefonts —
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed and pulls items from the stack until a mark is reached.
Error: unmatchedmark
setignoresize
See page 4-17.
4-56
PostScript
setjobtimeout
integer setjobtimeout —
changes the value of the JobTimeout user parameter for the next page through
the end of the print job. Valid integers are:
disabled
15...65355 seconds
0
The value returns to the JobTimeout system parameter setting at the end of the
print job.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<</JobTimeout integer >> setuserparams
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setmanualduplexmode
int setmanualduplexmode
changes the current job’s setting of manualduplexmode. Valid int values are:
0
1
2
no manual duplexing
printing the first sides of the job
printing the second sides of the job.
When printing second sides of the job is specified, a load manual duplex side 2
operator intervention condition will occur after the last page of the first sides is
printed, and prior to the first page of the second sides being printed. While
printing the second sides the printer’s available paper sources are restricted to
the automatic tray (tray1) and the manual paper feeder for the remainder of the
job or until the manual duplex mode value is changed.
Error: stackunderflow, typecheck
setpapertray
See page 4-22.
4-57
PostScript
setprintername
string setprintername —
changes the PrinterName system parameter to the value of the string. The
string value can be any string up to 32 characters.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<< /PrinterName (string) >> setsystemparams
Errors: invalidaccess, limitcheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setquiet
integer setquiet —
changes the user default setting of the PowerSave page device parameter.
The following integers are valid:
Power Saver Off
1 to 120 or 1 to 240 (Model specific)
Number of minutes elapsed after last page prints before
Power Saver is invoked.
0
Any changes made by this operator are not active until the end of the print job.
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as
Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
%Go into exitserver or startjob context
<< /PowerSave integer >> setpagedevice
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-58
PostScript
setresolution
integer setresolution —
changes the resolution for the current print job and discards unprinted data.
Refer to your printer user documentation for a list of supported resolutions. The
following integers are valid:
300
600
1200
300 dpi is set to On
600 dpi is set to On
1200 dpi is set to On
Notes:
• For some printers, the resolution value returns to the user default setting for
the Print Resolution menu item at the end of the print job.
• The printer waits for the paper path to clear before changing the resolution.
• If the resolution is changed for the back side of a duplexed sheet, the printer
ejects a blank back page, changes the resolution, and prints the information
for the page where the resolution was changed on the front side of the next
sheet.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<< /HWResolution [xres yres] >> setpagedevice
where xres = yres.
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setsccbatch
integer integer integer setsccbatch —
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed, and three integers are removed from the stack and discarded.
Error: stackunderflow
4-59
PostScript
setsccinteractive
channel baud options setsccinteractive
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed, and three integers are removed from the stack and discarded.
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setsoftwareiomode
integer setsoftwareiomode —
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed, and an integer is removed from the stack and discarded.
This command validates that the integer value provided is an Adobe-supported
value of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 100, and then discards the operator and value.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck, invalidaccess, rangecheck
settumble
boolean settumble —
sets the value of the Tumble page device parameter for the current print job.
true
false
sets the tumble setting to short-edge binding (back side of the
duplexed page prints upside down in relation to the front side)
sets the tumble setting to long-edge binding (back side of the
duplexed page prints in the same orientation as the front) (default)
No error is generated if a duplex unit is not installed.
Notes:
• At the start of the next print job, the setting for tumble is reset to the user
default setting for the Duplex Bind menu item.
• If tumble is changed between the printing of a front and back side of a
duplexed sheet, a blank back side is not ejected.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<< /Tumble boolean >> setpagedevice
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
4-60
PostScript
setuserdiskpercent
integer setuserdiskpercent —
removes an integer from the stack and discards it.
Errors: stackunderflow, rangecheck, invalidaccess, typecheck
softwareiomode
— softwareiomode 0
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed and returns a 0 (zero, Binary Mode Off) on the stack.
Software IO mode defines the data stream you are using.
Errors: stackoverflow, stackunderflow
tumble
— tumble boolean
returns the current value of the Tumble page device parameter.
true
false
the back side of the duplexed page prints upside down in relation to
the front side (short-edge binding)
the back side of the duplexed page prints in the same orientation
as the front side (long-edge binding) (default)
Note: No error is generated if a duplex unit is not installed.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /Tumble get
Errors: stackunderflow, stackoverflow
4-61
PostScript
userdiskpercent
— userdiskpercent 0
returns a 0 (zero) on the stack.
Errors: stackoverflow, invalidaccess
waittimeout
— waittimeout integer
queries the current value for the WaitTimeout user parameter. An integer is
returned on the stack:
disabled
15...65355 seconds
0
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentuserparams /WaitTimeout get
Error: stackoverflow
4-62
PostScript
Page Device Parameters
In addition to the page device parameters described in Section 4.11 of the PostScript
Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by Adobe Systems, Inc., the following
page device parameters are used by setpagedevice and currentpagedevice.
Certain parameters, such as Policies, Priority, and ManualFeed are listed here since
more information about the parameters is given in Table 4-14 than in the PostScript
Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by Adobe Systems, Inc.
To determine which parameters and default values your printer supports, see
Table C-2 on page C-4.
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters
Key
Type
Definition
BeginPage
procedure
Executes at the beginning of each page and returns an integer which indicates
how many times showpage has been invoked.
Collate
boolean
Indicates if the printer is set to collate multi-copy print jobs.
If a print job consists of three pages and two copies are requested, then the
collated output is 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. The non-collated output is 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3.
DeferredMediaSelection
boolean
Determines if the printer uses the printer’s own internal algorithms or Adobe
PostScript algorithms to select print media. The following values are supported:
True
False
DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary
Uses the printer’s algorithms
Uses Adobe PostScript algorithms (default)
Specifies the following unique printer rendering parameters: Screening,
TonerSaver, PictureGrade, ImageEnhancement, PrintDarkness,
AutoMediaType, EdgeToEdge, DefaultPoliciesPageSize, SubstituteSize,
Type, ColorCorrection, ImageBrightness, ImageContrast, and PrintQuality.
Screening controls which halftone dictionary is installed at the beginning of each
print job. The value is set at the start of a job according to the print quality settings
selected from the printer operator panel.
The following names are valid:
ColorGrade™
PictureGrade
IET
IETImagesOnly
600 dpi printing
300 dpi, 600 dpi, or 1200 dpi printing with PictureGrade On
1200 Image Quality printing or 2400 Print Quality
1200 Image Quality printing for images; 600 dpi printing for
text and graphics or maps to IET and sets Print Quality to
either 1200 Image Quality or 2400 Print Quality
IETPictureGrade 1200 Image Quality printing with PictureGrade On
None
300 dpi or 600 dpi printing with PictureGrade Off
4-63
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DeviceRenderingInfo
(continued)
dictionary
TonerSaver is a boolean that controls the Toner Saver feature.
True
False
Starts the printer toner saver mechanism
Stops the printer toner saver mechanism
Notes:
• A PostScript job can override the effect of Screening by using sethalftone,
setscreen, or setcolorscreen operators, unless Screening is set to IET or
IETPictureGrade.
• A PostScript job can enter or exit IET or PictureGrade using the Screening
parameter in a setpagedevice call. This does not change the user default
printer settings for print quality, which are read and used by the interpreter for
the next print job unless the setpagedevice is issued in a startjob context.
• If Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade, TonerSaver is set to False. This
is true for all models except the Optra C710, Optra M410, Optra T family, and
Optra W810.
PictureGrade is an integer that provides compatibility with previous Lexmark laser
printer drivers. PictureGrade works in conjunction with Screening.
If Screening is set to None or PictureGrade, the values for PictureGrade affect
Screening in the following way:
0
1
Changes Screening to None
Changes Screening to PictureGrade
If Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade, the values for PictureGrade affect
Screening in the following way:
0
1
Changes Screening to IET
Changes Screening to IETPictureGrade
For more information on Screening, see page 4-62.
ImageEnhancement is an integer that provides compatibility with previous
Lexmark laser printer drivers. ImageEnhancement works in conjunction with
Screening.
If Screening is set to None or IET, the values for ImageEnhancement affect
Screening in the following way:
0
1
Changes Screening to None
Changes Screening to IET
If Screening is set to PictureGrade or IETPictureGrade, the values for
ImageEnhancement affect Screening in the following way:
0
1
Changes Screening to PictureGrade
Changes Screening to IETPictureGrade
For more information on Screening, see page 4-62.
PrintDarkness specifies the value of the Print Darkness printer setting. Legal
values are:
1
2
3
4
5
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
4-64
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DeviceRenderingInfo
(continued)
dictionary
AutoMediaType is a boolean that controls the MediaType entries in the
InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary.
True
False
MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionaries cannot be
modified by the user. The values are confined to values known by
the printer operating system.
MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionaries can be
modified by the user.
EdgeToEdge is a boolean which determines if there should be an unprintable
area on the page.
True
False
Print to the edge of the paper.
Do not print to the edge of the paper (default).
DefaultPoliciesPageSize is an integer which equals the PageSize parameter in
the Policies dictionary unless PageSize is set to 23; in that case,
DefaultPoliciesPageSize equals the PageSize parameter value before it was set
to 23 or equals 0 if the PageSize parameter is initialized to 23. For more
information on PageSize, see page 4-72.
SubstituteSize allows for the substitution of A4- and Letter-size print materials,
and A3- and 11x17 inch-size print materials for each other when one size is not
installed.
Note: For size substitution to occur, the substituted print material and the
requested print material must be of the same paper type.
The following values are supported:
/Off
No size substitution is performed.
/A4-Letter
If A4 is requested but not installed and Letter is installed, Letter
is substituted for A4. Or, if Letter is requested but not installed
and A4 is installed, A4 is substituted for Letter.
/A3-11x17
If A3 is requested but not installed and 11x17 is installed,
11x17 is substituted for A3. Or, if 11x17 is requested but not
installed and A3 is installed, A3 is substituted for 11x17.
/All
Both size substitutions are permitted.
Note: When the size substitution occurs, the page is scaled to the size of the
requested print material.
The DefaultPoliciesPageSize value is used as the effective policy when:
• The SubstituteSize parameter is not set to /Off and a size substitution cannot
be performed.
• The PageSize parameter in the Policies dictionary is set to 23.
Notes:
• If SubstituteSize is set to /Off, the effective policy is the value of PageSize.
• If SubstituteSize is not set to /Off and a size substitution is possible, the
effective policy is 3.
4-65
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DeviceRenderingInfo
(continued)
dictionary
Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see Table C-2
on page C-4.
ColorCorrection is a null, string, or name object that controls the appearance of
colors. The value is determined by the user default setting in the Color Correction
menu item. The following values are supported:
-null/Display
/Vivid
ImageBrightness is an integer that controls the brightness of images. The
following values are supported:
-100 ... 100
0 (default)
ImageContrast is an integer that controls the contrast of images. The following
values are supported:
-100 ... 100
0 (default)
PrintQuality is an integer that controls the print quality settings. The following
values are supported:
0
1
2
3
Duplex
boolean
Indicates if printed pages are duplexed (printed on both side of the page) or
simplexed (printed on one side of the page).
True
False
EndPage
procedure
Quick Print
Normal
Presentation
1200 Image Q
Print duplex mode
Print simplex mode (default)
Executes at the end of each printed page to indicate if the contents of raster
memory should be printed. EndPage gets two integer arguments through the
operand stack: one is a count of the previous showpage executions and the other
is the code that indicates the execution condition.
The code is 0 (zero) if it is called from showpage, 1 if it is called from copypage,
and 2 if it is called during device deactivation. The procedure must return a
boolean value.
ExitJamRecovery
boolean
Indicates the setting of the Jam Recovery menu item.
True
False
HWResolution
integer
Jam Recovery is set to On.
Jam Recovery is set to Off or Auto (model specific).
Indicates the resolution of the printer (in pixels per inch) along the x and y
dimensions of the device space. x and y are always equal. The following
resolutions are supported:
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
4-66
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
ImagingBBox
array or null
Defines a rectangle that lies within the boundaries of the page specified by
PageSize. ImagingBBox may be either a value of null or an array of four numbers.
A value of null indicates the bounding box is the largest imageable area possible
for a given page size.
InputAttributes
dictionary
Contains information about the various installed input sources. There is a
numeric key, which is a dictionary, for each installed input source.
Input sources
The numeric keys are:
Key
Source
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tray 1
Tray 2
Envelope feeder
Tray 3
Multipurpose feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
The entries in each input source dictionary describe the media that is currently
available in the source. The allowable keys in each source dictionary are:
PageSize
MediaColor
MediaType (See “AutoMediaType” on page 4-64.)
MediaWeight
MatchAll
InputLocation
Read only string which indicates the physical tray
corresponding to the source.
4-67
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
InputAttributes
(continued)
dictionary
Mode is a key within the InputAttributes dictionary, and its value is a name that
determines the mapping of the physical input sources to the input sources listed
in InputAttributes. The allowable values are:
/Default
Printer’s default source assignment
/Optra
Specifies the following ordering used in InputAttributes:
0 - Tray 1
1 - Tray 2
2 - Envelope Feeder 1 or Multipurpose feeder
3 - Tray 3
4 - Multipurpose feeder
5 - Tray 4
6 - Tray 5
7 - Feeder 2
/HPLJFamily1
Specifies the following ordering used by the HewlettPackard Company’s printers:
0 - Tray 1
1 - Tray 2
2 - Envelope Feeder 1 or Multipurpose feeder
3 - Multipurpose feeder (see Note)
4 - Tray 3
5 - Tray 4
6 - Tray 5
7 - Feeder 2
Note: Values 3 and 4 for the Hewlett Packard Company’s LaserJet printers are
switched relative to the /Optra values 3 and 4.
Priority is an array of integers that describes the order in which the input sources
are searched. The first integer represents the highest priority source and so on. If
no array exists or none of the matching sources is in the array, then the priority
order is arbitrary.
Install
procedure
Installs device dependent parameters into the graphics state. This procedure can
modify any parameter in the graphics state.
Jog
integer
Specifies which Offset Pages setting is used. The following values are supported:
0
1
2
3
Offset Pages is disabled.
Offset Pages is disabled.
Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs.
Offset Pages is set to Between Copies.
Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of the same print job in two
separate groups in an output bin.
4-68
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
ManualFeed
boolean
Indicates if the current (or active) source is a manual source. The following values
are supported:
True
False
Manual feed
Automatic feed
If ManualFeed is set to True, and a change is made to PageSize, MediaWeight,
MediaColor, or MediaType parameters, no matching occurs. It is assumed that
the correct page is fed.
Note: ManualFeed is initialized at the start of each print job according to the
default paper source set by the operator panel menus or through PJL. If the
default paper source is a manual source, ManualFeed is set to True. If the default
paper source is not a manual paper source, ManualFeed is set to False.
ManualFeedTimeout
integer
Indicates the amount of time that the printer waits for you to manually load a
sheet of paper.
0
infinite wait or no timeout
If the timeout expires, a timeout error is generated.
This is initialized at the start of each PostScript emulation job to the value of the
Feed Timeout menu item value.
MediaColor
string name
or null
Specifies the color of the current media.
MediaPosition
integer
Specifies the tray to select, if possible, whether it is the best match or not.
Policies may be consulted to determine the selection. For example, assume
there is legal-size paper in Tray 1 and letter-size paper in all the other trays, and
the Policy for the PageSize page device parameter is 1. The command
<< /PageSize [612 1008]/MediaPosition 1 >> setpagedevice
selects Tray 2 even though Tray 1 is a perfect match, because the PageSize
Policy of 1 allows the PageSize to be ignored.
MediaType
string name
or null
Indicates the type of the current media. The value of the string is arbitrary and
may describe any attribute not already defined by size, color, or weight.
MediaWeight
integer or
null
Specifies the weight of the current media in g/m2. The value is either null or a
number.
NumCopies
integer or
null
Specifies the number of copies of each page that should be printed. If the value is
null, the current value of #copies determines the number of copies to print.
Nup
boolean
Determines if Nup is On or Off. Use the N-up function to print multiple page
images on a single page, where the value of N refers to the number of pages. For
example, 2-Up means two page images are printed on one page.
True
False
Nup is On and the NupDetails parameters are active.
Nup is Off.
For some printers, the value of Nup is set through the Multipage Printing menu
item. For more information about multipage printing (N-up), refer to your printer
user documentation.
4-69
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
NupDetails
dictionary
Describes the specific actions performed when the N-up function is active.
Rows is an integer that specifies the number of rows to print on a portrait-oriented
page.
Columns is an integer that specifies the number of columns to print on a portraitoriented page.
Rows and Columns are limited to these values:
Rows
Columns
2
3
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
Orientation specifies the orientation of the individual N-up pages on the printed
page. Supported values are:
0
1
Portrait
Landscape
Orientation determines the positioning of multiple page images on pages printed
using NupDetails. You may choose one of four different orders. The positioning of
page images depends on whether they are sent to the printer as portrait or
landscape images. The following examples show the result of using each setting
on a 2-row, 2-column page:
Page
1
Page
3
Page Page
1
3
Page
1
Page
2
Page Page
2
4
Page
3
Page
4
Reverse Vertical
Landscape
Portrait
Page
4
Page
1
Page
2
Page Page
3
4
Page
4
Page
3
Page Page
4
2
Page
2
Page
4
Page Page
3
1
Reverse Horizontal
Portrait Landscape
Page Page
1
2
Vertical
Portrait Landscape
Page
3
Page Page
4
3
Page
1
Page Page
2
1
Page
2
Horizontal
Portrait Landscape
4-70
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
NupDetails
(continued)
dictionary
Border specifies the type of border to draw around the individual Nup pages.
Supported values are:
0
1
No border
A solid black line
Order is an integer that specifies how the Nup pages are placed on the printed
page. Supported values are as follows, with first the value, the orientation, and
the description:
0
1
2
3
H
The first page is placed at the upper left corner of the printed page
and subsequent pages are placed across and then down.
V The first page is placed at the upper left corner of the printed page
and subsequent pages are placed down and then across.
RH The first page is placed at the upper right corner of the printed page
and subsequent pages are placed across and then down.
RV The first page is placed at the upper right corner of the printed page
and subsequent pages are placed down and then across.
Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see Table C-2
on page C-4.
LandscapeOverride is a boolean which specifies the orientation of N-up pages.
Supported values are:
False
True
Orientation is specified by the PageSize parameter.
Orientation is assumed to be Landscape regardless of the
orientation specified by the PageSize parameter.
Note: The PostScript emulation interpreter has to know the orientation of N-up
pages to position the pages correctly on a hostpage. However, during the
translation process, many landscape pages are created in portrait orientation by
using the PageSize parameter. Then, the page is rotated to create the
appearance of landscape orientation. When this happens, the PostScript
emulation interpreter cannot place the N-up page correctly on the hostpage
unless the PageSize parameter is set correctly.
4-71
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
OutputAttributes
dictionary
Contains information about the output bin targets. There is a numeric key, which
is a dictionary, for each installed output bin. OutputType and OutputLocation are
the allowable keys in each output dictionary. OutputType is used in the search
algorithm to determine which output bin is used as the exit path.
The numeric keys are:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Standard Output Bin or Top Output Bin
Optional Output Bin 1 or Rear Output Bin
Optional Output Bin 2
Optional Output Bin 3
Optional Output Bin 4
Optional Output Bin 5
Optional Output Bin 6
Optional Output Bin 7
Optional Output Bin 8
Optional Output Bin 9
Optional Output Bin 10
OutputType fields can be assigned strings to specify the output destination.
For example:
<< /OutputAttributes << 0 << /OutputType
(Standard Bin) >> >> >> setpagedevice
<< /OutputAttributes << 1 << /OutputType
(Optional Output Bin 1 Exit) >> >> >> setpagedevice
For more information, see “OutputType” on page 4-71.
OutputLocation key is a read-only string that represents the name of the
associated destination.
The OutputAttributes dictionary contains a Priority Array. If an OutputType string
does not match, the priority array is searched in order for a valid output bin.
The initial value of the priority array is set at the beginning of a job and is equal to
the value of the menu item for OutputBin. The array can be changed using this
setpagedevice operator:
<< /OutputAttributes << /Priority
[ 1 0 ] >> >> setpagedevice
This command gives the Optional Output Bin 1 (1) a higher priority than the
Standard Bin (0). Once the command is issued, if no match is found for the
OutputType string, the paper exits into the standard output bin.
OutputPage
boolean
Specifies if pages are actually printed. Supported values are:
True
False
Job is processed as usual (default).
No page is printed, but all other job processing occurs.
OutputType
string
Specifies the output bin destination for the current page. If the destination is not
null, setpagedevice compares it with the OutputType values in the
OutputAttributes dictionary during the search algorithm. If a match is found, this
output bin is the target output for the current page.
PageDeviceName
string name
or null
Assigns or names a page device by using a string parameter. This is used by the
findcolorrendering operator.
4-72
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PageSize
array
Specifies the size [width height] of the current page in 1/72 inch units. A value of
[0 0] is assumed to be the lower left corner of the physical page and [width height]
is the upper right corner.
Policies
dictionary
Uses entries to describe the actions to perform when a particular function cannot
be completed. The entries are as follows:
PageSize is an integer that specifies what recovery action to use when PageSize
cannot be matched with any available media (paper, envelope, or other print
materials). The actions are:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
23
Generate a configurationerror. (default)
Ignore the requested PageSize.
Interact with a human operator or print manager.
Select the next larger or smaller available media and adjust the
page to fit.
Select the next larger available media and adjust the page to fit.
Select the next larger or smaller available media, but do not adjust
the page.
Select the next larger available media, but do not adjust the page.
Disable media selection. Implement the requested PageSize on the
previously selected media without making adjustments. The way
the image is positioned on the media is printer-dependent and may
result in part of the image being clipped.
If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary is set to Off, the effective policy executed is the value of
the DefaultPageSizePolicy key in the DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary. If the SubstituteSize parameter from the
DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary is set to a value other than Off
and an installed source has installed media which may be
substituted for the requested media, the effective policy executed is
3. If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary is set to a value other than Off and a media substitution
cannot be made, the effective policy executed is the value of the
DefaultPageSizePolicy key in the DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary.
PolicyNotFound is an integer that specifies which recovery action to use when a
requested feature other than PageSize cannot be matched with any key in the
Policies dictionary.
The actions are:
0
Generate a configurationerror.
1
Ignore the requested feature (default).
2
Interact with a person or print manager.
PolicyReport is a procedure that is called when a successful setpagedevice is
finished. The procedure consults policies to process unsatisfied feature requests
if needed. Default value is {pop}.
PostRenderingEnhance
boolean
Always True to indicate that PostRenderingEnhanceDetails is enabled.
4-73
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PostRenderingEnhance
Details
dictionary
Describes enhancements that are made to the output after the page has been
held in memory.
REValue is an integer that specifies the current value of the PQET menu item.
Supported values are:
0
1 to 4
PQET is Off.
PQET is On (default is 1).
Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see
“PostRenderingEnhanceDetails” on page C-7.
PowerSave
integer
A value of 1 - 120 or 1 - 240 (model specific) indicates the number of minutes that
elapses after the last page prints and before the Power Saver feature is invoked.
A value of 0 (zero) indicates the Power Saver feature is turned Off on some
printer models.
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as
Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled.
This value is initialized at the start of each PostScript emulation job to the value of
the Power Saver menu item.
Note: This parameter can only be modified within a system administration job.
ProcessColorModel
name or
string
Specifies the color model to use for rendering process colors in the printer.
Supported values are:
DeviceGray
DeviceRGB
DeviceCMYK
DeviceCMY
Punch
integer
Requests holes to be punched in the output page. The format for setting the
Punch key is:
<</Punch n>> setpagedevice
where n is one of the following values:
0
3
SlipSheet
integer
Do not punch holes in the output page.
Punch holes in the output page.
Specifies where blank separator sheets should be inserted in the output.
Supported values are:
0
1
2
3
4
Do not insert separator sheets.
Insert separator sheet at device deactivation.
Insert separator sheet at end of the print job.
Insert separator sheet at the end of each set in a multicopy job.
If Collate is set to True, a set consists of one copy of each page of the
document. For example, if a print job is five pages long, a set is one
copy of pages one to five. If Collate is set to False, a set is all the
copies of a single page of the job. For example, if a print job is three
copies of a five page job, a set is three copies of the first page.
Insert separator sheet after each showpage or copypage.
4-74
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
SlipSheetDetails
dictionary
Specifies the following two unique separator sheet parameters: SlipSheetSource
and Type.
SlipSheetSource is an integer type parameter which identifies the source used for
separator sheets. Supported values are:
Null
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Use current source (default)
Tray 1
Tray 2
Envelope Feeder
Tray 3
Multipurpose feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
The key is found in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary within pagedevice. It can
be altered using a setpagedevice operator.
/SlipSheetDetails << /Type 96
/SlipSheetSource n>> >> setpagedevice
Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see Table C-2
on page C-4.
Staple
integer
Specifies whether to staple the current print job.
Supported values are:
0
1
2
3
4
Do not staple print job.
Staple each set in the front position.
Staple each set in the rear position.
Staple each set according to the Auto setting.
Staple each set in the dual position.
The format for setting the Staple key is:
<</Staple n>> setpagedevice
TraySwitch
boolean
Indicates tray linking is always active. When the media in one input source is
depleted, other input sources are searched to determine if the same media can
be found in another source. If another source is found, the alternate source is
selected. The media in both input sources must be the same size and type for
tray linking to occur.
4-75
PostScript
Table 4-14: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Tumble
boolean
Indicates the orientation of the second side of a duplexed page with respect to
the first side. Supported values are:
True
False
UniversalDetails
dictionary
Causes pages to print as if they are to be bound across the top of
the page (image is rotated 180 ° on the back side of the page)
Causes pages to print as if they are to be side bound (as in a book)
Controls the variable Universal paper size feature. The entries are as follows:
Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see Table C-2
on page C-4.
PageSize is an array of two numbers (real or integer) that defines the x and y
values (in points) for Universal.
Orientation is an integer that defines how the Universal paper will be fed through
the printer. Supported values are:
0
1
Paper is fed short edge first.
Paper is fed long edge first.
Prompt defines a string to be displayed on the operator panel when the printer
prompts a user to load Universal.
4-76
PostScript
Interpreter Parameters
This section describes the PostScript emulation interpreter parameters. There are
three types of interpreter parameters:
•
•
•
User parameters
System parameters
Device parameters
To determine which parameters your printer supports, see Appendix C: “PostScript
Support” on page C-1.
User Parameters
The following user parameters are used by setuserparams and currentuserparams.
If a value is requested that is not within the range for the requested parameter, the
minimum (or maximum) value is used.
If a setuserparams value does not match the type of the specified parameter, a
typecheck error occurs. If a parameter is not supported by the printer, it is ignored.
An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on the
parameter.
To determine which parameters your printer supports, see Table C-3 on page C-8.
Table 4-15: PostScript Emulation User Parameters
Key
Type
Definition
AccurateScreens
boolean
Controls whether the accurate screen algorithm is used during subsequent
executions of the setscreen and setcolorscreen operators.
CollatedCopies
integer
Requests the number of collated copies to print for the job. The CollatedCopies
parameter must be set before the first page of the job has been sent.
If CollatedCopies is set to zero, the parameter has no effect on the job. If
CollatedCopies is set to a number other than zero, the value of #copies and of
the NumCopies and Collate pagedevice parameters are ignored for the job.
Legal values: Any integer between 0 and 999, inclusive.
4-77
PostScript
Table 4-15: PostScript Emulation User Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
HalftoneMode
integer
Affects the results of subsequent halftone setting operators such as setscreen,
setcolorscreen, and sethalftone. The HalftoneMode parameter has no effect on
the current halftone.
Legal values:
0
1
2
IdiomRegnition
boolean
Legal values:
True
False
JobName
string
Normal mode of operation. The operators setscreen,
setcolorscreen, and sethalftone are not affected.
Execution of setscreen, setcolorscreen, or sethalftone causes a
default screen to be used rather than the screen given by the job.
The default screen depends on the current resolution and
parameters in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary in the
pagedevice dictionary that is in affect at the time the halftone
operator is executed.
Not supported. HalftoneMode is set to 1.
Procedure substitution is enabled during execution of the bind
operator.
Idiom recognition is disabled.
Name of the current job for status responses.
Legal values: Any alphanumeric characters in the ASCII printable range (X'20'
through X'FE') excluding the characters ; and ]. Maximum length is 80
characters (characters beyond 80 characters are truncated).
JobTimeout
integer
Number of seconds a print job executes before it is terminated and a PostScript
emulation timeout error is generated.
Set to 0 to disable job timeout.
JobTimeout is initialized to the value of the JobTimeout system parameter at
the beginning of each job.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxDictStack
integer
Maximum elements in a dictionary stack.
Legal value: Any integer between 40 and 255, inclusive.
MaxExecStack
integer
Maximum elements in the execution stack.
Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 75.
MaxFontItem
integer
Maximum number of bytes occupied by the pixel array of a single character in
the font cache.
There is an upper limit dependent on the MaxFontCache system parameter
and the amount of printer memory.
Legal values: Any non-negative integer.
MaxFormItem
integer
Maximum number of bytes occupied by a single cached form.
Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
MaxLocalVM
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by values in local VM.
Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 76800 or the amount of local
VM currently in use plus a small margin.
4-78
PostScript
Table 4-15: PostScript Emulation User Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
MaxOpStack
integer
Maximum elements in the operand stack.
Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 75.
MaxPatternItem
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by a single cached pattern.
Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
MaxScreenItem
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by a single halftone screen.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxSuperScreen
integer
Establishes an upper limit for the number of pixels in the supercell. Supercells
affect Type 1 and Type 2 halftones.
If MaxSuperScreen is set to zero, the use of supercells is prevented.
Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
MaxUPathItem
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by a single user path.
Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
MinFontCompress
integer
(Read-only) This value is always the value of MAXINTEGER.
PageCount
integer
(Read-only) This value is a running sum of the number of pages submitted by
the PostScript interpreter to the print engine for printing.
Note: This value is reset to 0 (zero) during PostScript initialization. Since
PostScript initialization by the printer cannot be known, we recommend querying
the value of PageCount at the beginning of a job and at the end of a job, and
then calculating the difference to determine how many pages are submitted to
the printer for a specific job.
This parameter is not valid for tracking pages between jobs.
UseOldcopypage
boolean
Legal values:
True
False
VMReclaim
integer
Legal values:
0
-1
-2
VMThreshold
integer
Indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in the
PostScript Level 2 description.
Indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in the
PostScript 3 description.
Enables automatic garbage collection
Disables automatic garbage collection for local Virtual Memory
(VM)
Disables automatic garbage collection for both local and global
VM
Frequency of automatic garbage collection, which occurs when the specified
number of bytes have been allocated since the previous collection.
Legal value: Any integer from 8192 to 500000, inclusive.
WaitTimeout
integer
Number of seconds the interpreter waits to receive additional characters from
the host before it terminates the current print job by executing a PostScript
emulation timeout error.
A value of 0 indicates an infinite timeout. WaitTimeout is initialized to the value
of the WaitTimeout system parameter at the beginning of each print job.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
4-79
PostScript
System Parameters
The setsystemparams operator sets the values of the specified system parameters.
This operator requires a password if one is set. The currentsystemparams operator
returns a dictionary of the current values of the system parameters.
Values supplied to setsystemparams that are outside the range or limits for the
specified integer parameter do not cause rangecheck or limitcheck errors. An
appropriate value is used. For example, if you set JobTimeout to 14, it is actually set
to 15, and no error is generated. The exceptions are noted in Table 4-16.
Values supplied to setsystemparams that do not match the type of the specified
parameter cause typecheck errors. Parameters that are not supported by the printer
are ignored. An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on
the parameter. Write-only parameters are not returned by currentsystemparams.
To determine which parameters your printer supports, see Table C-4 on page C-9.
Table 4-16: PostScript Emulation System Parameters
Key
Type
Definition
BuildTime
integer
(Read-only) Timestamp identifying the specific build of the
PostScript emulation interpreter.
ByteOrder
boolean
(Read-only) Native (preferred) order of multiple-byte numbers
in binary encoded tokens.
False
True
high-order first
low-order first
CurDisplayList
integer
(Read-only) This value is always zero.
CurFontCache
integer
(Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the font cache.
CurFormCache
integer
(Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the form cache.
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
3 These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
4-80
PostScript
Table 4-16: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
CurInputDevice
string
Definition
(Read-only) The name of the communications device
corresponding to the current input file
for the PostScript emulation program
which is currently executing. Possible
values are:
%LocalTalkA%
%LocalTalkB%
%LocalTalkC%
%LocalTalkD%
%SerialA%
%SerialB%
%SerialC%
%SerialD%
%ParallelA%
%ParallelB%
%ParallelC%
%ParallelD%
%IR_A%
%IR_B%
%IR_C%
%IR_D%
%EtherTalkB%
%EtherTalkC%
%EtherTalkD%
%TokenTalkB%
%TokenTalkC%
%TokenTalkD%
%LexLinkB%
%LexLinkC%
%LexLinkD%
%PrintServerB%
%PrintServerC%
%PrintServerD%
%RemotePrinterB%
%RemotePrinterC%
%RemotePrinterD%
%AppSocketB%
%AppSocketC%
%AppSocketD%
%LPR_B%
%LPR_C%
%LPR_D%
%UnknownDevice%
%USB_A%
%USB_B%
%USB_C%
%USB_D%
CurOutlineCache
integer
(Read-only) This value is always zero.
CurOutputDevice
string
(Read-only) The name of the communications device
corresponding to the current output file for the PostScript
emulation program which is currently executing. This string is
the same as CurInputDevice.
CurPatternCache
integer
(Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the pattern cache.
CurScreenStorage
integer
(Read-only) This value is always zero.
CurSourceList
integer
(Read-only) This value is always zero.
CurUPathCache
integer
(Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the user path cache.
DisableFastProcs
integer
This bit field allows precompiled PostScript procedures to be
selectively disabled. These precompiled procedures speed
the execution time of some application-generated print jobs
by substituting PostScript procedures in the job’s ProcSet with
fast functions that are built into the printer firmware.
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
3 These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
4-81
PostScript
Table 4-16: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DoPrintErrors
boolean
Specifies whether to print an error page using a built-in error
handler when a PostScript emulation error occurs.
True
False
Print PS Error user default value is set to On.
Print PS Error user default value is set to Off.
DoStartPage
boolean
(Read only) Always returns False.
EnableExtraFonts1
boolean
True
All 75 resident fonts are enabled.
False
Original 39 PostScript fonts are available.
Note: Changes to this parameter take effect when PostScript
is restarted.
EngineBoot1
string
(Read-only) Specifies the version of the boot code.
string
(Read-only) Specifies the version of the engine code.
integer
(Read-only) Maximum speed of the print engine in pages per
minute.
boolean
Indicates or modifies the Resource Save user default value.
EngineCode1
EngineSpeed
1
EnvironmentSave2
True
Resource Save user default value is set to On.
Resource Save user default value is set to Off.
False
Note: When a job changes this parameter from False to True,
all interpreter tasks such as PostScript and PCL are
terminated and restarted at the end of the current job.
FactoryDefaults
boolean
If set to True and the printer is then immediately powered off,
all non-volatile parameters revert to factory default values at
the next power-on. The print job that sets FactoryDefaults to
True must be the last job executed before power-off;
otherwise, the request is ignored.
FatalErrorAddress
integer
The address at which a fatal system software error occurred.
It is stored in this parameter before execution is stopped. It is
also transmitted to the host over the communications
channel.
FontResourceDir
string
Specifies the location in the file system for font resource files.
string
(Read-only) The version of the font read-only memory (ROM).
GenericResourceDir
string
Specifies the location in the file system for resource files.
GenericResourcePathSep
string
Concatenated to the GenericResourceDir and the category
name. It is followed by the resource name to get the external
location of the resource.
FontVersion
1
Example: If GenericResourceDir and
GenericResourcePathSep were (Resource/) and (/),
respectively, the LexmarkLogo resource of the Pattern
category would be in Resource/Pattern/LexmarkLogo.
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
3 These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
4-82
PostScript
Table 4-16: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
InstalledRam
integer
(Read-only) Indicated, in bytes, the total amount of installed
printer memory (RAM) in the system.
Note: InstalledRam should not be confused with RamSize
which is the amount of memory (RAM) available to the
formatting interpreters and the graphics engine.
JobTimeout
integer
The value in seconds to which the user parameter
JobTimeout is initialized at the beginning of each print job. If
you set the system parameter JobTimeout to a negative
value, it is ignored and the previous setting of JobTimeout is
used. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the timeout is infinite.
If you set a number between 1 and 14, 15 is set.
Legal values: x = 0, 15 <= x <= 65355
languagelevel
integer
The value of languagelevel integer in systemdict always
matches the value of this system parameter. If set to 2, the
printer will behave as though /UseOldcopypage and
/UseOldfonts are both true (regardless of their actual values).
The latter two parameters will return their actual values when
queried.
Legal Values: 2, 3
MaxDisplayAndSourceList2
integer
(Read-only) This value is always the same value as
InstalledRam.
MaxDisplayList
integer
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-9 for the default value
of your printer.
MaxFontCache
integer
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-9 for the default value
of your printer.
MaxFormCache
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by the form cache.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxImageBuffer
integer
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-9 for the default value
of your printer.
MaxOutlineCache
integer
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-9 for the default value
of your printer.
MaxPatternCache
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by the pattern cache.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxPermanentVM2
integer
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-9 for the default value
of your printer.
MaxRasterMemory
integer
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-9 for the default value
of your printer.
MaxScreenStorage
integer
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-9 for the default value
of your printer.
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
3 These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
4-83
PostScript
Table 4-16: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
MaxSourceList
integer
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-9 for the default value
of your printer.
MaxUPathCache
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by the user path cache.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
PageCount
integer
(Read-only) Total number of pages that have been printed.
PanelCode1
string
(Read-only) Version of the operator panel code.
PrinterCode1
string
(Read-only) Firmware version of the printer controller card.
PrinterName
string
Initialized from the printer name stored in NVRAM (the default
name of the printer). If this parameter is set to a zero length
string, the PrinterName is set to the value of the product
string in statusdict.
Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters.
RamSize
integer
(Read-only) Total amount of memory (in bytes) installed in the
printer.
RealFormat
string
(Read-only) Preferred representation for real numbers in
binary encoded tokens.
Revision
integer
(Read-only) The current revision level of the machinedependent portion of PostScript emulation.
SearchBuiltinFontsFirst1
boolean
Controls the device search order the interpreter uses to
locate fonts.
SerialNumber1
string
(Read-only) Serial number of your printer.
StartJobPassword
string
(Write-only) Controls the ability of the startjob operator to
alter initial Virtual Memory (VM).
Legal value: Any integer or string of 32 or fewer non-null
characters. An integer is converted to a string.
StartupMode
integer
Controls the system start file (Sys/Start) during PostScript
emulation initialization. Also, controls the job start file (Job/
Start) before each print job.
0
1
10
11
Disable use of Sys/Start file and Job/Start file.
Sys/Start file executes (if present on disk or flash).
Job/Start file executes before each user job.
Both files run (a combination of 1 and 10).
Legal Values: 0 <= x <= 255. Values other than the four listed
are equivalent to 0.
Note: If both flash and disk have a Sys/Start file and Job/Start
file, the value of the SearchOrder for the two devices
determines which file is executed.
StaticRamSize1
1
integer
(Read-only) Amount of static memory (in bytes) on the
controller board.
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
3 These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
4-84
PostScript
Table 4-16: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
SystemParamsPassword
string
(Write-only) Controls the ability of setsystemparams to
change the values of system parameters and setdevparams
to change the values of device parameters.
Legal value: Any integer or string of 32 or fewer non-null
characters. An integer is converted to a string.
UseOldcopypage3
boolean
True indicates the copypage command is processed as
defined in PostScript Level 2 description. False indicates the
copypage command is processed as defined in PostScript 3
description.
UseOldFonts3
boolean
True redefines the following PostScript resident fonts to match
the character designs and metrics defined in PostScript
Level 2. The font names in parentheses are the equivalent
PostScript 3 font names for the associated PostScript Level 2
names.
Antique Olive
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
Marigold
Univers Bold
(Antique Olive Roman)
(Letter Gothic Slanted)
False restores the font compatibility to PostScript 3.
ValidNV
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if non-volatile memory is currently used
to store persistent parameters. If this memory is found
defective during system initialization, factory defaults are
used. If further testing reveals this memory is defective, it is
not used and ValidNV is False. Otherwise, ValidNV is True.
WaitTimeout
integer
The value, in seconds, to which the user parameter
WaitTimeout is initialized at the beginning of each print job.
Negative values are ignored and the previous setting is used.
A value of zero indicates an infinite timeout. If you select a
number between 1 and 14, 15 is set.
Legal values: x = 0, 15 <= x <= 65355
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
3 These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
4-85
PostScript
Device Parameters
The currentdevparams operator returns a dictionary of the current values of the
system parameters.
The setdevparams operator sets the values of the specified device parameters.
•
This operator requires a password if one is set.
•
Values supplied to setdevparams that are outside the range or limits for the
specified integer parameter do not cause rangecheck or limitcheck errors.
The appropriate value is used.
•
Values supplied to setdevparams that do not match the type of the specified
parameter cause typecheck errors.
•
If a parameter name is not known, an undefined error occurs.
•
An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on the
parameter.
•
To specify the parameters for a specific communications channel, use the
appropriate suffix. For example, the serial channels are:
–
–
–
–
%SerialA%
%SerialB%
%SerialC%
%SerialD%
For some printers, no “A” channel exists. If %Serial% is specified, it refers to the
channel where the print job is sent.
For additional information on flash memory and disk, see Chapter 6: “Flash Memory
and Disk” on page 6-1.
To determine which devices your printer supports, see Table C-5 on page C-11.
To determine which device parameters your printer supports, see Table C-6 on
page C-13.
4-86
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %Parallel%, %ParallelA%, %ParallelB%, %ParallelC%, %ParallelD%
(%Parallel_NV% and %Parallel_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
Handshake
integer
(Read-only) Always returns a value of 2.
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed
Data is lost
OutputDevice
string
(Read-only)
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is set to On.
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 2-1.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Option Slot 4
4-87
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PSSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 4-1.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %Serial%, %SerialA%, %SerialB%, %SerialC%, %SerialD%
(%Serial_NV% and %Serial_Pending% contain the same parameters)
Baud
integer
Returns the value of the Baud menu item.
CheckParity
boolean
(Read-only) Designates whether parity checking is done on the incoming data. Supported
values are:
True
False
Parity menu item set to Even or Odd.
Parity menu item set to None or Ignore.
DataBits
integer
Returns the value of the Data Bits menu item.
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
FlowControl
name
Designates the serial flow control method between the host computer and the device.
Returns a value corresponding to the Serial Protocol menu item. Supported values are:
Dtr
DtrDsr
XonXoff
XonXoffDtr
XonXoffDtrDsr
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
HonorDSR
boolean
Serial - Honor DSR. Supported values are:
True
False
Honor DSR is set to On.
Honor DSR is set to Off.
4-88
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Parity
name
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Designates the parity to be used between the host computer and the device. Returns the
value of the Parity menu item. Supported values are:
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
If Parity is set to Ignore, CheckParity is set to False and Parity becomes Even.
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is set to On.
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 2-1.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 4-1.
RobustXon
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
SerialMode
name
RobustXon is set to On.
RobustXon is set to Off.
Designates the serial communication configuration: RS232C or RS422. Returns the value
of the Serial RS-232/RS-422 menu item. Supported values are:
RS232
RS422
Returns RS232 on a printer that is attached with a cable that does not support RS-422.
4-89
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
StopBits
integer
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
1
2
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LocalTalk%, %LocalTalkA%, %LocalTalkB%, %LocalTalkC%,
%LocalTalkD%
(%LocalTalk_NV% and %LocalTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
LocalTalkType
string
The “type” of the AppleTalk network entity name. This parameter also sets the Type
parameter to the same value. The new value is returned by the appletalktype compatibility
operator.
Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters. Default value is LaserWriter.
Note: Setting this variable does not affect the value for other physical internal print servers.
The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port.
NodeID
integer
(Read-only)
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
4-90
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 2-1.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is On.
PS SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 4-1.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %EtherTalk%, %EtherTalkA%, %EtherTalkB%, %EtherTalkC%,
%EtherTalkD%
(%EtherTalk_NV% and %EtherTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
EthernetAddress
string
(Read only) The Ethernet address of the Ethernet internal print server.
Legal value: Any string of 17 or fewer non-null characters.
EtherTalkType
string
The “type” of the EtherTalk interface entity name. This parameter also sets the
LocalTalkType parameter to the same value. The new value is returned by the
appletalktype compatibility operator.
Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters. Default value is LaserWriter.
Note: Setting this variable does not affect the value for other physical internal print servers.
The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port.
EtherTalkZone
string
The “zone” of the EtherTalk interface entity name.
EtherTalkZone is read/write only to RAM. There is no NVRAM variable for EtherTalkZone.
Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters.
4-91
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
NodeID
integer
(Read-only)
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 2-1.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is On.
PS SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 4-1.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %IR%, %IR_A%, %IR_B%, %IR_C%, %IR_D%
(%IR_NV% and %IR_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
4-92
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 2-1.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 4-1.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %USB%, %USB_A%, %USB_B%, %USB_C%, %USB_D%
(%USB_NV% and %USB_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
4-93
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 2-1.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1, 2, and 3 (Model specific)
PSSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 4-1.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %TokenTalk%, %TokenTalkA%, %TokenTalkB%, %TokenTalkC%,
%TokenTalkD%
(%TokenTalk_NV% and %TokenTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters)
Address
string
(Read-only)
Bridging
name
(Read-only) Adaptive
4-94
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
boolean
Interpreter
name
(Read-only) Always returns False.
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
NodeID
integer
(Read-only)
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 2-1.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see “Using SmartSwitch” on page 4-1.
4-95
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
TokenTalkType
string
Setting this variable does not affect the value of other physical internal print servers.
Note: The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Zone
string
Returns the value identified when the printer makes connection to the network at power on.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %AppSocket%, %AppSocketA%, %AppSocketB%, %AppSocketC%,
%AppSocketD%
(%AppSocket_NV% and %AppSocket_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PortLocation
string
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
4-96
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %RemotePrinter%, %RemotePrinterA%, %RemotePrinterB%,
%RemotePrinterC%, %RemotePrinterD%
(%RemotePrinter_NV% and %RemotePrinter_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
Note: Setting this variable changes the value of the corresponding %PrintServer% device.
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PortLocation
string
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
4-97
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %PrintServer%, %PrintServerA%, %PrintServerB%,
%PrintServerC%, %PrintServerD%
(%PrintServer_NV% and %PrintServer_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
Note: Setting this variable changes the value of the corresponding %RemotePrinter%
device.
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PortLocation
string
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
4-98
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LPR%, %LPR_A%, %LPR_B%, %LPR_C%, %LPR_D%
(%LPR_NV% and %LPR_Pending% contain the same parameters)
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PortLocation
string
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LexLink%, %LexLinkA%, %LexLinkB%, %LexLinkC%,
%LexLinkD%
(%LexLink_NV% and %LexLink_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean
Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
False
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Enabled
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
4-99
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns False.
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PortLocation
string
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %IP%, %IP_A%, %IP_B%, %IP_C%, %IP_D%
GatewayAddress
string
(Read-only)
IPAddress
string
(Read-only)
IPAddressDynamic
boolean
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
NetworkMask
string
(Read-only)
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Physical
string
(Read-only)
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
4-100
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %EthernetPhysical%, %EthernetPhysicalA%, %EthernetPhysicalB%,
%EthernetPhysicalC%, %EthernetPhysicalD%
EthernetAddress
string
(Read-only)
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PortLocation
string
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %TokenRingPhysical%, %TokenRingPhysicalA%,
%TokenRingPhysicalB%, %TokenRingPhysicalC%, %TokenRingPhysicalD%
Address
string
(Read-only)
On
boolean
Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
PortLocation
string
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Speed
integer
Supported values are:
4
16
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Engine%
BSizeStandard
name
(Read-only) Value of JIS
4-101
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Darkness
real
Print Darkness and Toner Saver Setting
Designates the print darkness and toner saver setting (model specific).
Legal value: Any non-negative real number from 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
For queries, the Print Darkness setting is returned as a real value:
Print Darkness
Setting
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
Toner Saver
Setting Value
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Darkness Value
Returned
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
When the Darkness value is changed, the following ranges determine the Print Darkness
and Toner Saver setting values:
Darkness Value
0.0 <=value<=0.15
0.15 <=value<=0.25
0.25 <=value<=0.35
0.35 <=value<=0.45
0.45 <=value<=0.55
0.55 <=value<=0.65
0.65 <=value<=0.75
0.75 <=value<=0.85
0.85 <=value<=0.95
0.95 <=value<=1.0
Print Darkness
Setting Value
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
Toner Saver
Setting Value
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Print Darkness Setting
Designates the print darkness (model specific).
Legal value: Any non-negative real number from 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
For queries, the Print Darkness setting is returned as a real value:
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.9
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
When the Darkness value is modified, the following ranges are used to determine the Print
Darkness setting:
0.0 - 0.2
>0.2 - 0.4
>0.4 - 0.6
>0.6 - 0.8
>0.8 - 1.0
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
4-102
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PageCount
integer
(Read-only) Page Count
TimeToStandby
integer
Power Saver. Supported values are:
0 to 120, in minutes
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Console%
Language
name
Display Language
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Calendar%, %CalendarA%, %CalendarB%, %CalendarC%,
%CalendarD%
Day
integer
Supported values are:
1–31
Hour
integer
Supported values are:
0–23
Minute
integer
Supported values are:
0–59
Month
integer
Supported values are:
1–12
Running
boolean
Signifies whether time is available for this device.
Second
integer
Supported values are:
0–59
Type
name
(Read-only) Value of /Parameters
Year
integer
DateTime
string
Date and Time in the format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM
DayOfWeekLong
string
Long day name (for example, "Wednesday")
DayOfWeekNum
integer
Supported values are:
0–6 (0=Sunday)
DayOfWeekShort
string
Short day name (for example, "Wed")
Device Parameters for the IODevice Device %disk1%
BlockSize
integer
(Read-only)
Free
integer
(Read-only) Indicates the amount of free space available (in pages) on the disk. Valid only if
the disk is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the disk
is not mounted or is full.
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the disk supports named files. Valid only if the disk is mounted
(mounted is set to True). If the disk is not mounted, the parameter has a value of False.
4-103
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
InitializeAction
integer
Specifies an action for initializing the disk. Supported values are:
0
1
Indicates no action; the value returned when the parameter is read.
Indicates that the current file system (if any) should be deleted and a new one
of LogicalSize created (the disk is assumed to have been formatted already).
The disk must first be mounted; otherwise, an ioerror results.
2
Reformats the entire disk before creating a new file system of size
LogicalSize.
3
(or greater) has the same effect as the value 2 and also tests the disk x - 2
times.
Note: The current file system refers to /FileSystem. See Type as follows for more
information.
LogicalSize
integer
Specifies the size of the file system to be created and is as an argument by InitializeAction.
• If 0 (zero), InitializeAction uses the size of the entire disk. When queried, indicates the
current size of the file system on the device (in pages). A value of 0 indicates that the
device is not mounted.
• If set with a certain value and the device is reformatted, a query returns the value that
was set. If queried before the disk is reformatted, a different value from the one set may
be returned because it may return the current size.
• If set to 1, 2, or 3, an ioerror occurs.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer, including 0. The value must be less than or equal to
the value of PhysicalSize. If set to a value greater than PhysicalSize, or less than zero, a
rangecheck error occurs.
Mounted
boolean
True
False
System attempts to mount the disk.
System attempts to dismount the disk.
A device must contain a valid file system to mount successfully. When a device is mounted,
it is known to the system and is readable. To verify if the device is currently mounted, query
this parameter immediately after setting it.
PhysicalSize
integer
(Read-only) Indicates the size of the disk (in pages). Valid only when the disk is mounted. A
value of 0 (zero) indicates that the device is not mounted.
Removable
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the drive supports removable disks. Always returns False.
Searchable
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the disk participates in searches in the file system operations that
specify a filename without specifying a device.
SearchOrder
integer
(Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority assigned to the disk
when searching for a file and no device has been specified. A lower integer indicates a
higher priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, this value is ignored.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /FileSystem.
Writeable
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the files on the disk can be opened for write access. If the disk is
write protected, this parameter is a constant equal to False. When the disk is not mounted,
this parameter indicates if the drive supports writeable media.
Device Parameters for the IODevice %flash1%
BlockSize
integer
(Read-only)
Free
integer
(Read-only) Indicates the amount of free space available (in pages) on the flash. Valid if the
flash is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the flash is
not mounted or is full.
4-104
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the flash parameter is only valid when flash is mounted (mounted is
set to True). If flash is not mounted, the parameter has a value of False.
InitializeAction
integer
Specifies an action for initializing flash:
0
1
2
3
Indicates no action; the value returned when the parameter is read.
Indicates that the current file system should be deleted and a new one of
PhysicalSize created (the flash must be formatted already). The flash must
first be mounted; otherwise, an ioerror results.
Reformats the entire flash before creating a new file system of PhysicalSize
(or greater) has the same effect as the value 2 and also tests the flash x – 2
times
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
LogicalSize
integer
This parameter is not used for InitializeAction.
InitializeAction always formats to PhysicalSize, regardless of what is specified in
LogicalSize. A query returns the current size (in pages) of the file system on the device.
A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the device is not mounted.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer, including 0 (zero).
The value of LogicalSize must be less than or equal to the value of PhysicalSize. A
rangecheck error occurs if you try to set a larger value or set the value to 0 (zero).
Mounted
boolean
True
False
System attempts to mount the flash.
System attempts to dismount the flash.
When a device is mounted, it becomes known to the system and is readable, depending on
the nature of the device.
A device must contain a valid file system or it will not mount successfully. To verify if the
device is currently mounted, query this parameter immediately after setting it.
PhysicalSize
integer
(Read-only) Indicates the size of the flash (in pages) for a flash that is mounted. A value of 0
indicates that the device is not mounted.
Removable
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the drive supports removable flash.
Searchable
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the flash participates in searches in file system operations that
specify a filename without specifying a device.
SearchOrder
integer
(Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority at which the flash is
searched for a file in operations where no device has been specified. A lower integer
indicates a high priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, the value of this integer has
no meaning.
Type
name
(Read-only) This constant always returns the value of /FileSystem.
Writeable
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the files on the flash can be opened for write access. A writeprotected flash returns False. When the flash is not mounted, this parameter indicates if the
device supports writeable media.
4-105
PostScript
Table 4-17: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the IODevice %rom%
BlockSize
integer
(Read-only)
Free
integer
(Read-only) Indicates the amount (in pages) of free space available in ROM. Valid only if the
ROM is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the ROM
is not mounted or it is full.
HasNames
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if ROM supports named files. Valid only if ROM is mounted (mounted
is set to True). If ROM is not mounted, this parameter has a value of False.
InitializeAction
integer
(Read-only) Always returns a value of 0 (zero), which indicates no action.
LogicalSize
integer
(Read-only)
Mounted
boolean
True
False
System attempts to mount the ROM.
System attempts to dismount the ROM.
When a device is mounted, it becomes known to the system and is readable, depending on
the nature of the device.
A device must contain a valid file system or it will not mount successfully. To verify if the
device is currently mounted, query this parameter immediately after setting it.
If the ROM device is dismounted, unpredictable results occur.
PhysicalSize
integer
(Read-only) Indicates the size of the ROM (in pages) that is mounted. A value of 0 (zero)
indicates that the device is not mounted. This parameter is only valid when ROM is
mounted.
Removable
boolean
(Read-only) Always False.
Searchable
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if ROM participates in searches in file system operations that specify
a filename without specifying a device.
SearchOrder
integer
(Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority assigned to the ROM
when searching for a file and no device has been specified. A lower integer indicates a
higher priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, the value of this integer has no
meaning.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /FileSystem.
Writeable
boolean
(Read-only) Indicates if the files on the ROM can be opened for write access. Always False.
4-106
PostScript
Status and Error Messages
Printers return PostScript emulation error messages and status information to the
computer through any active interface. To send information to the computer through
the parallel interface, configure the interface as bidirectional.
Tagged Binary Not Active
Your printer responds and processes a Ctrl-T (x'14') command as a status query
when:
•
The PostScript emulation interpreter is processing a print job.
•
The printer is idle and the PostScript emulation interpreter is the selected
interpreter.
Your printer responds and processes a Ctrl-T (x'14') command as normal data and not
a status query when:
•
•
Another interpreter is processing a print job.
The printer is idle and another interpreter is the selected interpreter.
Notes:
• Status queries cannot be received while the printer is in an error state.
• Your printer always selects the PostScript emulation interpreter and processes a Ctrl-T (x'14') command as a status query when data is received
through the LocalTalk interface.
Tagged Binary Active
When Tagged Binary is active, your printer always responds to a Ctrl-T (x'14')
command as a status query and selects the PostScript emulation interpreter to
process the current print job. Tagged Binary mode is immediately exited at the end of
the print job.
Note: Status queries cannot be received while the printer is in an error state.
4-107
PostScript
Status Messages
Your printer responds to a Ctrl-T (x'14') status query on an interface by sending a
one-line status message back to the host computer over the same interface. If the
status query is received between print jobs and the printer is idle with no error
conditions, an idle response is returned to the host computer.
Status messages are bracketed by the characters %%[ and ]%%, so the computer
software can extract them from other data generated by the current print job. They
follow a standard syntax, consisting of one or more key-value pairs, separated by
semicolons. For example:
%%[ job: Project Report; status: busy; source: Parallel ]%%
The following table lists the possible keys and value descriptions.
To determine which status message keys your printer supports, see Table C-7 on
page C-21.
Table 4-18: Status Message Keys and Value Descriptions
Key
Value Description
job
The name of the print job, as stored in the JobName entry in statusdict. This
field is omitted if the current print job has no defined JobName.
status
Printer activity at the time the message is sent:
Idle
Busy
Waiting
Initializing
Not ready
source
No job in progress
Executing a PostScript emulation program and/or printing
pages
I/O wait in mid-job
During startup
Printer menus display or Not Ready displays.
Source of the job the server is executing:
Serial
Parallel
Network
USB
LocalTalk
Infrared
Internal
This field is omitted if the server is idle.
4-108
PostScript
Unsolicited Messages
You may receive unsolicited messages from your printer. Unsolicited messages use
the same syntax as status messages. These messages are transmitted sequentially
as ordinary data through the communication channel, with other characters written to
a standard output file. These messages are bracketed with %%[ and ]%%.
%%[ Error: error type; Offending Command: operator ]%%
The interpreter has detected an error while executing operator and invoked
handleerror.
%%[ Flushing: rest of job (to EOF) is ignored ]%%
The rest of the current print job is discarded because of a previous error or other
ending, such as a stop or Ctrl-C. The printer ignores further input until it
determines the end of the print job.
%%[ exitserver: permanent state may be changed ]%%
The PostScript emulation program has exited successfully from the server
normal save or restore context; therefore, it can make permanent changes to
system parameters or virtual memory.
5-1
Languages
CHAPTER 5: Switching Languages
Your printer may support both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation. Refer to your
printer documentation for more information. This chapter describes ways to switch
printer languages and explains when you may want to choose one method over
another. SmartSwitch is provided with the printer to switch languages. Other methods
of switching languages are:
•
•
PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command
Sniffing
SmartSwitch
The SmartSwitch feature lets the printer switch to either PCL emulation or PostScript
emulation for each interface (parallel, serial, USB, or network). Your printer is shipped
from the factory with SmartSwitch set to On for all languages and all interfaces.
Consequently, the printer examines all print jobs coming into all its interfaces and
switches between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation dynamically.
If a software program explicitly tells the printer which language to use by a PJL
command, the printer always accepts and uses that explicit command, regardless of
how SmartSwitch has been set from the printer operator panel.
If a software program does not explicitly tell the printer which language to use, the
printer examines the incoming data stream and selects the language.
5-2
Languages
Setting SmartSwitch for Different Interfaces
You can customize your printer so that particular print jobs are sent to particular
interfaces. For example, you may want to send all PostScript emulation jobs to the
network interface and all PCL emulation jobs to the parallel interface. You can do so
by choosing different languages for each interface from the printer operator panel or
through MarkVision Professional and setting the selected language to On for the
interface you want. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information.
If you have turned off a particular language for an interface, but then decide to send a
job to that interface using that language, you must begin the job with a PJL command
to override the settings you made from the printer operator panel or through
MarkVision Professional. For example, if you set PCL emulation to Off for the serial
interface and later decide to send a job in that language through that interface, you
must preface the job with a PJL command to override the Off setting. Be sure to end
the job with a Universal Exit Language (UEL) command, which is described on
page 3-2.
Printer Job Language
For details on Printer Job Language (PJL) and the PJL ENTER LANGUAGE
command, see “ENTER LANGUAGE Command” on page 3-3.
5-3
Languages
Sniffing
Sniffing is:
•
Enabled when any End-of-Job point occurs.
•
Disabled when a SIC or PJL command within a valid printer language is
received.
The printer examines the received data stream, attempts to determine the type of data
stream, and automatically switches to the proper language.
The printer examines the active printer language and decides when an End-of-Job
point occurs. End-of-Job points are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SIC command
UEL command
Print timeout
Wait timeout
PostScript timeout due to erasing the contents of an internal link
Ctrl-D in PostScript or tagged binary
INIT*
Network Protocol Alliance Protocol job boundary
6-1
Memory
CHAPTER 6: Flash Memory and Disk
Flash memory and disk devices are used to store permanent fonts, macros, and
symbol sets. The disk device is also used to buffer print jobs, collate large jobs, and
store job statistics. Unlike RAM memory, these devices retain the following information
when the printer is powered off, or when the printer switches languages:
•
•
•
•
•
•
PCL emulation permanent bitmapped and scalable fonts
PCL emulation permanent macros
PCL emulation symbol sets
PostScript Type 1 fonts
Files created using the PostScript emulation file operators
Demonstration files
Some printers have connectors that let you install optional flash memory or a disk
device; other printers may offer one or the other of these devices as a standard
feature. Refer to your printer documentation for more information.
When first installed in the printer, the flash memory or disk may be unformatted. You
must format the device before you download resources. A message displays on the
printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional if the device is unformatted.
Warning: When you format flash memory or a disk, all information currently stored
on the device is lost.
If flash memory or a disk becomes full while downloading resources, a message
displays on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. The file
being downloaded is not saved unless room is available to store the entire file.
6-2
Memory
Resource Data Collection (Download Target)
Use the Resource Data Collection (Download Target) mode to save the following
information to flash memory or disk:
•
•
•
•
•
Permanent bitmapped and scalable fonts for PCL emulation
Permanent macros for PCL emulation macros
Permanent symbol sets for PCL emulation
Type 1 fonts for PostScript emulation
Other PostScript resources
Resource Data Collection can be turned On and Off by using:
•
The operator panel menus to select Download Target.
•
The MarkVision Professional printer utility. You can also download resources
to flash memory and disk or format the flash memory or disk using this printer
utility.
•
A PJL command (see “LDOWNLOADTARGET” on page 3-30 and
“LDOWNLOADTARGET Command” on page 3-86).
The download target (the destination for the resource data collection) may be RAM
(the default), flash memory, or disk.
If you store resources (fonts, macros, or symbol sets) in RAM, the resources can be
lost if the printer is reset or if the printer language changes while Resource Save is set
to Off. In each case, the resources must be downloaded again. By storing resources
on flash memory or disk, the resources become permanent in the printer.
6-3
Memory
Storing Resources on Flash Memory or Disk
Complete the following steps to download resources to flash memory or disk using the
printer operator panel, MarkVision Professional, or a PJL command.
1
Set the download target to flash memory or disk.
Resource Data Collection mode is enabled to the device selected.
2
3
Download the resources to flash memory or disk using PCL emulation or
PostScript emulation.
•
PCL emulation collects and stores the currently defined font, macro, or
symbol set information in printer RAM memory. These resources are written
to flash memory or disk when Resource Data Collection is disabled (see
step 3). Stored resources are also copied to flash memory or disk when a
printer language switch occurs.
•
PostScript emulation writes Type 1 fonts or other resources to flash memory
or disk after successfully parsing a definefont operator.
Set Download Target to RAM.
Resource Data Collection mode is disabled.
Viewing the Contents of Flash Memory and Disk
There are three ways to view the contents of flash memory and disk:
•
Send the PJL LPRINTDIRECTORY command (see “LPRINT Commands
(Information Pages)” on page 3-83).
•
Select Print Directory from the printer operator panel menus.
•
Use the MarkVision Professional utility.
The directory lists the storage device (flash or disk), the names of the files, and the file
size. See page 6-4 for a sample directory.
6-4
Memory
Example of Directory
The Directory that prints appears similar to the one below. An explanation of the parts
of the Directory follows the example.
Optional Font Memory Size 1048576 bytes
Part Name: FLASH
Part Number: (none)
Write password protected
ID
Type
Size
Prot.
Description
===========
===================
========
========
========================
1000
PCL bitmap font
32140
W
ITClublnGrphBkOb
1002
PCL bitmap font
52550
Courier
1003
PCL scalable font
254491
CG Times
PostScript font
134572
Courier
User data
1000
My Program
Demo
1000
My Demo
Unknown file type
1000
My Unknown
248
PCL macro
10
249
PCL macro
10
9 files
476773 bytes used
0 bytes unavailable
571803 bytes free
R/W
mydescription
Optional Font Memory
Expression used to indicate flash memory or disk is installed.
Part Name
Part Name as it is stored in the flash memory card header. If flash memory is formatted
by the printer, the part name field is shown as FLASH. The part name field for the disk
is not printed.
6-5
Memory
Part Number
Part Number as it is stored in the flash memory card header. If the flash memory is
formatted by the printer, the part number field is shown as (none). The part number
field for the disk is not printed.
Write Password Protected
Indicates the entire flash memory or disk is write-protected.
If the device is read/write protected, "Read/Write password protected" is printed.
If the device is write-protected, "Write protected" is printed. If the device is not
protected, this line is blank.
For more information, see “File and Device Protection Commands” on page 3-93 and
“Password Protection” on page 6-7.
ID
Valid for PCL emulation macros, fonts, and symbol sets only. The ID must be used
when adding a description to a macro or a symbol set. If two files with the same file
type have duplicate IDs, the following occurs:
•
If multiple macros or symbol sets have been created with duplicate download
IDs, only the last macro or symbol set is listed. It is the only one that can be
selected. On flash memory, the number listed for bytes unavailable
includes the unlisted macros and symbol sets. The bytes unavailable field
is not applicable for the disk device.
•
PostScript emulation fonts, and files created by PostScript emulation file
operators, do not have IDs.
6-6
Memory
Type
File types that can be stored on flash memory or disk have unique extensions. The
following file types are recognized by the flash format used on earlier printer models;
the name of the file type printed in the directory appears in parenthesis.
.t1 (PostScript font)
.sFnt5 (PCL scalable font)
.bFnt5 (PCL bitmap font)
.Mac5 (PCL macro)
Except as noted below, file types listed above are recognized by the flash format used
in your printer. In addition, the flash format in your printer also recognizes the following
formats:
.data (user data) - any file written with PostScript operators
.type1 (PostScript font) - replaces the earlier .t1 extension
.demo (demo) - used for demonstration printouts or forms
.p5scalable (PCL scalable font)
.p5bitmap (PCL bitmapped font)
.p5macro (PCL macro) - replaces the earlier .Mac5 extension
.p5symset (PCL symbol set)
Usually the PostScript file operators can only read/write files with the extension .data.
Use the setfilenameextend operator to read/write other file types, including .demo.
Any other file type appears in the list as Unknown File Type. The description column
then contains the full filename with the file type (extension).
Size
The size listed for each resource includes the size of the file header.
Prot.
Indicates if the file is password protected.
R/W - read/write protection
W - write protection
If this field is blank, then this resource in flash memory or disk is not password
protected.
For more information on file protection, see “File and Device Protection Commands”
on page 3-93 and “Password Protection” on page 6-7.
6-7
Memory
Description
The description field for fonts comes from the font header. The description field for
macros or symbol sets is blank unless the description field in the file header is set by
the PJL LRESOURCE command. See “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
page 3-52.
The description for macros or symbol sets can be set only once for files stored in flash
memory. The description can be set any number of times for macros or symbol sets
stored on a disk. The limitation for flash files is due to flash technology. See the
“LDESCRIPTION” variable in “Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
page 3-53 for more information.
Password Protection
You can password protect either the entire flash memory or disk, or files stored on the
flash memory or disk.
There are two levels of password protection:
Read/Write
Ensures that the file or device is protected against reading and writing unless the
password has been appropriately specified (applies only to actual file data).
Write
Ensures that data cannot be changed on a file or device unless the password
has been appropriately specified. A Read/Write password takes precedence
over a Write password.
Each file or device can have a separate password. Write passwords ensure that files
cannot be deleted, renamed, or updated and a device cannot be formatted or
specified as a download target. Read/Write password protection provides the same
protection as Write, but additionally ensures that data cannot be read from the file or
device.
6-8
Memory
By using passwords, administrators can ensure data integrity and proper
authorization. If flash memory is write password protected, for example, users cannot
delete existing files, format the device, or download new files to the device (without first
specifying the password). A specific example might be a macro file of an authorizing
signature that is stored on flash memory with a Read/Write password. This password
ensures that only those authorized can use the signature. All other files (fonts,
letterhead, macros) can be unprotected for general use.
Passwords are set, declared, retracted, and deleted using the PJL commands or the
MarkVision Professional utility. See “Protecting a File or Device” on page 3-93.
Rewriting the Flash Content
Be aware that once a bit on the flash memory is turned from 1 (binary 1) to 0 (binary
0), it cannot be changed back to binary 1 without a complete flash memory format. As
PostScript emulation file operators write data to flash memory, the printer microcode
software verifies that none of the bits being set to binary 1 is binary 0. If any attempt
is made to change a 0 bit back to 1, a PostScript emulation ioerror occurs.
When a device is formatted, all locations are set to binary 1. This is also the reason
descriptions and passwords can be set only once for files on flash memory.
6-9
Memory
Accessing Files with PostScript Emulation
File Naming Conventions
For any PostScript emulation operator that requires a filename parameter, the
filename can be one of the following:
%device%filename
Specifically references a file on a particular device. If the filename does not exist
on %device%, no other %device% is accessed for a duplicate filename.
filename
Does not specifically reference a device. The following action occurs:
•
For the PostScript emulation operator deletefile, only the first device in the
search order is checked for filename.
•
For all other PostScript emulation operators, and all other combinations of
search order and available devices, each installed %device% is checked in
the search order for the existence of filename. The operator acts upon the first
filename that it finds.
Device Names
The term device refers to flash memory, disk, or ROM. For PostScript emulation, some
of the operators require or return device names. These operators are: deletefile,
filenameforall, devforall, devdismount, devmount, devformat, devstatus. The
device always begins and optionally ends with a % character. The following are the
valid device names:
%rom%
%flash%
%flash1%
%disk%
%disk1%
The same filename can exist on more than one device. The device prefix determines
the actual file to use. For example, %rom%myfile and %flash%myfile designate,
respectively, a file called myfile both on the ROM and on flash memory. The device
name distinguishes which file to use.
6-10
Memory
Device names are case sensitive. They must appear exactly as shown.
Each device (except the disk) has one synonym. For example, the flash memory can
be referred to as %flash% or %flash1%. The name with the 1 is a unique identifier.
This system allows for future expansion of multiple flash memory or disk devices. The
disk device name provides for multiple physical units and multiple logical units. Thus,
%disk1_0% indicates the first physical unit and the first (0) logical partition on the
device. Currently, one physical device (for ROM, flash memory, and disk) is supported.
The disk supports only the first (0) logical partition.
Filenames
Each file on a device has a unique name to identify the information contained within
the file. The name may be up to 127 characters in length. All character codes from
X'01' to X'FF' are valid (X'00' is not valid). Filenames are case sensitive: for example,
%flash%myfile and %flash%MYFILE indicate different files on the flash memory.
Filename Extensions
By default, all files referenced when using the PostScript emulation file operators are
given a .data extension. For example, if the following PostScript emulation command
occurs,
(%flash%myfile) (w) file
the file myfile.data is opened on flash memory. The .data extension is added to:
•
Enable the Print Directory feature to identify files as PostScript emulation data
files.
•
Ensure the integrity of files, such as resource collection files and
demonstration files.
However, it is sometimes necessary to access files by their real name through
PostScript emulation. For example, you may want to remove old versions of PCL
language resource collection fonts (without formatting the entire device).
To do this, use the PostScript emulation setfilenameextend operator. This operator
is in the statusdict dictionary.
6-11
Memory
The value of this operator adds the extension .data to all filenames referenced when
using PostScript emulation file operators. To prevent the .data extension from being
added, issue the following PostScript emulation command:
statusdict begin
false setfilenameextend
end
To add the .data extension automatically again, issue:
statusdict begin
true setfilenameextend
end
The following example shows how to remove a file for the font myfont from the disk.
The PostScript emulation resource collection filename is myfont.type1. The
PostScript emulation command to remove the file is:
statusdict begin
false setfilenameextend
(%disk%myfont.type1) deletefile
true setfilenameextend
end
For other file types, see page 6-6.
Note: We recommend that you enable setfilenameextend as soon as possible
after you disable it. For example, the following PostScript emulation
commands generate an undefinedfilename error:
(%disk%iconimage) (w) file dup
(0f0606060686c6ff) writestring closefile
statusdict begin
false setfilenameextend
end
(%disk%iconimage) (r) file
%%[ Error: undefinedfilename; OffendingCommand: file ]%%
This occurs because the filename actually written to disk is iconimage.data. When
setfilenameextend is enabled (the default), all PostScript emulation file operators
treat filename operands as filename.data; when disabled, they treat filename
operands literally.
If you receive unexpected undefinedfilename or similar errors, try toggling
setfilenameextend and sending your print job again.
6-12
Memory
Device Search Order
If you are using the PostScript emulation operators run, file, renamefile, status or
eexec, you do not need to specify the device. If you omit the device name, devices are
searched in the default order: disk and then flash memory. If the following PostScript
emulation code is encountered,
(myfile) (w) file
the file on disk is used (since disk occurs before flash memory in the default search
order), and files cannot be created in ROM.
The operator deletefile searches only the first device in the default search order if a
device is not specified.
Use the PostScript emulation operators devmount, devdismount to change the
order. The default search order is determined by the order the devices are mounted.
For example, if you want to place the disk device after the flash memory in the default
search order, use the following command sequence:
(%disk%) devdismount
(%disk%) devmount
To change the order so the devices are searched as disk, flash memory, and then
ROM, use the following PostScript emulation command sequence:
(%rom%) devdismount
(%flash%) devdismount
(%disk%) devdismount
(%disk%) devmount
(%flash%) devmount
(%rom%) devmount
If the device is already mounted, the following operators may change the search order:
•
•
•
initializedisk
devformat
<</InitializeAction>>setdevparams
Sending these operators has the following effect on the devices in the search order:
1
If mounted, (%device%) devdismount
2
Formats the device
3
If dismounted in step 1, (%device%) devmount
If you do not want a device searched, dismount it and leave it dismounted.
6-13
Memory
Note: Do not leave the ROM device unmounted. All internal fonts are contained on
the ROM device.
In the previous examples, the devmount, devdismount operators must be used
outside the server loop. We recommend that you place the requests in a stop context
so that if the devices do not exist, error recovery can take place.
Previous search orders are not retained. Once a change is made, it remains in effect.
Performance
Some performance degradation may occur during initial access to a resource on a
disk (as opposed to flash memory or RAM). However, the information is put in cache,
and further references to that resource occur at RAM speed.
Table 6-1: Device Performance Retrieval Speeds
Device
Retrieval Speed
Write
Disk
70KB/second
70KB/second
Flash Memory
1MB/second
200KB/second
Job Buffering
Job buffering to the disk lets you store incoming print jobs on a disk installed on your
printer. Although job buffering is designed for individual workstations and networks
using MarkVision Professional as the primary tool to control printer operations, you
can handle some job buffering functions from the printer operator panel. Refer to your
printer user documentation for more details.
Job buffering requires a minimum of 10 percent of disk storage space. For example, if
you have an 840MB hard disk installed, you must partition a minimum of 84MB of the
disk for job buffering. You must define the size of the job buffer area before you enable
buffering for any link ports.
6-14
Memory
For minimum acceptable job buffering performance, the hard disk should be able to
read and write files at a sustained rate of 600Kb/sec. The Lexmark hard disk option
supports this requirement.
Some advantages of job buffering include:
•
The printer accepts print jobs more quickly.
•
The printer accepts print jobs from all ports as long as the disk is not filled.
•
The printer continues to print even after the host computer, network
connection, or printer server goes down.
•
Buffered jobs print when power is restored after a printer power loss.
•
The printer manages print jobs from multiple sources.
Keep in mind that job buffering may also:
•
Slow system performance.
•
Restrict the amount of memory available on the disk for other uses.
•
Increase the time required for a printer reset or recovery after a power loss.
•
Reprint jobs after a power-on reset (POR).
Creating a Partition
Before job buffering is enabled for a port, you must allocate a portion of the disk for job
buffering functions. The minimum size for a job buffering partition is 10 percent of the
disk storage space. When a new partition is created, the entire disk is formatted and
all resources previously downloaded to the disk are lost.
Once a partition is defined, this disk space is reserved for job buffering.
Enabling Job Buffering
Once a partition is allocated, job buffering to a disk may be enabled for each active
link port. You can enable job buffering from the operator panel menus, if available, or
through MarkVision Professional. You cannot enable a port before the partition is
allocated. When buffering is enabled from the printer operator panel, a power-on reset
(POR) automatically occurs. If buffering is enabled through MarkVision Professional,
you must perform a full power-on reset before job buffering can occur.
6-15
Memory
Disabling Job Buffering
When you disable job buffering, it takes effect immediately on the port you disabled.
A POR is automatically performed when job buffering is disabled for any port from the
printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional, so the unused memory
resources can be reallocated. When buffering is disabled on a port, any jobs on the
disk are printed before normal processing of incoming jobs continues.
To delete or resize a job buffer partition, first delete or print all jobs. Then, disable job
buffering on all ports. Finally, delete or resize the job buffer partition.
Recovering from a Power Loss
If the printer loses power, the job being spooled to the disk may be lost. Jobs already
stored on the disk remain intact. When power is restored, you are asked if you want
to print the jobs held in the buffer. Refer to your printer user documentation for
information on how to cancel the jobs or print the jobs held in the buffer.
Jobs that were partially printed during the loss of power are printed again in their
entirety when power is restored.
7-1
Specifications
CHAPTER 7: Printer Specifications
This chapter lists printer specifications and information about hardware,
environmental conditions, and power requirements.
Airflow Requirement
Room should meet ASHRAE 62–1989 standards.
Noise Emission Levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported
in conformance with ISO 9296.
Table 7-1: Noise Emission Levels
1-Meter Average Sound Pressure,
dBA
Status
C510(n)
X422
E23x, E33x
Printing
53
51 print; 52
copy; 47
scan/send
fax
51,52
Duplex printing
55
51 print; 52
copy; 47
scan/send
fax
—
Standby (Idle without Power Saver)
41
30
30
Declared Sound Power Level, Bels
Status
C510(n)
X422
E23x, E33x
Printing
6.8
6.4 print;
6.5 copy;
5.9 scan
6.4
Duplex printing
7.0
6.4 print;
6.5 copy;
5.9 scan
—
Standby (Idle without Power Saver)
5.5
4.3
4.1
7-2
Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Table 7-2: Printer Electrical Specifications
Printer Model
Electrical Specification
C510(n) (100 volt model)
100 V at 50/60 Hz
C510(n) (low voltage model)
110–127 V at 50/60 Hz
C510(n) (high voltage model)
220–240 V at 50/60 Hz
X422 (low voltage model)
100–127 V at 50/60 Hz
X422 (high voltage model)
220–240 V at 50/60 Hz
E23x, E33x (low voltage model)
110–127 V at 50/60 Hz
E23x, E33x (high voltage model)
220–240 V at 50/60 Hz
Warning: Lexmark recommends that you do not use voltage converters with printers.
Power Requirements
The following tables list the nominal average power requirements (including fuser
power).
Table 7-3: Power Requirements
C5101
Printer Model
X422
State
100 V
120 V
230 V
120 V
Average
continuous
printing
550 W
mono
550 W
mono
550 W
mono
430 W 430 W 340 W 340 W 340 W
370 W
color
370 W
color
370 W
color
Average
continuous
copying
—
—
—
475 W 475 W —
—
—
Average
continuous
scanning
—
—
—
125 W 125 W —
—
—
Idle without
Power Saver
(Standby)
150 W 150 W 150 W 75 W
65 W
65 W
1 Power
2
230 V
E230
75 W
requirements for network models may differ.
This value is <19 W for units manufactured after 4/30/
2004.
100 V
65 W
120 V
230V
7-3
Specifications
Table 7-3: Power Requirements (Continued)
C5101
Printer Model
State
100 V
120 V
X422
230 V
120 V
230 V
2
2
Idle with Power
Saver
12 W
12 W
12 W
Rated short term
current
8.1 A
7.2 A
2.83 A 8.8 A
1
2
E230
22 W
100 V
120 V
230V
22 W
6W
6W
6W
4.1 A
8.6 A
7.7 A
3.4 A
Power requirements for network models may differ.
This value is <19 W for units manufactured after 4/30/
2004.
Printer Model
E33x
120 V
E232
State
100 V
230 V
100 V
120 V
230 V
Average
continuous
printing
420 W 420 W 420 W 370 W 370 W 370 W
Average
continuous
copying
—
—
—
—
—
—
Average
continuous
scanning
—
—
—
—
—
—
Idle without
Power Saver
(Standby)
80 W
80 W
80 W
65 W
65 W
65W
Idle with Power
Saver
7W
7W
7W
6W
6W
6W
Rated short term
current
8.6 A
7.7 A
3.4 A
8.6 A
7.7 A
3.4 A
7-4
Specifications
Physical Specifications
Table 7-4: Printer Physical Specifications
Printer Model
Dimension
C510, C510n
C510dtn
X422
Height
385 mm (15.2 in.)
590 mm (23.2 in.)
539.75 mm (21.25 in.)
Width
495 mm (19.5 in.)
495 mm (19.5 in.)
495.3 mm (19.5 in.)
Depth
420 mm (16.5 in.)
525 mm (20.7 in.)
412.75 mm (16.25 in.)
Weight
31.5 kg (69 lb)
42.4 kg (93 lb)
20.41 kg (45 lb)
Printer Model
Dimension
E23x, E33x
Height
249 mm (9.8 in.)
Width
396 mm (15.6 in.)
Depth
353 mm (13.9 in.)
Weight
9.98 kg (22 lb)
Clearance Requirements
Table 7-5: Clearance Requirement Specifications
Printer Model
E230, E232, 234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Side
C510(n)1
X422
Left side
203 mm (8 in.)
1
300mm (12 in.)
Right side
508 mm (20 in.)
76.2 mm (3 in.)
300mm (12 in.)
Front
711 mm (28 in.)
1
200mm (8 in.)
254 mm (10 in.)
1
50mm (2 in.)
254 mm (10 in.)
150mm (6 in.)
Rear
355 mm (14 in.) w duplex
Above
584 mm (23 in.)
635 mm (25 in.) w duplex
736 mm (29 in.) w extra
tray, whether duplex
attached or not
1 When
installing the MFP, leave enough room to access the paper
tray(s), the multipurpose feeder, the left side door, and the rear exit
door.
7-5
Specifications
Environmental Conditions
Note: When shipping or storing printers, always pack the printer supplies
(cartridges and photoconductors, for example) separately.
Table 7-6: Temperature Ranges
Printer Model
Operating Value
Shipping/Storage Value
C510(n)
10–32.5°C (50–90.5°F)
0–35°C (32–95°F)
X422
15.6–32.2°C (60–90°F)
-20–43°C (-4 to 110°F)
E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n
15.6–32.2°C (60–90°F)
-20–40°C (-4 to 104°F)
Table 7-7: Humidity Ranges
Printer Model
Operating Value
Shipping/Storage Value
C510(n)
15–80%
10–90%
X422
8–80%
8–95% packed;
8–80% unpacked
E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n 8–80%
8–95% packed;
8–80% unpacked
Altitude Specifications
Table 7-8: Printer Altitude Specifications
Printer Model
Altitude (Above Sea Level)
C510(n)
0–2,500 m (8,200 feet)
X422
0–2,500 m (8,200 feet)
E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n
0–2,500 m (8,200 feet)
Atmospheric Pressure
74.6–101.3 kPa (560–760 mmHg)
7-6
Specifications
Power On to Ready State Time Period
After you turn the printer on, it performs certain internal diagnostics and prepares for
printing. The following table lists the approximate time it takes for your printer to
perform the internal diagnostics and enter the Ready state. Once the printer enters the
Ready state, it is prepared to print.
Note: A network printer may successfully receive and queue jobs across the
network, before it is actually ready to print.
Table 7-9: Power On to Ready State Time Period
Printer Model
Time to Ready (Time in Seconds)1
C510(n)
<=45
X422
N/A
E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n
<=40
1Times
may be longer with more options attached.
Time to Print the First Page
The print wait time may vary as a result of page complexity, page size, paper weight,
paper texture, or temperature. Average times are as follows:
Table 7-10: Time to Print the First Page
Printer Model
Time to Print First Page (Time in Seconds)
C510(n)
simplex mono 13; simplex color 19; duplex mono 19;
duplex color 27
X422
9.8
E230
<=10
E232n
<=8.5
E33x
<=8
8-1
Interfaces
CHAPTER 8: Printer Interfaces
Interfaces connect your printer to other devices, such as a computer. The Lexmark
C510 has a standard parallel connector (also referred to as a Centronics-type
interface) and/or a USB connector. The Lexmark X422 has an internal print server and
a USB connector. Some printers also offer a parallel interface option. Refer to your
printer user documentation for more information. See page 8-7 for more information
about parallel interface.
If a serial connector is required, you may be able to install one of the following:
•
•
An RS-232C Serial Interface Card
•
An RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card
An External Serial Adapter, which provides an RS-232C or RS-422 serial
interface port
See page 8-25 for more information about serial interface.
Some printers have standard print servers, but you can also buy optional print servers
that connect the printer to Token-Ring or Ethernet networks. For detailed installation
or setup instructions, refer to your printer user documentation or the Drivers,
MarkVision and Utilities CD. See “Network Support” on page 8-42 for more
information about print servers.
Refer to your printer user documentation for information on which printer interface
options your printer supports and for detailed installation instructions.
Note: All print servers are capable of supporting AppleTalk.
8-2
Interfaces
Setting Up the Communications Port
You must establish communication between your printer and computer. To do this, you
define your communications port in the application you are using. Instructions for
several applications or operating systems are as follows.
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me
In your Windows 95/98/Me application:
1
On the Menu bar, click Start.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen displays.
4
Double-click the System icon. The System Properties screen displays.
5
Select the Device Manager tab.
6
Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports.
7
Select the communications port you want to configure.
8
Click the Properties button at the bottom of the screen.
The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For
example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1]
Properties screen displays.
9
10
Select the Port Settings tab.
Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your
printer settings:
•
•
•
•
•
Bits per second
Data bits
Parity
Stop bits
Flow Control
Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/
Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
8-3
11
Click OK.
12
Close all windows now that the port is set up.
Interfaces
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0
In your Windows NT 4.0 application:
1
On the Menu bar, click Start.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen displays.
4
Double-click the Ports icon. The Ports screen displays.
5
Select the communications port you want to configure.
6
Click the Settings button.
The Settings screen for this specific port displays. For example, if you select the
COM1 port, then the Settings for COM1 screen displays.
7
Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your
printer settings:
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop bits
Flow Control
Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/
Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
8
Click OK.
9
Close all screens now that the port is set up.
8-4
Interfaces
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000
In your Windows 2000 application:
1
On the Menu bar, click Start.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen displays.
4
Double-click the System icon. The System Properties screen displays.
5
Select the Hardware tab.
6
In the Device Manager area of the Hardware tab screen, click the Device
Manager button. The Device Manager screen displays.
7
Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports.
8
Select the communications port you want to configure and double-click.
The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For
example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1]
Properties screen displays.
9
10
Select the Port Settings tab.
Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your
printer settings:
•
•
•
•
•
Bits per second
Data bits
Parity
Stop bits
Flow Control
Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/
Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
11
Click OK.
12
Close all windows now that the port is set up.
8-5
Interfaces
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP
In your Windows XP application:
1
On the Menu bar, click Start.
2
Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen displays.
3
Switch the Control Panel to Classic View.
4
Select the Hardware tab.
5
In the Device Manager area of the Hardware tab screen, click the Device
Manager button. The Device Manager screen displays.
6
Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports.
7
Select the communications port you want to configure and double-click.
The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For
example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1]
Properties screen displays.
8
Select the Port Settings tab.
9
Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your
printer settings:
•
•
•
•
•
Bits per second
Data bits
Parity
Stop bits
Flow Control
Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/
Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
10
Click OK.
11
Close all windows now that the port is set up.
8-6
Interfaces
Deciding Which Interface to Use
On some printers, you can attach multiple interface cables to the printer at the same
time. The printer automatically switches to the interface receiving a job. Then it prints
the job and begins searching the interfaces for the next job.
One or more of the following is built into your printer: standard parallel connector, USB
connector, or network connector. To use a port, connect a cable from the printer to the
computer, then set the appropriate values from the printer operator panel or, for
network connected printers only, through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your
printer user documentation for more information.
Use a parallel interface when you:
•
Attach your printer to a personal computer.
•
Attach your printer to a host system with a Centronics-compatible parallel
port.
•
Attach your printer to a Lexmark external print server.
Use a USB interface when you:
•
Attach your printer to a personal computer, iMac, Sun Ray, or Sun Blade.
•
Need to connect the printer to a computer that does not have an available
parallel port.
Use a serial interface when you:
•
Require an interface cable more than 10 feet in length.
Note: Lexmark also offers a 20-ft parallel interface cable
(part number 1427498).
•
Need to connect the printer to a computer that does not have an available
parallel port.
Attach network cables to the Token-Ring or Ethernet print servers installed in your
printer. Refer to the MarkNet™ Quick Start book or your user documentation for
additional setup information.
8-7
Interfaces
Parallel Interface
Use the Lexmark 3.04 m (10 ft) parallel cable part number 1329605, Lexmark 6.1 m
(20 ft) parallel cable part number 1427498, or a cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant, to
connect your printer to a personal computer or to a host system with a Centronicscompatible parallel port. Use the Lexmark 1.83 m (6 ft) parallel cable, part number
11K4078, to connect your printer to a personal computer or to a host system with a
Centronics-compatible parallel port using an optional parallel connector, which is
available by installing an RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card. Refer to your
printer user documentation for the location of the printer parallel connector.
Note: To reset your printer with an INIT* signal, set Honor Init to On from the printer
operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer user
documentation for more information.
Your printer can communicate with a computer across the parallel interface in three
ways:
Computer to Printer
This is typically how a computer and printer communicate. When the printer is
receiving data from the computer, it can use either Standard or Fastbytes protocol.
The burst transfer rate in Fastbytes is faster than in Standard protocol. For best
throughput, use Fastbytes protocol.
Printer to Computer (Advanced Status)
Your printer can send data to the computer. This capability lets the printer send status
messages to the computer on the parallel interface.
Parallel Modes 1 and 2
These are printer features that enhance reliability of data transfer from the host
computer to the printer. See “Parallel Mode 1” on page 8-18 and “Parallel Mode 2” on
page 8-19 for more information.
8-8
Interfaces
Standard Parallel Connector
The standard IEEE 1284-B compliant parallel connector on the printer is a 36-pin
D-shell female receptacle, as shown.
1
18
36
19
Optional Parallel Connector
The optional IEEE 1284-C compliant parallel connector on the RS-232C
Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card or Parallel 1284-B Interface Card is a 36-pin
D-shell female receptacle, as shown.
1
18
36
19
Parallel Connector Pin Assignments
“Table 8-1: Parallel Connector Pin Assignments” on page 8-9 lists interface and signal
information for connector pin assignments for the standard IEEE 1284-B and optional
IEEE 1284-C compliant connectors. In this table, “Direction” refers to the direction of
signal flow from the printer’s point of view. “Return” denotes twisted pair return.
Notes:
•
Be sure to use a twisted pair cable for each signal in the interface wiring, and
always complete the connection on the return side.
8-9
•
Interfaces
To prevent line noise, the cables should be shielded and connected to the
chassis of both the computer and the printer. The parallel cable length should
not exceed 3.04 m (10 ft), unless a Lexmark 6.1 m (20 ft) parallel cable is
used.
Table 8-1: Parallel Connector Pin Assignments
1
IEEE 1284-C Connector
IEEE 1284-B Connector
Pin
15
Signal
Direction Description
STROBE*
In
The computer generates this signal to allow the printer to read in data.
The signal level is normally high: data is sampled at the falling edge of
this pulse.
In/Out
These signals represent data bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each signal is at a
high level when data is logical 1, and low when data is logical 0. Pin 2 is
the least significant bit.
Inverted logic: signal
is active when low
2–9
6–13
DATA0 through
DATA7
Note: Data is driven out only when the printer is in IEEE 1284 Byte or
ECP modes.
10
3
ACKNLG*
Out
This negative pulse indicates the printer can again accept data.
Out
A high signal indicates the printer cannot receive data. The signal is
high:
Inverted logic: signal
is active when low
11
1
BUSY
•
•
•
•
•
During initialization
During data sampling
When the buffer is full
In the not ready state
During a printer error
A low signal indicates the printer is not busy and the computer can again
send data.
12
5
PE
Out
Paper Exception signal indicates no paper is loaded, a paper jam exists,
or a paper feed error occurred.
13
2
SLCT
Out
Select signal indicates the printer is selected and is online. This signal is
normally active. It becomes inactive when the printer is offline.
14
17
AUTO FEED XT*
In
Host Busy when Advanced Status is On.
Inverted logic: signal
is active when low.
15-17
N/A
LOGIC GROUND
N/A means non-applicable.
Logic Ground
8-10
Interfaces
Table 8-1: Parallel Connector Pin Assignments (Continued)
IEEE 1284-C Connector
IEEE 1284-B Connector
Pin
Signal
18
N/A
VCC
N/A
18
HOST LOGIC HIGH
19–30
31
Direction Description
300 mA of 5 V +/ - 5%
In
Driven by the host.
19–35 GND
Return
These pins are grounded signals used as twisted pairs with the data and
control signals. GND is often called a logic ground, and a fusible link
isolates it from chassis ground to offset any large ground shifts when the
printer and computer are on different circuits.
14
In
The rising edge of a negative pulse on this line causes the printer to
initialize. The printer synchronizes this function with the received data.
On the falling edge of INIT*, the printer drives the BUSY interface signal
active. On the rising edge of INIT*, the printer:
INIT*
signal is active when
low
•
•
•
•
Prints all received data
Displays RESET
Initializes
Deactivates the BUSY signal
To disable INIT* processing, set Honor Init to Off from the printer
operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer
user documentation for more information.
32
4
ERROR*
Out
Inverted logic: signal
is active when low
This signal indicates a printer error condition. The signal level becomes
low when the printer is:
•
•
•
•
In paper exception status
Not ready because of an operator panel command to stop
Not ready because of a software command to stop
Not ready because of a software command for manual feed
This signal is activated approximately 5 seconds after one of the above
conditions sets BUSY.
33–35
N/A
LOGIC GROUND
36
16
SLCTIN*
Not used.
In
Set low by host computer to select printer.
Out
Driven by the printer.
signal is active when
low
N/A
36
PERIPHERAL
LOGIC HIGH
N/A means non-applicable.
8-11
Interfaces
Using the INIT* Signal to Initialize
When the printer is using the parallel interface and it receives an INIT* signal, it
initializes as follows (unless INIT* is disabled by a variable default setting):
•
•
•
•
It prints data received before INIT*, and then initializes.
•
•
•
The link buffer remains intact.
•
•
INIT* is not honored when Hex Print is active.
It returns variable defaults to the values stored in the user default settings.
It returns fixed default settings to the factory values.
It retains permanent downloaded fonts and macros, but deletes temporary
downloaded fonts and macros.
Variable default paper size settings become the active paper formatting size.
If paper is loaded in a tray with auto size sensing, the printer resets the active
default paper formatting size to the size of the paper in the tray.
INIT* causes the parallel interface to go busy. The printer processes INIT*
when the parallel interface becomes active and all preceding characters have
been processed.
Computer-to-Printer Communications
This section describes how the parallel interface receives data from the computer.
Standard Parallel Connector
The cabling in the following illustration supports Standard and Fastbytes protocols and
IEEE 1284 Nibble, Byte, and ECP protocols.
18
36
14
Printer
Side
Computer
Side
IEEE 1284-B
IEEE 1284-A
36-Pin
D-Shell
Connector
(Male)
1
1
19
25-Pin
D-Shell
Connector
(Male)
25
13
8-12
Interfaces
The following illustration shows the pin assignments for connecting the 25-pin
connector to the 36-pin connector. The symbol * indicates an active low signal.
Printer
Side
Computer
Side
36-Pin
Connector
1284-B
25-Pin
Connector
Note: Lexmark IEEE 1284 compliant cables
are supported up to 20 feet. Cable lengths
greater than 20 feet are not supported. The
cable drawing to the left is a functional
representation of the Lexmark cables; it does
not reflect correct pairing of leads or unused
pairs.
The parallel interface consists of an 8-bit parallel data bus with the following
characteristics:
•
Uses 17 of the 36 positions on the printer connector, as follows:
– The host system controls 12 lines, which it uses to send data and commands to the printer.
– The printer controls five lines. The printer uses two lines to notify the computer when data is transferred successfully and three lines to report printer
status.
•
Controls synchronization with an externally supplied STROBE* pulse.
8-13
Interfaces
•
Controls data flow control with BUSY and ACKNLG* signals. Does not carry
out data transfer by ignoring the BUSY or ACKNLG* signal. (The system can
carry out data transfer to the printer only when the level of the BUSY signal is
low and after confirming the ACKNLG* signal is high.)
•
Uses standard transistor-transistor logic (TTL) levels for all interface control
signals and input data. Interface conditions are based on TTL levels. All
printer outputs are totem-pole TTL devices. All printer input/output (I/O) are
devices with an internal pull-up resistor to 5 V. Rise and fall times of each
signal must be less than 1,500 nanoseconds (ns) without slope reversal.
Optional Parallel Connector (1284-C) on RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C
Interface Card
The cabling in the following illustration supports Standard and Fastbytes protocols and
IEEE 1284 Nibble, Byte, and ECP protocols.
14
36
18
Printer
Side
1
Computer
Side
IEEE 1284-C
IEEE 1284-A
36-Pin
D-Shell
Connector
(Male)
1
19
25-Pin
D-Shell
Connector
(Male)
25
13
Note: For best results, use the Lexmark 1.83 m (6 ft) parallel cable, part number
11K4078.
8-14
Interfaces
The following illustration shows the pin assignments for connecting the 25-pin
connector to the 36-pin connector. The symbol * indicates an active low signal.
Printer
Side
Computer
Side
36-Pin
Connector
1284-C
25-Pin
Connector
Note: Lexmark IEEE 1284 compliant cables
are supported up to 20 feet. Cable lengths
greater than 20 feet are not supported. The
cable drawing to the left is a functional
representation of the Lexmark cables; it does
not reflect correct pairing of leads or unused
pairs.
The parallel interface consists of an 8-bit parallel data bus with the following
characteristics:
•
Uses 17 of the 36 positions on the printer connector, as follows:
– The host system controls 12 lines, which it uses to send data and commands to the printer.
– The printer controls five lines. The printer uses two lines to notify the computer when data is transferred successfully and three lines to report printer
status.
•
Controls synchronization with an externally supplied STROBE* pulse.
8-15
Interfaces
•
Controls data flow control with BUSY and ACKNLG* signals. Does not carry
out data transfer by ignoring the BUSY or ACKNLG* signal. (The system can
carry out data transfer to the printer only when the level of the BUSY signal is
low and after confirming the ACKNLG* signal is high.)
•
Uses standard transistor-transistor logic (TTL) levels for all interface control
signals and input data. Interface conditions are based on TTL levels. All
printer outputs are totem-pole TTL devices. All printer input/output (I/O) are
devices with an internal pull-up resistor to 5 V. Rise and fall times of each
signal must be less than 1,500 nanoseconds (ns) without slope reversal.
Standard Protocol Data Transfer Sequence
The following illustration shows the typical data transfer sequence on the parallel
interface. See Table 8-2 for typical parallel interface timings on the parallel interface.
DATA1-8
A
B
C
STROBE*
D
G
F
BUSY
E
ACK*
8-16
Interfaces
Table 8-2 shows all protocol timings in nanoseconds.
Table 8-2: Typical Parallel Interface Timings
Time
Name
Minimum/Maximum
A
Data setup to STROBE* low
500 min.
B
STROBE* width
500 min.
C
Data hold after STROBE*
500 min.
D
STROBE* low to BUSY high
500 max.
E
ACKNLG* low until ACKNLG* high
500 min.
F
ACKNLG* high to BUSY low1
—
G
BUSY low and ACKNLG* high to STROBE* low
500 min.
1 Relationship
of ACKNLG* and BUSY is not consistent
Fastbytes Protocol Data Transfer Sequence
Your printer is equipped with Fastbytes protocol, which is an enhanced parallel
interface protocol. Fastbytes protocol may give you a faster data transfer time on some
personal computers and operating systems. Fastbytes protocol is the printer default.
If you have data transmission problems between your personal computer and the
printer, change the parallel protocol to Standard. This causes the printer to operate in
IEEE-compliant compatibility mode.
The following illustration shows the typical timing sequence.
DATA 1-8
STROBE*
ACK*
BUSY
8-17
Interfaces
Table 8-3 shows all protocol timings in nanoseconds
Table 8-3: Fastbytes Timing Sequence
Time
Name
Minimum/Maximum
T1
Data setup to STROBE* low
400 min.
T2
STROBE* low to ACKNLG* low
0
T3
ACKNLG* low to STROBE* high
0
T4
STROBE* high to ACKNLG* high
0
T5
ACKNLG* high and BUSY low to STROBE* low
0
T6
ACKNLG* low to change data
50 min.
T7
STROBE* Timeout
500 min.
Max based on Auto Strobe Timer
T8
ACKNLG* width
400 min.
Equal to Data Setup Time
T9
ACKNLG* to BUSY Skew
+/ - 20 max.
T10
STROBE* high time
400 min.
Equal to Data Setup Time
Printer-to-Computer Communication (Advanced Status)
The printer has a standard IEEE 1284-B compliant connector and is an IEEE 1284-I
compliant device. The optional RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card has an
IEEE 1284-C compliant connector and is an IEEE 1284-I compliant device.
Your printer could be considered an IEEE 1284-II compliant device if the “C” to “B”
style connector converter were used. The printer exceeds the maximum allowable
circuit capacitance for Level II interfaces. Compliance with IEEE 1284-II may slow data
flow control time slightly; however, all minimum and maximum criteria set forth in IEEE
1284 documentation will be met.
The printer supports:
•
•
•
•
Compatibility mode
Nibble mode
Byte mode
ECP mode
8-18
Interfaces
The printer also supports a Device ID function. When queried for its ID, the printer
returns the following information:
•
•
•
Manufacturer
Command set
Model of printer
The LEXPARAL.EXE file is available from ftp.lexmark.com as /pub/driver/
technical_brief/LEXPARAL.EXE. Use your web browser to access ftp://
ftp.lexmark.com/pub/driver/technical_brief/LEXPARAL.EXE.
When the Advanced Status menu item is set to On, the printer supports IEEE 1284
communication. If the attached host computer does not support IEEE 1284
communication, you can turn Advanced Status to Off from the printer operator panel or
through MarkVision Professional, and SLCTIN* and AUTO FD XT* will be ignored.
Note: Excessive device queries and status checks (Nibble and Byte modes) will
slow printer performance.
You can get IEEE 1284 documentation by calling 1-800-678-IEEE (order number
DS02709).
Parallel Mode 1
Parallel Mode 1 is a feature available for many Lexmark printers. The factory default
setting is On or Off depending on your printer model. Refer to your printer user
documentation for the factory default for your printer.
If the host side of the parallel interface is using open collector drivers to transmit data
to the printer, Parallel Mode 1 should be set to Off to increase reliability of data transfer.
Turning this mode Off equalizes all parallel interface signal impedances. On some
printer models, you can set Parallel Mode 1 to Off from the printer operator panel,
through MarkVision Professional, or through a PJL command. Refer to your printer
user documentation for more information.
8-19
Interfaces
Parallel Mode 2
Parallel Mode 2 is a feature available for many Lexmark printers. The factory default
setting is On.
The timing required by the printer is clearly indicated in “Standard Protocol Data
Transfer Sequence” on page 8-15. This is the classic Centronics interface timing.
By setting Parallel Mode 2 to Off from the printer operator panel, through MarkVision
Professional, or through a PJL command, the printer changes when data is valid.
Once Parallel Mode 2 is set to Off, the printer takes data from the host computer at the
trailing edge of STROBE. This is the last possible host driven transition where data
should be valid.
Note: You may find this feature helpful when having data transfer reliability
problems.
Signal Descriptions
STROBE Receiver for the Lexmark C510
The following diagram illustrates the STROBE receiver for the Lexmark C510.
+5V, 5%
2.2K ohm ±10%
33 ohm ±10%
Connector
Pin
620 pF ±10%
GND
FCT 2827
or
FCT 2828
8-20
Interfaces
STROBE Receiver for the Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n, and E234(n)
The following diagram illustrates the STROBE receiver for the Lexmark E230, E232,
E330, E332n, and E234(n).
+5V, 5%
1.1K ohm ±10%
33 ohm ±10%
FCT 2827
or
FCT 2828
Connector
Pin
690 pF ±10%
GND
AUTOFD* Receiver for the Lexmark C510
The following diagram illustrates the AUTOFD* receiver for the Lexmark C510.
+5V, 5%
2.2K ohm ±10%
Connector
Pin
FCT 2827
or
39 ohm ±5%
FCT 2828
620 pF ±10%
GND
8-21
Interfaces
AUTOFD* Receiver for the Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n, and E234(n)
The following diagram illustrates the AUTOFD* receiver for the Lexmark E230, E232,
E330, E332n, and E234(n).
+5V, 5%
1.1K ohm ±10%
Connector
Pin
FCT 2827
or
56 ohm ±5%
FCT 2828
690 pF ±10%
GND
DATA 1-8 Signal Driver/Receivers for the Lexmark C510
The following diagram illustrates each of the DATA 1-8 signal driver/receivers for the
Lexmark C510.
+5V, 5%
2.2K ohm ±10%
Connector
Pin
33 ohm ±5%
FCT 2245
150 pF ±20%
GND
8-22
Interfaces
DATA 1-8 Signal Driver/Receivers for the Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n,
and E234(n)
The following diagram illustrates each of the DATA 1-8 signal driver/receivers for the
Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n, and E234(n).
+5V, 5%
2.2K ohm ±10%
33 ohm ±5%
Connector
Pin
FCT 2245
220 pF ±20%
GND
ACKNLG*, ERROR*, SLCT, PE Drivers for the Lexmark C510
The following diagram illustrates the ACKNLG*, ERROR*, SLCT, PE drivers for the
Lexmark C510.
+5V
2.2K ohm ±10%
FCT 2827
or
FCT 2828
39 ohm ±5%
150 pF ±20%
GND
Connector
Pin
8-23
Interfaces
ACKNLG*, ERROR*, SLCT, PE Drivers for the Lexmark E230, E232, E330,
E332n, and E234(n)
The following diagram illustrates the ACKNLG*, ERROR*, SLCT, PE drivers for the
Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n, and E234(n).
+5V
2.2K ohm ±10%
FCT 2827
or
FCT 2828
56 ohm ±5%
220 pF ±20%
Connector
Pin
GND
BUSY Driver and INIT* Receiver for the Lexmark C510
The following diagram illustrates the BUSY driver and the INIT* receiver for the
Lexmark C510.
+5V
2.2K ohm ±10%
INIT*
39 ohm ±5%
(input)
1650 pF ±20%
FCT 2827
or
FCT 2828
GND
+5V
50K ohm ±5%
BUSY
2.2K ohm ±10%
(output)
150 pF ±20%
39 ohm ±5%
GND
FCT 2827
or
FCT 2828
8-24
Interfaces
BUSY Driver and INIT* Receiver for the Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n,
and E234(n)
The following diagram illustrates the BUSY driver and the INIT* receiver for the
Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n, and E234(n).
+5V
1.1K ohm ±10%
INIT*
FCT 2827
or
FCT 2828
56 ohm ±5%
(input)
1722 pF ±20%
GND
+5V
50K ohm ±5%
2.2K ohm ±10%
BUSY
(output)
220 pF ±20%
FCT 2827
or
56 ohm ±5%
FCT 2828
GND
SLCTIN* Receiver for the Lexmark C510
The following diagram illustrates the SLCTIN* receiver for the Lexmark C510.
+5V, 5%
1.5K ohm ±10%
Connector
Pin
FCT 2827 or
FCT 2828
39 ohm ±10%
GND
1650 pF ±20%
8-25
Interfaces
SLCTIN* Receiver for the Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n, and E234(n)
The following diagram illustrates the SLCTIN* receiver for the Lexmark E230, E232,
E330, E332n, and E234(n).
+5V, 5%
1.1K ohm ±10%
Connector
Pin
FCT 2827 or
FCT 2828
56 ohm ±10%
GND
1720 pF ±20%
Serial Interface
The serial interface allows data to flow back and forth between the computer and the
printer. However, the serial interface transfers data at a slower rate than the parallel
interface.
If a serial connector is required, you may be able to install an RS-232C Serial Interface
Card, an External Serial Adapter, or an RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface
Card. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information.
The External Serial Adapter supports two serial interface standards: RS-232C and
RS-422. The RS-422 serial interface provides more protection from electrical noise
than RS-232.
Use RS-232C serial interface if the printer is more than 3.04 m (10 ft) from the
computer but less than 15.24 m (50 ft) away. (You can also use a 6.1 m (20 ft)
Lexmark cable to connect a printer and a computer located up to 20 feet apart.)
Use RS-422 if your computer is more than 15.24 m (50 ft) away from the printer. You
may need to purchase an RS-422 adapter and software for your computer to run
RS-422. Refer to your computer documentation for more information. You also need
to purchase a custom cable for the serial interface, because serial RS-422 interface
pinouts are usually unique to each computer.
8-26
Interfaces
When using the serial interface, your printer has the following differences from the
serial interface on some other printers:
•
•
The printer returns XON/XOFF with 2 stop bits in all cases.
The printer does not support DTR inversion.
Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
This section describes how to use the RS-232C serial interface. If you are using
RS-422, see “Using the RS-422 Serial Interface” on page 8-36.
How to Connect the RS-232C Serial Interface
Use Lexmark serial cable P/N 1038693 (15.24 m or 50 ft) to connect the serial
interface.
RS-232C Serial Cable Pin Assignments
The RS-232C serial cable appears as follows:
13
1
25
25-Pin
D-Shell
(Male)
25-Pin
D-Shell
(Female)
Printer
Side
Computer
Side
14
13
1
25
14
Table 8-4: Dedicated Serial Connector Pin Assignments (RS-232C)
Pin
Signal
Direction
Description
1
GND
2
TXD
Out
Transmit Data. The pin transmits data to your computer or
terminal.
3
RXD
In
Receive Data. The pin receives data from your computer or
terminal.
Frame Ground
8-27
Interfaces
Table 8-4: Dedicated Serial Connector Pin Assignments (RS-232C) (Continued)
Pin
Signal
Direction
Description
4
RTS
Out
Request to Send. The printer sets this signal high and the
signal remains high while the printer is on.
5
CTS
In
Clear to Send. This pin is optionally used for serial data flow
control protocol when in serial mode.
6
DSR
In
Data Set Ready. This pin is optionally used for data
validation, depending on the Honor DSR setting, or flow
control, depending on the Serial Protocol setting.
7
GND
20
DTR
Logic Ground
Out
Data Terminal Ready. This pin is optionally used for serial
data flow control protocol when in serial mode.
8-28
Interfaces
Using an IBM-Compatible Personal Computer with Serial Interface RS-232C
Note: These instructions are for connecting the printer to an IBM-compatible
personal computer using a dual asynchronous adapter or an external print
server.
If you are using any of the above products, or if your computer has a 9-pin D shell
connector that conforms to the IBM designed 9-pin serial port, use a 9-pin to 25-pin
cable, such as IBM Part Number 6450242 (254 mm or 10 in.).
Null modem cables, such as Lexmark part number 1038693 [15.24 m (50 ft)], will
connect the converter cable to the printer. The illustration below represents the 25-pin
connectors for the RS-232C cable (1038693).
13
1
25
14
The following illustration shows the pin assignments for the 9-pin to 25-pin IBM EIA
RS-232C serial cables.
9 to 25 Pin Cable Adapter,
such as IBM 6450242 (10 in.)
Lexmark 1038693 (50 ft)
Shield
9 (F)
Shield
25 (M)
25 (F)
25 (M)
8-29
Interfaces
Serial Communication Parameters (RS-232C)
The following paragraphs show acceptable values for serial communication
parameters.
Voltage Level Range
The maximum voltage level for control lines or data lines is +/- 25 positive V dc and
+/- 25 negative V dc. A timing or control line is active if the voltage is more than +3 V,
or inactive if the voltage is less than –3 V. The voltage reference point is the signal
ground on pin 7.
A data signal greater than +3 V means that the bit is a logical 0. A signal less than
–3 V means that the bit is logical 1.
For additional information, refer to Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and
Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange,
published by the Electronic Industries Association, publications EIA RS-232C and
EIA\TIA-232-E.
Serial Data Frame Considerations (RS-232C)
The computer sends serial data in data frames (also known as packets). You can
create 10-bit, 11-bit, and 12-bit data frames and set the serial data transfer parameter
so that each data frame contains 7 or 8 data bits. However, your printer is an 8-bit
printer; characters, controls, and all points addressable (APA) graphics need 8 bits of
data. If you select 7-bit data transfer, some unexpected characters might print.
Data Transmission
The list of acceptable data transfer rates (in bits per second) can be accessed from
the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer
user documentation for more information.
Data Bits
The printer sends or receives 7 or 8 data bits in each transmission frame, depending
on which one is selected.
8-30
Interfaces
Start and Stop Bits
The printer receives data with 1 start bit and either 1 or 2 stop bits. The printer always
sends 1 start and 2 stop bits.
Parity
There are four possible parity settings: Odd, Even, None, and Ignore.
Odd
The port expects to receive data frames with an odd number of logical
1’s per byte. The printer transmits XOFF and XON with odd parity. If the
printer detects a parity error, the port sends X'5F' to the printer instead
of the character sent by the host system.
Even
The port expects to receive data frames with an even number of logical
1’s per byte. The port transmits XOFF and XON with even parity. If the
port detects a parity error, the port sends an inverted question mark to
the printer instead of the character sent by the host system.
None
The port expects no parity bit when it receives data. The port transmits
XON and XOFF without parity bits.
Ignore
The port expects a parity bit when the port receives a data frame. The
port ignores the parity bit. The port uses even parity when it transmits
XON and XOFF.
Some printers post a 54 Standard Serial Error or a 54 Serial Option x Error (x represents
the number of the serial port) the first time they detect a transmission error (parity,
overrun, or framing). The 54 Standard Serial Error or the 54 Serial Option x Error can be
reset from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your
printer user documentation for more information.
If repeated serial errors occur, power the printer off and then back on to restore proper
serial operation.
8-31
Interfaces
Data Flow Control
Data flow control is accomplished through the following lines:
•
•
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Five data flow control protocols are available:
•
•
•
•
•
DTR pacing
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR
Your printer supports two modes in which both hardware and software data flow
control protocols are performed. In XON/XOFF/DTR mode, the printer uses both
XON/XOFF and DTR pacing. When XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR mode is active, the printer
uses both XON/XOFF and DTR/DSR pacing.
Robust XON may be selected when the data flow control protocol for the serial port is
set to XON/XOFF, XON/XOFF/DTR, or XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR pacing. The printer
sends a continuous stream of XON signals to the host computer to indicate that the
serial port is ready to receive additional data. The signals continue as long as one of
the following conditions exist:
•
•
•
No data has been received across the serial port in the last second.
The last XON was accepted by the host computer.
The printer is ready to receive data.
Refer to your printer user documentation for more information about selecting the
protocol from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional.
8-32
Interfaces
Protocol (RS-232C)
Table 8-5 shows the state or function of each serial interface signal in the three data
flow control protocols when the Honor DSR setting is On.
Table 8-5: Serial Link (All Protocols) with Honor DSR On
Printer
XON/XOFF Protocol
(Honor DSR On)
DTR Protocol
(Honor DSR On)
DTR/DSR Protocol
(Honor DSR On)
DTR
Always active
Flow control to computer
Flow control to
computer
DSR
Data validity
Data validity
Flow control (transmit
mode) to computer
(receive mode)
CTS
Ignored
Flow control from computer
Ignored
Table 8-6 shows the state of each serial interface signal in the three data flow control
protocols when the Honor DSR setting is Off.
Table 8-6: Serial Link (All Protocols) with Honor DSR Off
Printer Signal
XON/XOFF Protocol
(Honor DSR Off)
DTR Protocol
(Honor DSR Off)
DTR/DSR Protocol
(Honor DSR Off)
DTR (Output)
Always active
Flow control to
computer
Flow control to computer
DSR (Input)
Ignored
Ignored1
Flow control to computer
CTS (Input)
Ignored
Flow control from
computer1
Ignored
1
These values are compatible with Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
8-33
Interfaces
DTR and DTR/DSR Protocol Timing (RS-232C)
Use DTR to pace the data flow from the computer. DTR goes from high to low to
indicate to the computer that the printer cannot receive more data when it detects the
following BUSY conditions:
•
•
•
Buffer full
Attendance error
Printer not in ready state
The following diagram illustrates DTR Protocol Timing.
1
2
Receive Data Valid
3
4
Legend:
1
The RTS signal is driven active as long as power is supplied to the printer.
2
The DTR signal becomes active when initialization is complete, telling the computer that
the printer is ready to receive data.
3
When Honor DSR is On, the printer considers data received invalid when DSR is low
and discards the data. Only DTR/DSR is used for flow control from the printer to the host
computer.
4
DTR drops to tell the computer that the receive buffer is nearly full or that the printer is
busy and that data transmission should stop. About 640 free bytes remain in the buffer at
this time. If the computer continues to send data after the printer has sent a low DTR
signal, data could be lost.
8-34
Interfaces
XON/XOFF Protocol Timing (RS-232C)
When you select this data flow control protocol, the printer sends an XOFF signal
when it detects the following BUSY conditions:
•
•
•
Buffer full
Attendance error
Printer not in ready state
The following diagram illustrates XON/XOFF Protocol Timing.
1
RTS
DTR
2
DSR
Receive Data Valid
XON
XOFF
3
XON
XMT
5
4
6
RXD
Legend:
1
The RTS signal is driven active as long as power is supplied to the printer.
2
The DTR signal becomes active at the completion of initialization.
3
The printer considers data received invalid when DSR is low and discards the data. (This
is conditional depending on the setting of Honor DSR.)
4
After you power on the printer and DTR is active, the printer sends an XON signal to the
computer (DC1 control or X'11'). However, the computer does not need to detect this
initial XON before sending data to the printer, because the printer can be powered on
before the computer or terminal.
5
The printer sends an XOFF signal (DC3 control or X'13') to request that data
transmission end until the buffer clears. About 640 free bytes remain in the buffer at this
time. If the computer continues to send data after the printer sent an XOFF signal, data
could be lost.
6
The printer sends an XON signal to the computer when the buffer space is again
available. The serial interface is ready to receive more data.
8-35
Interfaces
Serial Errors
The printer places an underscore character in the link buffer when it detects an error.
Some printers also display serial errors on the printer operator panel or through
MarkVision Professional as attendance messages, such as a 54 Standard Serial Error
or 54 Serial Option x Error (x represents the number of the serial port). Serial errors that
do not generate such an error message are:
•
•
•
Serial Break
Framing error received simultaneously as a Break
Powering on an IBM-compatible personal computer connected to the printer
Serial Computer Configuration Recommendations (RS-232C)
For correct operation of the serial interface, your printer and your computer operating
system must be configured identically. The following is an example of how to configure
DOS for the printer using serial DTR protocol:
DOS:
From the DOS prompt, enter the following commands:
mode comy:9600,n,8,1,p
mode lptx :=comy
where x equals 1, 2, or 3, and y equals 1 or 2
Include these two command statements in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file on the computer
so they run each time your system starts operating.
Once this is set, to copy to the communications port again use the copy command:
copy 'filename' lptx
8-36
Interfaces
Windows 95/98/Me/2000, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows XP:
For correct operation of the RS-232C serial interface, while setting up your
communications port, make sure you selected Hardware in the Flow Control field.
Selecting Hardware sets the communication to DTR protocol. See the following
sections for more information:
•
•
•
•
“Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me” on page 8-2
“Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0” on page 8-3
“Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000” on page 8-4
“Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP” on page 8-5
RS-232C Port Compatibility
The RS-232C port (on the RS-232C Serial Interface Card or the RS-232C
Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card) is compatible with the Plug and Play External
COM Device Draft Specification, Rev. 0.86.
Devices that are compatible with Plug and Play COM can:
•
•
•
•
Detect attachment of serial devices.
Identify the device.
Locate a driver for the device.
Detect detachment of serial devices.
Using the RS-422 Serial Interface
This section describes how to use the RS-422 serial interface. If you are using
RS-232, see “Using the RS-232C Serial Interface” on page 8-26.
How to Connect the RS-422 Serial Interface
You need to purchase a custom cable for RS-422 support. You may also need to
purchase an adapter card and software to run RS-422 on your computer. Contact the
place where you bought your printer.
8-37
Interfaces
Serial Cable Pin Assignments (RS-422)
The RS-422 serial cable appears as follows:
25
13
1
14
25-Pin
(Male)
Printer
Side
Pin assignments for this 25-pin connector are shown in Table 8-7. You can set the
polarity of these signals from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision
Professional.
Table 8-7: Dedicated Serial Connector Pin Assignments (RS-422)
Pin
Signal
Direction
Description
1
GND
15
RXD*
In
Receive Data
17
RXD
In
Receive Data
19
TXD*
Out
Send (transmit) Data
25
TXD
Out
Send (transmit) Data
Logic Ground
The following illustration shows how the pins are used:
Printer
Side
Computer
Side
25-Pin
Connector
Customized
Connector
(Optional)
* Positive Signal
8-38
Interfaces
Serial Communication Parameters (RS-422)
The following paragraphs show acceptable values for serial communication
parameters.
Voltage Level
RS-422 serial interface uses a differential pair, 5-volt typical delta, 0.5 volt threshold.
Your printer uses a TI75179 transceiver with transorbs. The polarity of the signals is
programmable.
Serial Data Frame Considerations
The computer sends serial data in data frames (also known as packets). You can
create 10-bit, 11-bit, or 12-bit data frames and set the serial data transfer parameter
so that each data frame contains 7 or 8 data bits. However, your printer is an 8-bit
printer; characters, controls, and APA graphics need 8 bits of data. If you select 7-bit
data transfer, some unexpected characters might print.
Data Transmission
The list of acceptable data transfer rates (in bits per second) can be accessed from
your printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer
user documentation for more information.
Data Bits
Your printer sends or receives 7 or 8 data bits in each transmission frame, depending
on which one is selected.
Start and Stop Bits
Your printer receives data with 1 start bit and either 1 or 2 stop bits. The printer always
sends 1 start and 2 stop bits.
8-39
Interfaces
Parity
There are four possible parity settings: Odd, Even, None, and Ignore.
Odd
The port expects to receive data frames with an odd number of logical
1’s per byte. The printer transmits XOFF and XON with odd parity. If the
printer detects a parity error, the port sends X'5F' to the printer instead
of the character sent by the host system.
Even
The port expects to receive data frames with an even number of logical
1’s per byte. The port transmits XOFF and XON with even parity. If the
port detects a parity error, the port sends an inverted question mark to
the printer instead of the character sent by the host system.
None
The port expects no parity bit when it receives data. The port transmits
XON and XOFF without parity bits.
Ignore
The port expects a parity bit when the port receives a data frame. The
port ignores the parity bit. The port uses even parity when it transmits
XON and XOFF.
Some printers post a 54 Standard Serial Error or a 54 Serial Option x Error (x represents
the number of the serial port) the first time they detect a transmission error (parity,
overrun, or framing). The 54 Standard Serial Error or the 54 Serial Option x Error can be
reset from your printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to
your printer user documentation for more information.
If repeated serial errors occur, power the printer off and back on to restore proper
serial operation.
Data Flow Control Protocol
One data flow control protocol is available: XON/XOFF with programmable polarity.
Refer to your printer user documentation for more information about selecting the
protocol from your printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional.
8-40
Interfaces
XON/XOFF Protocol Timing (RS-422)
When you select this data flow control protocol, your printer sends an XOFF signal
when it detects the following BUSY conditions:
•
•
•
Buffer full
Attendance error
Printer not in ready state
XON
XOFF
XON
XMT
RXD
Note: The printer sends an XOFF signal (DC3 control or X'13') to request that data
transmission end until the buffer clears. About 640 free bytes remain in the
buffer at this time. If the computer continues to send data after the printer
sends an XOFF signal, data could be lost.
Serial Errors
Your printer places an underscore character in the link buffer when it detects an error.
Some printers post a 54 Standard Serial Error or a 54 Serial Option x Error (x represents
the number of the serial port) the first time they detect a transmission error (parity,
overrun, or framing). The 54 Standard Serial Error or the 54 Serial Option x Error can be
reset from your printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to
your printer user documentation for more information.
If repeated serial errors occur, power the printer off and then back on to restore proper
serial operation.
The Serial errors that do not generate such an error message are:
•
•
•
Serial Break
Framing error received simultaneously as a Break
Powering on an IBM-compatible personal computer connected to the printer
8-41
Interfaces
Serial Computer Configuration Recommendations (RS-422)
For correct operation of the RS-422 serial interface, make sure you have:
•
Installed an RS-422 adapter card in your host computer.
•
Set up the IRQ according to the RS-422 documentation that you received
with the RS-422 adapter card.
•
Installed support software for the RS-422 adapter card if you use DOS.
•
Purchased an RS-422 cable meeting the requirements according to the RS422 documentation that you received with the RS-422 adapter card.
The following is an example of how to configure DOS for the printer using serial
XON\XOFF protocol:
DOS:
Run the software you received that supports your RS-422 adapter card or complete
the following:
From the DOS prompt, enter the following commands:
mode comy:9600,n,8,1,p
mode lptx :=comy
where x equals 1, 2, or 3, and y equals 1 or 2
Include these two command statements in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file on the computer
so they run each time your system starts operating.
Once this is set, to copy to the communications port again use the copy command:
copy 'filename' lptx
8-42
Interfaces
Windows 95/98/Me/2000, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows XP:
For correct operation of the RS-422 serial interface, while setting up your
communications port, make sure you have selected Xon/Xoff in the Flow Control field.
Selecting Xon/Xoff sets the communication to Xon/Xoff protocol. See the following
sections for more information:
•
•
•
•
“Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me” on page 8-2
“Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0” on page 8-3
“Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000” on page 8-4
“Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP” on page 8-5
Network Support
Installing an internal print server enables you to connect your printer to a local area
network (LAN). The print server supports these network interfaces:
•
The Token-Ring print server conforms to IEEE 802.5 using either IBM
Cabling System (STP) or unshielded twisted-pair cable, which meets the IBM
Cabling System Type 3 Media Specification (UTP).
•
The Ethernet Combined 10BaseT and 10Base2 print server conforms to IEEE
802.3 with Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable for the
10BaseT and conforms to IEEE 802.3 with RG58 coaxial cable for the
10Base2.
•
The Ethernet 10/100BaseTX print server conforms to the IEEE 802.3
standard for 10BaseT networks using Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twistedpair (UTP) cabling, and to the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard for
100BaseTX networks using Category 5 UTP cabling.
For information on installing a print server in your printer, refer to your printer user
documentation.
You may also connect your printer to a LAN by using an external print server. Use one
of the following:
•
•
Lexmark MarkNet print servers
IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters (IBM 4033)
8-43
Interfaces
Note: Network capabilities are standard on some printer models. Refer to your
printer user documentation for more information.
Input Buffer
Your printer has an input (link) buffer for each interface. The maximum size of the input
buffer depends upon the amount of RAM memory installed. The input buffers serve
the same purpose as a print spooler and can be allocated automatically by the printer.
The size of the input buffer may be modified or disabled from the operator panel
menus or through MarkVision Professional.
If NPAP is active on a port, two-thirds of the buffer memory is reserved for NPAP and
one-third is set aside for the input buffer. If NPAP is not active, all the memory is
available for the input buffer.
Table 8-8 shows the sizes automatically selected for the buffers when the buffer size
is set to Auto in the menus.
Table 8-8: Input Buffer Sizes in Bytes
Memory Size
Parallel Buffer Size
Serial
Buffer Size
Network
Buffer Size
LocalTalk
USB
Fax
2MB
12K
12K
12K
12K
12K
N/A
4MB
12K
12K
48K
12K
12K
350K
6MB
24K
12K
48K
24K
12K
350K
8, 10, or 12MB
48K
24K
48K
48K
24K
350K
16, 18, or 20MB
48K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed)
24K
1MB
1MB
24K
1MB
24, 28, 32, or 34MB
192K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed)
150K
1MB
1MB
150K 1MB
36, 38, or 40MB
384K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed)
300K
1MB
1MB
300K 1MB
44MB or larger
2MB
300K
2MB
2MB
300K 1MB
Note: MB represents 1,048,576 bytes. K represents 1024 bytes.
N/A means non-applicable.
Note: When using serial communication, the printer signals the host computer to
stop transmitting bytes when the serial input buffer is within 640 bytes. In
addition, when XON/XOFF protocol is used, the printer signals the host
computer to stop transmitting when the serial input buffer is 384, 256, and
128 bytes from full.
A-1
PCL Support
APPENDIX A: PCL Support
Table A-1 lists PCL emulation commands and identifies printers that support them.
For detailed information about PCL emulation commands and how to select them, see
“PCL Emulation” on page 2-1.
Table A-2 on page A-6 identifies printer support for the GL/2 commands.
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands
Printer Model
Function
Page
X422
Command
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
ESC
E
Printer Reset
2-62
✓
✓
✓
ESC
Y
Display Functions-On
2-83
✓
✓
✓
ESCZ
Display Functions-Off
2-84
✓
✓
✓
ESC
z
Print Test Page
2-84
✘
✘
✘
ESC
&a#C
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Columns)
2-68
✓
✓
✓
ESC&a#G
Duplex Page Side Selection
2-67
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&a#H
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Decipoints)
2-68
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&a#L
Set Left Margin
2-65
✓
✓
✓
ESC&a#M
Set Right Margin
2-65
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&a#P
Print Direction
2-65
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&a#R
Vertical Cursor Position (in Rows)
2-69
✓
✓
✓
ESC&a#V
Vertical Cursor Position (in Decipoints)
2-69
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&b#M
Monochrome Print Mode
2-80
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&c#T
Character Text Path Direction
2-65
✓
✓
✓
ESC&d@
Underline-Disable
2-71
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&d#A
Number of Collated Copies
2-62
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&d#D
Underline-Enable
2-71
✓
✓
✓
A-2
PCL Support
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
Printer Model
Function
Page
X422
Command
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
ESC
&f#F
Set Universal Height
2-64
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&f#G
Set Universal Width
2-64
✓
✓
✓
ESC&f#O
Set Universal Feed Direction
2-65
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&f#W
Set Universal Custom Name
2-65
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&f#S
Push / Pop Cursor Position
2-69
✓
✓
✓
ESC&f#X
Macro Control
2-73
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&f#Y
Set Macro ID
2-73
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&k#G
Set Line Termination
2-69
✓
✓
✓
ESC&k#H
Set Horizontal Motion Index
2-66
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&k#S
Select Primary and Secondary Pitch
2-72
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&k#W
Text Scale Mode
2-67
✘
✘
✘
Page Size
2-64
✓
✓
✓
Set Vertical Motion Index
2-66
✓
✓
✓
Set Line Spacing
2-67
✓
✓
✓
Set Top Margin
2-65
✓
✓
✓
Set Text Length
2-66
✓
✓
✓
Set Output Bin
2-66
✓
✓
✓
Paper Source
2-64
✓
✓
✓
Skip Perforation
2-66
✓
✓
✓
Select Orientation
2-65
✓
✓
✓
Paper Type
2-84
✘
✘
✘
Set Page Length
2-67
✓
✓
✓
Simplex/Duplex Print
2-62
✓
✓
✓
Job Separation
2-65
✘
✘
✘
Long-Edge Offset Registration
2-62
✓
✓
✓
Number of Copies
2-62
✓
✓
✓
Short-Edge Offset Registration
2-62
✓
✓
✓
Alphanumeric ID
2-68
✓
✓
✓
l#A
ESC
&l#C
ESC
&l#D
ESC&l#E
ESC
&l#F
ESC
&l#G
ESC&l#H
ESC
&l#L
ESC
&l#O
ESC&l#M(b)
ESC
&l#P
ESC
&l#S
ESC&l1T
ESC
&l#U
ESC
&l#X
ESC&l#Z
ESC&
ESC
&n#W [operation]
[string id]
A-3
PCL Support
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
Printer Model
Function
Page
X422
Command
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
ESC
&p#C
Palette Control
2-80
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&p#I
Palette Control ID
2-80
✓
✓
✓
ESC&p#S
Select Palette
2-80
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&p#X[data]
Transparent Print Data
2-71
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&r#F
Flush All Pages
2-82
✓
✓
✓
ESC&s#C
End-Of-Line Text Wrap
2-83
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&t#P
Text Parsing Method
2-72
✓
✓
✓
ESC
&u#D
Unit of Measure
2-63
✓
✓
✓
ESC(#
Primary Font Symbol Set
2-70
✓
✓
✓
ESC
(#X
Select Primary Download Font (by Font ID)
2-71
✓
✓
✓
ESC
(3@
Select Default Primary Font
2-71
✓
✓
✓
ESC(f#W[data]
Define Symbol Set
2-72
✓
✓
✓
ESC
(s#B
Primary Font Stroke Weight
2-71
✓
✓
✓
ESC
(s#H
Primary Font Pitch
2-70
✓
✓
✓
ESC(s#P
Primary Font Spacing
2-70
✓
✓
✓
ESC
(s#S
Primary Font Style
2-70
✓
✓
✓
ESC
(s#T
Primary Font Typeface Selection
2-71
✓
✓
✓
ESC(s#V
Primary Font Height (Point Size)
2-70
✓
✓
✓
ESC
(s#W[data]
Load Character
2-73
✓
✓
✓
ESC
)#
Secondary Font Symbol Set
2-70
✘
✘
✘
ESC)#X
Select Secondary Download Font (by Font ID)
2-71
✘
✘
✘
ESC
)3@
Select Default Secondary Font
2-71
✓
✓
✓
ESC
)s#B
Secondary Font Stroke Weight
2-71
✘
✘
✘
ESC)s#H
Secondary Font Pitch
2-70
✘
✘
✘
ESC
)s#P
Secondary Font Spacing
2-70
✘
✘
✘
ESC
)s#S
Secondary Font Style
2-70
✘
✘
✘
ESC)s#T
Secondary Font Typeface Selection
2-71
✘
✘
✘
ESC
)s#V
Secondary Font Height (Point Size)
2-70
✘
✘
✘
ESC
)s#W[data]
Load Font Header
2-73
✓
✓
✓
A-4
PCL Support
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
Printer Model
Function
Page
X422
Command
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
ESC
*b#M
Set Raster Compression Mode
2-78
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*b#V[data]
Transfer Raster Data (by Plane)
2-77
✓
✓
✓
ESC*b#W[data]
Transfer Raster Data (by Row / Block)
2-78
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*b#Y
Y Offset
2-77
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#A
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in PCL Units)
2-75
✓
✓
✓
ESC*c#B
Vertical Rectangle Size (in PCL Units)
2-75
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#D
Set Font ID
2-73
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#E
Set Character Code
2-73
✓
✓
✓
ESC*c#F
Font Control
2-73
✓
✓
✓
ESC
Area Fill ID
2-74,
2-76
✓
✓
✓
ESC*c#H
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in Decipoints)
2-75
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#K
GL/2 Horizontal Plot Size (in Inches)
2-83
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#L
*c#G
GL/2 Vertical Plot Size (in Inches)
2-83
✓
✓
✓
ESC*c#P
Fill Rectangular Area
2-76
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#Q
Pattern Control
2-75
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#R
Symbol Set ID Code
2-72
✓
✓
✓
ESC*c#S
Symbol Set Control
2-72
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c0T
Set Picture Frame Anchor Point
2-83
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#V
Vertical Rectangle Size (in Decipoints)
2-75
✓
✓
✓
ESC*c#W[data]
User-Defined Pattern
2-75
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#X
Picture Frame Horizontal Size (in Decipoints)
2-83
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*c#Y
Picture Frame Vertical Size (in Decipoints)
2-83
✓
✓
✓
ESC*
l#O
*l#R
ESC
*l#W[data]
Logical Operation
2-74
✓
✓
✓
ESC
Pixel Placement
2-74
✓
✓
✓
Color Lookup Tables
2-80
✓
✓
✓
ESC*m#W[data]
Download Dither Matrix
2-80
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*o#M(b)
Print Quality
2-84
✘
✘
✘
ESC
*o#W[data]
Driver Configuration Command
2-80
✓
✓
✓
A-5
PCL Support
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
Command
Function
Page
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
C510(n)
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
X422
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
ESC
*p#P
Push / Pop Palette
2-80
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*p#R
Set Pattern Reference Point
2-75
✓
✓
✓
ESC*p#X
Horizontal Cursor Position (in PCL Units)
2-68
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*p#Y
Vertical Cursor Position (in PCL Units)
2-69
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*r#A
Start Raster Graphics
2-77
✓
✓
✓
ESC*r#F
Raster Graphics Presentation Mode
2-77
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*r#S
Raster Width (Source)
2-77
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*r#T
Raster Height (Source)
2-77
✓
✓
✓
ESC*r#U
Simple Color
2-80
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*rB
End Raster Graphics (Version B)
2-78
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*rC
End Raster Graphics (Version C)
2-78
✓
✓
✓
ESC*s#I
Inquire Status Readback Entity
2-82
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*s1M
Free Space
2-82
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*s#T
Set Status Readback Location Type
2-82
✓
✓
✓
ESC*s#U
Set Status Readback Location Unit
2-82
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*s#X
Echo
2-82
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*t#H
Raster Width Destination
2-78
✓
✓
✓
ESC*t#I
Gamma Correction
2-81
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*t#J
Render Algorithm
2-81
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*t#R
Raster Resolution
2-77
✓
✓
✓
ESC*t#V
Raster Height Destination
2-79
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*g#W
Set Raster Configuration
2-79
✘
✘
✘
ESC
*v#A
Color Component One
2-81
✓
✓
✓
ESC*v#B
Color Component Two
2-81
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*v#C
Color Component Three
2-81
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*v#I
Assign Color Index
2-81
✓
✓
✓
ESC*v#N
Source Transparency Mode
2-74
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*v#O
Pattern Transparency Mode
2-74
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*v#S
Foreground Color
2-81
✓
✓
✓
A-6
PCL Support
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
Command
Function
Page
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
C510(n)
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
X422
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
ESC
*v#T
Select Current Pattern
2-74
✓
✓
✓
ESC
*v#W[data]
Configure Image Data
2-81
✓
✓
✓
ESC*i#W[data]
Viewing Illuminant
2-81
✘
✘
✘
ESC
9
Clear Horizontal Margins
2-65
✓
✓
✓
ESC
=
Half Line-Feed
2-69
✓
✓
✓
ESC%#A
Enter PCL Emulation
2-83
✓
✓
✓
ESC
Enter GL/2 Language
2-83
✓
✓
✓
2-63
✓
✓
✓
%#B
Note: The values of -1, 2, and 3 are not supported
by any of the printers included in this document.
ESC
%–12345X
Universal Exit Language (UEL) / Start of PJL
Table A-2 lists GL/2 commands and identifies the printers that support them.
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
Command
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
Function
Page
AA
Arc Absolute
2-85
✓
✓
✓
AC
Anchor Corner
2-87
✓
✓
✓
AD
Define Alternate Font
2-86
✓
✓
✓
AR
Arc Relative
2-85
✓
✓
✓
AT
Arc Absolute Three Point
2-85
✓
✓
✓
BR
Bezier Relative
2-85
✓
✓
✓
BZ
Bezier Absolute
2-85
✓
✓
✓
CF
Character Fill
2-86
✓
✓
✓
CI
Circle
2-85
✓
✓
✓
A-7
PCL Support
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands (Continued)
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
Command
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
Function
Page
CO
Comment
2-84
✓
✓
✓
CP
Character Plot
2-86
✓
✓
✓
CR
Color Range
2-87
✓
✓
✓
DF
Default
2-84
✓
✓
✓
DI
Absolute Direction
2-86
✓
✓
✓
DR
Relative Direction
2-86
✓
✓
✓
DT
Define Label Terminator
2-86
✓
✓
✓
DV
Define Variable Text Path
2-86
✓
✓
✓
EA
Edge Rectangle Absolute
2-85
✓
✓
✓
EP
Edge Polygon
2-85
✓
✓
✓
ER
Edge Rectangle Relative
2-85
✓
✓
✓
ES
Extra Space
2-86
✓
✓
✓
EW
Edge Wedge
2-85
✓
✓
✓
FI
Primary Font
2-86
✓
✓
✓
FN
Secondary Font
2-86
✓
✓
✓
FP
Fill Polygon, Odd/Even
2-85
✓
✓
✓
FP
Fill Polygon, Non-Zero Winding
2-85
✓
✓
✓
FT
Fill Type
2-87
✓
✓
✓
FT
Fill Type - 22
2-87
✓
✓
✓
FT
Fill Type - 9
2-87
✓
✓
✓
IN
Initialize
2-84
✓
✓
✓
IP
Input P1 and P2
2-84
✓
✓
✓
IR
Input Relative P1 and P2
2-85
✓
✓
✓
IW
Input Window
2-85
✓
✓
✓
LA
Line Attributes
2-87
✓
✓
✓
LB
Label, Default Terminator = ‘03’x
2-86
✓
✓
✓
LO
Label Origin
2-86
✓
✓
✓
LO
Uses PCL Label Origin
2-86
✓
✓
✓
LT
Line Type
2-87
✓
✓
✓
A-8
PCL Support
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands (Continued)
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
Command
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
Function
Page
LM
Label Mode
2-86
✘
✘
✘
MC
Logical Operation
2-85
✓
✓
✓
NP
Number of Pens
2-87
✓
✓
✓
PA
Plot Absolute
2-85
✓
✓
✓
PC
Pen Color
2-87
✓
✓
✓
PD
Pen Down
2-85
✓
✓
✓
PE
Polyline Encoded
2-85
✓
✓
✓
PM
Polygon Mode
2-85
✓
✓
✓
PP
Pixel Placement
2-85
✓
✓
✓
PR
Plot Relative
2-85
✓
✓
✓
PU
Pen Up
2-85
✓
✓
✓
PW
Pen Width
2-87
✓
✓
✓
RA
Fill Rectangle Absolute
2-86
✓
✓
✓
RF
Define Raster Fill
2-87
✓
✓
✓
RO
Rotate Coordinate System
2-85
✓
✓
✓
RR
Fill Rectangle Relative
2-86
✓
✓
✓
RT
Arc Relative Three Point
2-85
✓
✓
✓
SA
Select Alternate Font
2-86
✓
✓
✓
SB
Scalable/Bitmapped Fonts
2-86
✓
✓
✓
SC
Scale
2-85
✓
✓
✓
SD
Define Standard Font
2-86
✓
✓
✓
SI
Absolute Character Size
2-86
✓
✓
✓
SL
Character Slant
2-86
✓
✓
✓
SM
Symbol Mode
2-87
✓
✓
✓
SP
Select Pen
2-87
✓
✓
✓
SR
Relative Character Size
2-86
✓
✓
✓
SS
Select Standard Font
2-86
✓
✓
✓
SV
Screened Vectors
2-87
✓
✓
✓
SV
Screened Vectors - 9, level
2-87
✓
✓
✓
A-9
PCL Support
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands (Continued)
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
Command
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
C510(n)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
Function
Page
TD
Transparent Data
2-86
✓
✓
✓
TM
Threshold Matrix
2-87
✓
✓
✓
TR
Transparency Mode
2-87
✓
✓
✓
UL
User Defined Line
2-87
✓
✓
✓
WG
Fill Wedge
2-86
✓
✓
✓
WU
Pen Width Units
2-87
✓
✓
✓
B-1
PJL Support
APPENDIX B: PJL Support
The following tables list PJL commands and identify printers that support them.
For detailed information about PJL commands, see “Printer Job Language” on
page 3-1. All commands may not have a full description.
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your Lexmark
printer and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
✓ Supported
Page
AUTOCONT
3-12
AUTOSELECT
X422
Variable Name
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
BINDING
3-12
✓
✓
✓
BITSPERPIXEL
3-12
✘
✓
✘
CLEARABLEWARNINGS
3-12
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
CONTEXTSWITCH
COPIES
3-12
✓
✓
✓
CPLOCK
3-13
✓
✓
✓
DENSITY
3-13
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✓
DISKLOCK
DUPLEX
3-13
✓
✓
✓
ECONOMODE
3-13
✘
✓
✓
FORMATTERNUMBER
3-13
✓
✓
✓
FORMLINES
3-13
✓
✓
✓
HOLD
3-13
✓
✓
✘
HOLDKEY
3-13
✓
✓
✘
B-2
PJL Support
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Variable Name
Page
HOLDTYPE
3-14
✓
✓
✘
IMAGEADAPT
3-14
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
INTRAY1
INTRAY2
3-14
✓
✓
✘
INTRAY3
3-14
✘
✘
✘
INTRAY4
3-14
✘
✘
✘
INTRAY5
3-14
✘
✘
✘
INTRAY1SIZE
3-14
✓
✓
✓
INTRAY2SIZE
3-14
✓
✓
✓
INTRAY3SIZE
3-14
✘
✘
✘
INTRAY4SIZE
3-14
✘
✘
✘
INTRAY5SIZE
3-14
✘
✘
✘
IOBUFFER
✘
✘
✘
IOSIZE
✘
✘
✘
JOBATTR
✘
✘
✘
JOBNAME
3-14
✓
✓
✘
JOBOFFSET
3-15
✘
✘
✘
LANG
3-15
✓
✓
✓
LOWTONER
3-15
✓
CONTINUE
✓
MANUALFEED
3-15
✘
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
MEDIASOURCE
MEDIATYPE
3-15
✓
✓
✓
MPTRAY
3-15
✘
✓
✘
ORIENTATION
3-15
✓
✓
✓
OUTBIN
3-16
✓
✓
✓
PAGEPROTECT
3-16
✓
✓
✓
PAPER
3-16
✓
✓
✓
PARALLEL
3-17
✓
✘
✘
PASSWORD
3-17
✓
✓
✓
B-3
PJL Support
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
PERSONALITY
3-17
✓
✓
✓
POWERSAVE
3-17
✓
✓
✓
POWERSAVETIME
3-18
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
PRINTQUALITY
QTY
3-18
RENDERMODE
REPRINT
3-18
✓
✓
✓
RESOLUTION
3-18
✓
✓
✓
RESOURCESAVE
3-18
✓
AUTO
✘
✘
✘
RESOURCESAVESIZE
RET
3-18
✘
✘
✘
TIMEOUT
3-18
✓
✓
✓
USERNAME
3-19
✓
✓
✘
WIDEA4
3-19
✓
✓
✘
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LACTIVEBINRESET
3-19
✘
✘
✘
LADVANCEDSTATUS
3-19
✓
✘
✓
LALARMCONTROL
3-19
✓
✓
✘
LAUTOCRLF
3-19
✓
✓
✓
LAUTOLFCR
3-19
✓
✓
✓
B-4
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LBLANKPAGES
3-19
✓
✓
✓
LBONDLENGTH
3-19
✘
✘
✘
LBONDLOADING
3-19
✓
✓
✘
LBONDOUTBIN
3-20
✘
✘
✘
LBONDTEXTURE
3-20
✘
✓
✓
LBONDWEIGHT
3-20
✓
✓
✓
LBWLOCK
3-20
✓
✘
✘
LCANCEL
3-20
✓
✓
✓
LCARDSTOCKLENGTH
3-20
✘
✘
✘
LCARDSTOCKLOADING
3-20
✘
✓
✘
LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN
3-21
✘
✘
✘
LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE
3-21
✘
✓
✓
LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT
3-21
✓
✓
✓
LCOLLATION
3-21
✓
✓
✓
LCOLORCORRECTION
3-21
✘
✘
LCOLOREDLENGTH
3-21
✘
✘
✘
LCOLOREDLOADING
3-22
✓
✓
✘
LCOLOREDOUTBIN
3-22
✘
✘
✘
LCOLOREDTEXTURE
3-22
✘
✓
✓
LCOLOREDWEIGHT
3-22
✓
✓
✓
LCOLORMODEL
3-22
✓
✘
✘
LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
3-22
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH
3-22
✓
216 mm (8.5 in.)
✓
LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT
3-23
✓
356 mm (14.0 in.)
✓
LCUSTOMPAPERFEED
3-23
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH
3-23
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING
3-23
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA
3-23
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME
3-23
✓
✓
✓
AUTO
B-5
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN
3-24
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE
3-24
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT
3-24
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH
3-24
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING
3-24
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA
3-24
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME
3-25
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN
3-25
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE
3-25
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT
3-25
✓
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH
3-25
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING
3-25
✘
✓
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA
3-26
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME
3-26
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN
3-26
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE
3-26
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT
3-26
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH
3-26
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING
3-27
✘
✓
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA
3-27
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME
3-27
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN
3-27
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE
3-27
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT
3-27
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH
3-28
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING
3-28
✘
✓
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA
3-28
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME
3-28
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE5OUTBIN
3-28
✘
✘
✘
B-6
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE
3-28
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT
3-29
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH
3-29
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING
3-29
✘
✓
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA
3-29
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME
3-29
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN
3-29
✘
✘
✘
LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE
3-30
✘
✓
✓
LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT
3-30
✘
✓
✓
LDOWNLOADTARGET
3-30
✓
✓
✓
LDRYTIMEDELAY
3-30
✘
✘
✘
LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS
3-30
✓
✓
✓
LENVELOPEENHANCE
3-30
✘
✘
✘
LENVELOPELENGTH
3-30
✘
✘
✘
LENVELOPEOUTBIN
3-30
✘
✘
✘
LENVELOPETEXTURE
3-31
✘
✓
✓
LENVELOPEWEIGHT
3-31
✓
✓
✓
LESCCHAR
3-31
✓
✓
✓
LFAXRESOLUTION
3-31
✓
✓
✘
LFAXREDIAL
3-31
✓
✘
✘
LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY
3-31
✓
✘
✘
LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG
3-31
✓
✘
✘
LFEEDERPAPERTYPE
3-31
✘
✘
✘
LGLOSSYLOADING
3-31
✓
✘
✘
LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN
3-32
✘
✘
✘
LGLOSSYTEXTURE
3-32
✘
✘
✘
LGLOSSYWEIGHT
3-32
✘
✘
✘
LHOLEPUNCHALARM
3-32
✘
✘
✘
LHOLEPUNCHMODE
3-32
✘
✘
✘
B-7
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LHONORINIT
3-32
✓
✘
✓
LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS
3-32
✓
✘
✘
LIMAGECONTRAST
3-32
✓
✘
✘
LIMAGEENHANCE
3-32
✘
✓
✓
LIMAGEENHANCETYPE
3-33
✘
2
✓
LIMAGEORIENTATION
3-33
✓
✓
✓
LIMAGESMOOTHING
3-33
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
LINFEEDER
LINFEEDERSIZE
3-33
✘
✘
✘
LINKALERT
3-33
✘
✘
✘
LINMPFEEDERSIZE
3-33
✓
✓
✓
LJAMRECOVERY
3-33
✓
✓
✓
LLABELSLENGTH
3-33
✘
✘
✘
LLABELSLOADING
3-33
✘
✓
✓
LLABELSOUTBIN
3-34
✘
✘
✘
LLABELSTEXTURE
3-34
✘
✓
✓
LLABELSWEIGHT
3-34
✓
✓
✓
LLEFTMARGINOFFSET
3-34
✘
✘
✓
LLETTERHEADLENGTH
3-34
✘
✘
✘
LLETTERHEADLOADING
3-34
✓
✓
✘
LLETTERHEADOUTBIN
3-35
✘
✘
✘
LLETTERHEADTEXTURE
3-35
✘
✓
✓
LLETTERHEADWEIGHT
3-35
✓
✓
✓
LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT
3-35
✓
✘
✘
LMANUALCOLORRGBGRAPHICS
3-35
✓
✘
✘
LMANUALCOLORRGBIMAGE
3-35
✓
✘
✘
LMANUALCOLORCMYKTEXT
3-35
✓
✘
✘
LMANUALCOLORCMYKGRAPHICS
3-35
✓
✘
✘
LMANUALCOLORCMYKIMAGE
3-36
✓
✘
✘
B-8
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LMANUALENVELOPESIZE
3-36
✘
✓
✓
LMANUALENVELOPETYPE
3-36
✘
✓
✓
LMANUALPAPERSIZE
3-36
✘
✓
✓
LMANUALPAPERTYPE
3-36
✘
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
LMAXSTATUSMSG
LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE
3-36
✘
✓
✘
LMULTIPAGEBORDER
3-36
✓
✓
✓
LMULTIPAGEORDER
3-36
✓
✓
✓
LMULTIPAGEPRINT
3-37
✓
✓
✓
LMULTIPAGEVIEW
3-37
✓
✓
✓
LNPAP
3-37
✓
✓
✓
LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME
3-37
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME
3-37
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME
3-37
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME
3-37
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME
3-37
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME
3-38
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME
3-38
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME
3-38
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME
3-38
✘
✘
✘
LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME
3-38
✘
✘
✘
LOUTBINCONFIG
3-38
✘
✘
✘
LOVERFLOWOUTBIN
3-39
✘
✘
✘
LOVERFLOWTIMER
3-39
✘
✘
✘
LPAGECOUNT
3-39
✓
✓
✓
LPAGEMODE
3-39
✓
✓
✓
LPAPERSOURCE
3-39
TRAY1
TRAY1
TRAY1
LPICTUREGRADE
3-40
✘
✓
✓
LPLAINLENGTH
3-40
✘
✘
✘
B-9
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LPLAINOUTBIN
3-40
✘
✘
✘
LPLAINTEXTURE
3-40
✘
✓
✓
LPLAINWEIGHT
3-40
✓
✓
✓
LPOWERSAVER
3-40
✓
✓
✓
LPPDS
3-41
✘
✓
✓
LPPDSFORMLINES
3-41
✘
✓
✓
LPPDSLINESPERINCH
3-41
✘
✓
✓
LPREPRINTEDLENGTH
3-41
✘
✘
✘
LPREPRINTEDLOADING
3-41
✓
✓
✘
LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN
3-42
✘
✘
✘
LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE
3-42
✘
✓
✓
LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT
3-42
✓
✓
✓
LPRINTBUFFER
3-42
✓
✓
✓
LPRINTHEADIDLETIME
3-42
✘
✘
✘
LPRINTERUSAGE
3-42
✘
✘
✘
LPRINTMENUSBUTTON
3-42
✘
✘
✘
LPRINTQUALITY
3-43
✘
✘
✘
LPUNCH
3-43
✘
✘
✘
LREAROUTBINNAME
3-43
✘
✘
✘
LREPEATPRINTLIMIT
3-43
✓
✓
✘
LRESET
3-43
✓
✓
✓
LRESOURCESAVE
3-43
✓
✓
✓
LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET
3-43
✘
✓
✓
LSCREENING
3-43
✘
✘
✘
LSEPARATORSHEETS
3-43
✓
✓
✓
LSEPARATORSOURCE
3-43
✓
✓
✓
LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME
3-44
✓
✘
✘
LSTAPLE
3-44
✘
✘
✘
LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM
3-44
✘
✘
✘
B-10
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LSTAPLETESTBIN
3-44
✘
✘
✘
LSTAPLETESTSOURCE
3-44
✘
✘
✘
LSTROKEWIDTH
3-44
✘
✘
✘
LSUBSTITUTESIZE
3-44
ALLLISTED
ALLLISTED
ALLLISTED
LTHINCOAT
3-44
✘
✘
✘
LTOPBINROTATE
3-44
✘
✘
✘
LTOPMARGINOFFSET
3-44
✘
✘
✘
LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH
3-44
✘
✘
✘
LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN
3-45
✘
✘
✘
LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE
3-45
✘
✓
✓
LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT
3-45
✓
✓
✓
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPEPAPER
3-45
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-45
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPEPAPER
3-45
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-45
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPEPAPER
3-46
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-46
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPEPAPER
3-46
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-46
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY1AUTOSIZE
3-46
✓
✘
✘
LTRAY2AUTOSIZE
3-46
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY3AUTOSIZE
3-46
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY4AUTOSIZE
3-46
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY5AUTOSIZE
3-46
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY1PAPERTYPE
3-46
PLAIN
PLAIN
PLAIN
LTRAY2PAPERTYPE
3-47
PLAIN or
CUSTOMTYPE2
PLAIN or
CUSTOMTYPE2
PLAIN or
CUSTOMTYPE2
LTRAY3PAPERTYPE
3-47
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY4PAPERTYPE
3-47
✘
✘
✘
B-11
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
✓ Supported
E230, E232, E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LTRAY5PAPERTYPE
3-47
✘
✘
✘
LTRAY1RENUMBER
3-47
✓
✓
✓
LTYPE1FONTS
3-47
✓
✓
✓
LUSDEFAULTS
3-47
✓
✓
✓
Table B-3: Common Variables for PCL Emulation
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Variable Name
Page
FONTNUMBER
3-48
✓
✓
✓
FONTSOURCE
3-48
✓
✓
✓
PITCH
3-48
✓
✓
✓
PTSIZE
3-48
✓
✓
✓
SYMSET
3-48
✓
✓
✓
Table B-4: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Variable Name
Page
LA4WIDTH
3-49
✓
✓
✓
LASSIGNFEEDER
3-49
✘
✘
✘
LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE
3-49
✘
✓
✓
LASSIGNMANUALPAPER
3-49
✘
✓
✓
B-12
Table B-4: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Variable Name
Page
LASSIGNMPFEEDER
3-49
✘
✓
✘
LASSIGNTRAY1
3-50
✓
✓
✓
LASSIGNTRAY2
3-50
✓
✓
✓
LASSIGNTRAY3
3-50
✘
✘
✘
LASSIGNTRAY4
3-50
✘
✘
✘
LASSIGNTRAY5
3-50
✘
✘
✘
LBITMAPROUNDING
3-50
✓
✓
✓
LCOLOREXTENSIONS
3-50
✓
✓
✓
LFONTCOMPATIBILITY
3-51
✓
✓
✓
LFONTPRIORITY
3-51
✓
✓
✓
Table B-5: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Variable Name
Page
JAMRECOVERY
3-51
✓
✓
✓
PRTPSERRS
3-51
✓
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
ADOBEMBT
Table B-6: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Variable Name
Page
LPICTUREGRADE
3-52
✘
✓
✓
LPSFONTPRIORITY
3-52
✓
✓
✓
PJL Support
B-13
Table B-7: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Variable Name
Page
LDESCRIPTION
3-53
✓
✓
✓
LRWLOCK
3-53
✓
✓
✓
LWLOCK
3-53
✓
✓
✓
Table B-8: Status Readback Commands
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Command Name
Page
Dinquire
3-54
✓
✓
✓
Echo
3-55
✓
✓
✓
Info
3-56
✓
✓
✓
Inquire
3-58
✓
✓
✓
Ustatus
3-59
✓
✓
✓
Ustatusoff
3-60
✓
✓
✓
Table B-9: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variables
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Variable Name
Page
DEVICE
3-60
✓
✓
✓
JOB
3-60
✓
✓
✓
PAGE
3-60
✓
✓
✓
TIMED
3-60
✓
✓
✓
PJL Support
B-14
PJL Support
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention Required PPDS Font Error
3-63
30014
50 PPDS Font Error
✘
✓
✓
Intervention Required Insufficient Collation Area
3-63
30016
37 Insufficient Collation Area
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Insufficient Defragment Memory
3-63
30016
37 Insufficient Defrag Memory
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Insufficient Memory
3-63
30016
37 Insufficient Memory
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Memory Full
3-63
30016
38 Memory Full
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Held Jobs May Not Be Restored
3-63
30016
Held Jobs May Not Be Restored
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Configuration Change
3-63
30016
57 Configuration Change
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Complex Page
3-63
30017
39 Complex Page
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Standard Serial Error
3-63
30018
54 Standard Serial Error
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Serial Option Error
3-63
30018
54 Serial Option <slot #> error
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Parallel Error
3-63
30018
54 Parallel Error
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Network Software Error
3-65
30018
54 Std Network Software Error
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Standard Serial Fax
Connection Lost
3-63
30018
54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Standard Serial Disabled
3-63
30018
56 Standard Serial Disabled
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Serial Option Disabled
3-64
30018
56 Serial <slot #> Port Disabled
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Std Parallel Port Disabled
3-64
30018
56 Std Parallel Port Disabled
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Parallel Port Disabled
3-64
30018
56 Parallel Port Disabled
✘
✘
✘
B-15
PJL Support
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention Required Parallel Port Error
3-64
30018
56 Parallel Port x Disabled
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Standard USB Disabled
3-64
30018
56 Standard USB Port Disabled
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Resource Save Off
Deficient Memory
3-64
30019
35 Res Save Off Deficient
Memory
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insufficient Fax Buffer
3-64
30026
55 Insufficient Fax Buffer
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Std Par ENA Connection Lost
3-64
30027
54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Std Parallel Port Disabled
3-64
30027
56 Std Parallel Port Disabled
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Resolution Reduced
3-64
30029
36 Resolution Reduced
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Print Jobs on Disk Request
3-64
30031
Print Jobs on Disk? or
Print Jobs on Disk. Go/Stop?
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop?
3-64
30031
Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop?
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Short Paper
3-64
30034
34 Short Paper
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Flash Full
3-64
30035
52 Flash Full
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Disk Full
3-64
30035
62 Disk Full
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Defective Flash
3-64
30036
51 Defective Flash
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Unformatted Flash
3-64
30036
53 Unformatted Flash
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Defective Disk
3-64
30036
61 Defective Disk
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Unformatted Disk
3-64
30036
63 Unformatted Disk
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Scheduled Maintenance
3-65
30075
80 Scheduled Maintenance
✘
✓
✓
Intervention Required Resource Save Off
Deficient Memory
3-65
30076
35 Res Save Off Deficient
Memory
✓
✓
✓
B-16
PJL Support
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention Required Insufficient Collation Area
3-65
30076
37 Insufficient Collation Area
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Empty Hole Punch Box
3-65
30107
Empty Hole Punch Box
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Empty Box M
3-65
30107
Empty Box M
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insert Box M
3-65
30107
Insert Box M
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insert Staple Cartridge
3-65
30107
Insert Staple Cartridge
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insert Stapler
3-65
30107
Insert Stapler
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Priming Failed
3-65
30107
Priming Failed, Retry. Go/Stop?
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Network x Software Error
3-65
30112
54 Network x Software Error
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Serial Port x Disabled
3-65
30112
56 Serial Port x Disabled
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Serial Option x Error
3-65
30112
54 Serial Option x Error
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Serial x Fax Connection Lost
3-65
30112
54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required USB Port Disabled
3-65
30112
56 USB Port x Disabled
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Parallel x ENA Connection Lost
3-65
30113
54 Par x ENA Connection Lost
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Parallel x Port Disabled
3-65
30113
56 Parallel Port x Disabled
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Disk Operation Failed
Jobs on Disk
3-65
32001
Operation Failed Jobs on Disk
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Disk Operation Failed
Faxes on Disk
3-65
32001
Operation Failed Faxes on Disk
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Flash Full
3-65
32002
52 Flash Full
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Disk Full
3-66
32002
62 Disk Full
✓
✘
✘
B-17
PJL Support
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention required:
Disk Corrupted. Reformat?
3-66
32015
Disk Corrupted. Reformat?
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Too Many Flash Options Installed
3-66
32030
58 Too Many Flash Options
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Unformatted Flash
3-66
32052
53 Unformatted Flash
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Unformatted Disk
3-66
32052
63 Unformatted Disk
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required:
Unsupported Disk Format
3-66
32052
64 Unsupported Disk Format
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Defective Flash
3-66
32056
51 Defective Flash
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Defective Disk
3-66
32056
61 Defective Disk
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Scheduled Maintenance
3-66
35075
80 Scheduled Maintenance
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Scheduled Maintenance
3-66
35075
81 Scheduled Maintenance
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Fuser Maintenance
3-66
40038
80 Fuser Maintenance
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Fuser Life Warning
3-66
40038
80 Fuser Life Warning
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Belt Life Warning
3-66
40038
80 Belt Life Warning
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Fuser/Belt Life Warning
3-66
40038
80 Fuser/Belt Life Warning
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Fuser Exhausted
3-66
40038
80 Fuser Exhausted
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Belt Exhausted
3-66
40038
80 Belt Exhausted
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Fuser/Belt Exhausted
3-66
40038
80 Fuser/Belt Exhausted
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required ITU Maintenance
3-66
40038
83 ITU Maintenance
✘
✘
✘
B-18
PJL Support
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention Required 30 Coating Roll Missing
3-67
40010
30 Coating Roll Missing
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required 30 XXXX1 Print Unit Missing
3-67
40010
30 XXXX1 Print Unit Missing
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insert Hole Punch Box
3-67
40010
Insert Hole Punch Box
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insert PC Cartridge
3-67
40010
Insert PC Cartridge
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Cartridge Life Expired
3-67
40021
Cartridge Life Expired XXXX1
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Cartridge Life Warning
3-68
40021
Cartridge Life Warning XXXX1
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Printer Upper Door Open
3-67
40021
Cover Open, Close Top Covers,
Close Door, or Insert Cartridge
✘
✓
✓
Intervention Required Printer Cover Open
3-68
40021
Close Cover
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Toner Box Cover
3-67
40021
Close Cover A
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Deflector G
3-68
40021
Close Deflector G
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Defective Print Cartridge
3-67
40021
31 Defective Print Cartridge
✘
✓
✓
Intervention Required Defective Ink Cartridge
3-67
40021
31 Defective Cartridge XXXX1
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Missing Cartridge
3-68
40021
31 Missing Cartridge XXXX1
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Missing Printhead
3-68
40021
31 Missing Printhead
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Unsupported Print Cartridge
3-67
40021
32 Unsupported Print Cartridge
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Unsupported XXXX1 Cartridge
3-67
40021
32 Unsupported XXXX1 Cartridge
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Unsupported Cartridge
3-67
40021
32 Unsupported Cartridge
✘
✘
✘
1 XXXX
represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black cartridges,
respectively.
B-19
PJL Support
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention Required Unsupported Printhead
3-68
40021
32 Unsupported Printhead
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Tray Size Sense Error
3-68
40021
40 Tray x Size Sense Error
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Open Bin Exit Tray
3-68
40021
41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Change Cartridge
Invalid Refill
3-67
40021
Change Cartridge Invalid Refill
✘
✓
✓
Intervention Required Open Cover
3-68
40021
Open Cover
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Open Rear Door
3-68
40021
Open Rear Door
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Front Door
3-68
40021
Close Front Door
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Side Door
3-68
40021
Close Side Door
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Finisher Door
3-68
40021
Close Finisher Door
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Finisher Side Door
3-68
40021
Close Finisher Side Door
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Finisher Top Cover
3-68
40021
Close Finisher Top Cover
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Door <d>
3-68
40021
Close Door <d>
✘
✓
✓
Intervention Required Close Cover <c>
3-68
40021
Close Cover <c>
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Close Tray x Top Cover
3-68
40021
Close Tray x Top Cover
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insert Print Cartridge
3-69
40021
Insert Print Cartridge
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-69
40022
2xx Paper Jam
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Check Tray Connection
3-69
40027
Check Tray <source #> Connection
✘
✘
✘
1 XXXX
represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black cartridges,
respectively.
B-20
PJL Support
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention Required Install Tray x or Cancel Job
3-69
40027
Install Tray x or Cancel Job
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Reattach Envelope Feeder
3-69
40028
Reattach Envelope Feeder
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Install Env Feeder or
Cancel Job
3-69
40028
Install Env Feed or Cancel Job
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Reattach MP Feeder
3-69
40028
Reattach MP Feeder
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Reattach Output Bin
3-69
40029
Reattach Output Bin <bin #>
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Reattach Bins
3-69
40029
Reattach Bins <bin #x - bin #y>
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Install Bin x or Cancel Job
3-69
40029
Install Bin x or Cancel Job
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Check Finisher Installation
3-69
40029
Check Finisher Installation
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Check Mailbox Installation
3-69
40029
Check Mailbox Installation
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Tray Config Error
3-69
40030
33 Tray x Config Error
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Input Config Error
3-69
40030
58 Input Config Error
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Too Many Trays Attached
3-69
40030
58 Too Many Trays Attached
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Too Many Bins Attached
3-69
40030
58 Too Many Bins Attached
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Too Many Disks Installed
3-69
40030
58 Too Many Disks Installed
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Too Many Disks Installed
3-69
40036
58 Too Many Disks Installed
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required PerfectFinish Missing
3-70
40037
31 PerfectFinish Missing
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required PerfectFinish Empty
3-70
40037
87 PerfectFinish Empty
✘
✘
✘
1 XXXX
represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black cartridges,
respectively.
B-21
PJL Support
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention Required Toner Low
3-70
40038
88 Toner Low
✘
✓
✓
Intervention Required Toner Low
3-70
40038
88 Yellow Toner Low
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✓
✘
✘
88 Magenta Toner Low
88 Cyan Toner Low
88 Black Toner Low
3-70
88 Color Print Cartridge Low
88 Black Print Cartridge Low
88 Photo Print Cartridge Low
3-70
88 Yellow Toner Empty
88 Magenta Toner Empty
88 Cyan Toner Empty
88 Black Toner Empty
Intervention Required 84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning
3-70
40038
84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required 84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning
3-70
40038
84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required 84 All Photo Devs Exhausted
3-70
40038
84 All Photo Devs Exhausted
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required 84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted
3-70
40038
84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Cartridge Low
3-71
40038
88 Cartridge Low
<CMYK>
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Replace PC Kit
3-71
40038
Replace PC Kit
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Replace PC Kit
To Continue
3-71
40038
Replace PC Kit To Continue
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Replace Toner Cartridge
3-71
40038
Replace Toner Cartridge
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Replace Toner Cartridge To
Continue
3-71
40038
Replace Toner To Continue
✘
✘
✘
1 XXXX
represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black cartridges,
respectively.
B-22
PJL Support
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String
Intervention Required Replace Oil Coating Roll
3-71
40038
Replace Oil Coating Roll
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Cartridge Empty
3-71
40039
89 Cartridge Empty
<CMYK>
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Load Staples
3-71
40040
Load Staples
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Priming Failed. Retry?
3-71
40041
Priming Failed. Retry?
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required OPMSG
3-71
40048
OPMSG message
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required STMSG
3-71
40049
STMSG message
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Replace Fuser
3-71
40050
Replace Fuser
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Replace Transfer Kit
3-71
40050
Replace Transfer Kit
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Incompatible Bin x
3-71
40087
59 Incompatible Bin x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Incompatible Duplex
3-71
40088
59 Incompatible Duplex
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Incompatible Tray x
3-71
40089
59 Incompatible Tray x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Incompatible Envelope Feeder
3-71
40090
59 Incompatible Envelope Feeder
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Check Duplex Connection
3-71
40095
Check Duplex Connection
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Install Duplex or Cancel Job
3-72
40095
Install Duplex or Cancel Job
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Duplex Cover Open
3-72
40096
Close Duplex Door
✓
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insert Duplex Option
3-72
40096
Insert Duplex Option
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Load Staples
3-72
40101
Load Staples
✘
✘
✘
1 XXXX
represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black cartridges,
respectively.
B-23
PJL Support
Table B-12: PJL Messages for Paper Handling
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String*
Intervention Required Wrong Paper Size in Tray x
3-73
30034
34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed
3-73
30034
34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Remove Paper Standard Bin
3-73
40019
Remove Paper Standard Bin
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Remove Paper Outbin <bin #>
3-73
40019
Remove Paper Output Bin <bin #>
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Remove Paper All Output Bins
3-73
40019
Remove Paper All Output Bins
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Remove Paper <linked set bin
name>
3-73
40019
Remove Paper <linked set bin
name>
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Check <Source> Paper Guide
3-73
4100x
Check <source> Paper Guide
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Incorrect Media
3-73
41xyy
34 Incorrect Media
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Load Request
3-73
41xyy
Load <source>
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
✓
✓
✓
Intervention Required Load Manual Request
3-73
41xxy
Load Manual
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
✘
✓
✓
Intervention Required Change Request
3-73
41xyy
Change <source>
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
✓
✓
✓
x represents an input source code. For more information, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes” on page 3-74.
yy represents a media size code. For more information, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74.
* Refer to your printer user documentation for return string messages.
B-24
PJL Support
Table B-12: PJL Messages for Paper Handling (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Return String*
Intervention Required Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go.
3-73
412yy
Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go.
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Insert Tray Request
3-73
4300x
Insert Tray <source #>
✓
✓
✓
x represents an input source code. For more information, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes” on page 3-74.
yy represents a media size code. For more information, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74.
* Refer to your printer user documentation for return string messages.
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4200x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4201x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4202x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4203x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4204x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4205x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4206x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4207x
✘
✘
✘
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
B-25
PJL Support
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4208x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4209x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4210x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4211x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4220x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4221x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4222x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4230x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-76
4231x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4232x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4233x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4234
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
424yx
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4241wy
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4242wy
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4243w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4244wy
✘
✘
✘
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
B-26
PJL Support
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4245w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4246w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4247wy
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4248w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4249w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4250w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4250x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4251wy
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4251x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-77
4252w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4253w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4254wy
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4255
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4256w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4257w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4258w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4259wy
✘
✘
✘
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
B-27
PJL Support
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4260w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4260x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4261w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4261x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
427zx
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4271
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4272
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4273
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4280w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-78
4280x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4281w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4281x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4282w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4282x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4283w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4283x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4284w
✘
✘
✘
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
B-28
PJL Support
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4284x
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4285w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4286w
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4287
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4288
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4289
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4290
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4291
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4292
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-79
4293
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-80
4294
✘
✘
✘
Intervention Required Paper Jam
3-80
4295
✘
✘
✘
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
B-29
PJL Support
Table B-14: Service Errors
✓ Supported
Page
Error Code
ALL SERVICE MESSAGES
3-80
50000
✘
Table B-15: Device Attendance Messages
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Message
Page
RDYMSG
3-80
✓
✓
✓
OPMSG
3-81
✓
✓
✓
STMSG
3-81
✓
✓
✓
Table B-16: Lexmark Unique PJL Commands
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Command
Page
LBEEP
3-82
✓
✓
✓
LDOWNLOADTARGET
3-30
✓
✓
✓
LPORTROTATE
3-82
✓
✓
✓
LPRINT testpage
3-83
✓
✓
✓
• LPRINTDIRECTORY
3-83
✓
✓
✓
• LPRINTTESTPAGE
3-83
✓
✓
✓
• LPRINTMENUS
3-83
✓
✓
✓
• LPRINTPCLFONTS
3-83
✓
✓
✓
• LPRINTPSFONTS
3-83
✓
✓
✓
LESCAPECHAR
3-83
✓
✓
✓
X422
Message
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message description.
✘
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
✘
B-30
Table B-16: Lexmark Unique PJL Commands (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Command
Page
LFAX PHONENUMBER
3-85
✓
✓
✓
LOPENFILE
3-89
✓
✓
✓
LCLOSEFILE
3-89
✓
✓
✓
LREADFILE
3-90
✓
✓
✓
LWRITEFILE
3-91
✓
✓
✓
LRUNFILE
3-91
✓
✓
✓
LRENAMEFILE
3-92
✓
✓
✓
LDELETEFILE
3-92
✓
✓
✓
LFORMAT
3-92
✓
✓
✓
LDEFRAG
3-92
✓
✓
✓
Table B-17: File and Device Protection Commands
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Command
Page
LDECLARE LRESOURCE
3-95
✓
✓
✓
LDELETEPASSWORD
3-96
✓
✓
✓
LQUERYSEED
LBYPASSPASSWORD KEY
3-98
✓
✓
✓
PJL Support
C-1
PostScript Support
APPENDIX C: PostScript Support
The following tables list PostScript commands and identify printers that support them.
For detailed information about PostScript emulation, see “PostScript Emulation” on
page 4-1.
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference operator descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Operator Name
Page
appletalktype
4-27
✓
✓
✓
buildtime
4-27
✓
✓
✓
byteorder
4-27
✓
✓
✓
checkpassword
4-28
✓
✓
✓
currentfilenameextend
4-28
✓
✓
✓
currentmanualduplexmode
4-28
✘
✘
✘
currentuniversalsize
4-17
✓
✓
✓
defaulttimeouts
4-29
✓
✓
✓
deletefile
4-29
✓
✓
✓
devcontrol
4-30
✓
✓
✓
devdismount
4-31
✓
✓
✓
devforall
4-32
✓
✓
✓
devformat
4-32
✓
✓
✓
devmount
4-33
✓
✓
✓
devstatus
4-33
✓
✓
✓
diskonline
4-34
✓
✓
✓
diskstatus
4-35
✓
✓
✓
displayoperatormsg
4-35
✓
✓
✓
doidlefonts
4-35
✓
✓
✓
dojamrecovery
4-36
✓
✓
✓
doprinterrors
4-36
✓
✓
✓
doret
4-36
✓
✓
✓
C-2
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference operator descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Operator Name
Page
dostartpage
4-37
✓
✓
✓
dosysstart
4-37
✓
✓
✓
duplexer
4-37
✓
✓
✓
duplexmode
4-38
✓
✓
✓
enginesync
4-38
✓
✓
✓
file
4-39
✓
✓
✓
filenameforall
4-39
✓
✓
✓
fileposition
4-39
✓
✓
✓
firstside
4-40
✓
✓
✓
fontnonzerowinding
4-40
✓
✓
✓
hardwareiomode
4-40
✓
✓
✓
idlefonts
4-40
✓
✓
✓
ignoresize
4-17
✓
✓
✓
initializedisk
4-41
✓
✓
✓
jobname
4-41
✓
✓
✓
jobsource
4-42
✓
✓
✓
jobtimeout
4-43
✓
✓
✓
manualfeed
4-21
✓
✓
✓
manualfeedtimeout
4-44
✓
✓
✓
newsheet
4-44
✓
✓
✓
pagecount
4-44
✓
✓
✓
pagesprinted
4-45
✓
✓
✓
papertray
4-21
✓
✓
✓
printername
4-45
✓
✓
✓
product
4-45
✓
✓
✓
PS2fonts
4-46
✓
✓
✓
PS3fonts
4-46
✓
✓
✓
quiet
4-46
✓
✓
✓
ramsize
4-47
✓
✓
✓
realformat
4-47
✓
✓
✓
renamefile
4-47
✓
✓
✓
PostScript Support
C-3
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference operator descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Operator Name
Page
resolution
4-48
✓
✓
✓
revision
4-48
✓
✓
✓
sccbatch
4-49
✓
✓
✓
sccinteractive
4-50
✓
✓
✓
setcoverpage
4-50
✓
✓
✓
setdefaulttimeouts
4-50
✓
✓
✓
setdoidlefonts
4-51
✓
✓
✓
setdojamrecovery
4-51
✓
✓
✓
setdoprinterrors
4-51
✓
✓
✓
setdoret
4-52
✓
✓
✓
setdostartpage
4-52
✓
✓
✓
setdosysstart
4-53
✓
✓
✓
setduplexmode
4-53
✓
✓
✓
setenginesync
4-54
✓
✓
✓
setethernetaddress
4-54
✓
✓
✓
setfilenameextend
4-54
✓
✓
✓
setfileposition
4-55
✓
✓
✓
sethardwareiomode
4-55
✓
✓
✓
setidlefonts
4-55
✓
✓
✓
setignoresize
4-17
✓
✓
✓
setjobtimeout
4-56
✓
✓
✓
setmanualduplexmode
4-56
✓
✘
✘
setpapertray
4-22
✓
✓
✓
setprintername
4-57
✓
✓
✓
setquiet
4-57
✓
✓
✓
setresolution
4-58
✓
✓
✓
setsccbatch
4-58
✓
✓
✓
setsccinteractive
4-59
✓
✓
✓
setsoftwareiomode
4-59
✓
✓
✓
settumble
4-59
✓
✓
✓
setuniversalsize
4-18
✓
✓
✓
PostScript Support
C-4
PostScript Support
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference operator descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Operator Name
Page
setuserdiskpercent
4-60
✓
✓
✓
softwareiomode
4-60
✓
✓
✓
tumble
4-60
✓
✓
✓
userdiskpercent
4-61
✓
✓
✓
waittimeout
4-61
✓
✓
✓
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Key
Page
BeginPage
4-62
✓
✓
✓
Collate
4-62
false
false
true
DeferredMediaSelection
4-62
false
false
false
DeviceRenderingInfo
4-62
✓
✓
✓
• Screening
4-62
✘
PictureGrade
PictureGrade
– ColorGrade
4-62
✘
✘
✘
– PictureGrade
4-62
✘
✓
✓
– IET
4-62
✘
✓
✓
– IETImagesOnly
4-62
✘
✘
✘
– IETPictureGrade
4-62
✘
✓
✓
– None
4-62
✘
✓
✓
• TonerSaver
4-63
✘
false
true
• PictureGrade
4-63
✘
✓
✓
• ImageEnhancement
4-63
✘
✓
✓
• PrintDarkness
4-63
✓
✓
✓
• AutoMediaType
4-64
false
true
true
• EdgeToEdge
4-64
✘
✓
✓
• DefaultPoliciesPageSize
4-64
✘
✘
✘
C-5
PostScript Support
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
Page
X422
Key
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
• SubstituteSize
4-64
✓
✓
✓
• Type
4-65
102
98
98
• ColorCorrection
4-65
✓
✘
✘
• ImageBrightness
4-65
0
✘
✘
• ImageContrast
4-65
0
✘
✘
• PrintQuality
4-65
✘
✘
✘
Duplex
4-65
✓
✓
✓
EndPage
4-65
✓
✓
✓
ExitJamRecovery
4-65
✓
✓
✓
HWResolution
4-65
✓
✓
✓
ImagingBBox
4-66
✓
✓
✓
InputAttributes
4-66
✓
✓
✓
• 0 - Tray 1
4-66
✓
✓
✓
• 1 - Tray 2
4-66
✓
✓
✓
• 2 - Envelope Feeder
4-66
✓
✓
✓
• 3 - Tray 3
4-66
✓
✓
✓
• 4 - Multipurpose Feeder
4-66
✓
✓
✓
• 5 - Tray 4
4-66
✓
✓
✓
• 6 - Tray 5
4-66
✓
✓
✓
– PageSize
4-66
✓
✓
✓
– MatchAll
4-66
✓
✓
✓
– MediaColor
4-66
✓
✓
✓
– MediaType
4-66
✓
✓
✓
– MediaWeight
4-66
✓
✓
✓
– InputLocation
4-66
✓
✓
✓
• Mode
4-67
✓
✓
✓
• Priority
4-67
✓
✓
✓
Install
4-67
✓
✓
✓
Jog
4-67
✘
✘
✘
ManualFeed
4-68
✓
✓
✓
ManualFeedTimeout
4-68
✓
✓
✓
C-6
PostScript Support
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Key
Page
MediaColor
4-68
✓
✓
✓
MediaPosition
4-68
null
null
null
MediaType
4-68
✓
✓
✓
MediaWeight
4-68
✓
✓
✓
NumCopies
4-68
✓
✓
✓
Nup
4-68
✓
✓
✓
NupDetails
4-69
✓
✓
✓
• Rows
4-69
1
1
1
• Columns
4-69
1
1
1
• Orientation
4-69
0
0
0
• Border
4-70
0
0
0
• Order
4-70
0
0
0
• Type
4-70
96
96
96
• LandscapeOverride
4-70
false
false
false
4-71
✓
✓
✓
• 0 - Standard Bin
4-71
✓
✓
✓
• 1 - Optional Bin 1
4-71
✓
✓
✓
• 2 - Optional Bin 2
4-71
✓
✓
✓
• 3 - Optional Bin 3
4-71
✓
✓
✓
• 4 - Optional Bin 4
4-71
✓
✓
✓
• 5 - Optional Bin 5
4-71
✓
✓
✓
• 6 - Optional Bin 6
4-71
✓
✓
✓
• 7 - Optional Bin 7
4-71
✘
✓
✓
• 8 - Optional Bin 8
4-71
✘
✓
✓
• 9 - Optional Bin 9
4-71
✘
✓
✓
• 10 - Optional Bin 10
4-71
✘
✓
✓
– OutputType
4-71
✓
✓
✓
– OutputLocation
4-71
✓
✓
✓
OutputPage
4-71
true
true
true
OutputType
4-71
✓
✓
✓
PageDeviceName
4-71
✓
✓
✓
OutputAttributes
C-7
PostScript Support
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Key
Page
PageSize
4-72
✓
✓
✓
Policies
4-72
✓
✓
✓
• PolicyNotFound
4-72
1
1
1
• PolicyReport
4-72
{pop}
{pop}
{pop}
• PageSize
4-72
0
0
0
PostRenderingEnhance
4-72
✘
true
true
PostRenderingEnhanceDetails
4-73
✘
✓
✓
• REValue
4-73
✘
1
1
• Type
4-73
✘
8
8
PowerSave
4-73
20
20
20
ProcessColorModel
4-73
✓
✘
✘
Punch
4-73
✘
✘
✘
SlipSheet
4-73
✓
✘
✘
SlipSheetDetails
4-74
✓
✓
✓
• SlipSheetSource
4-74
null
null
null
• Type
4-74
96
96
96
Staple
4-74
✘
✘
✘
TraySwitch
4-74
✓
✓
✓
Tumble
4-75
✓
✓
✓
UniversalDetails
4-75
✓
✓
✓
• Type
4-75
✓
99
99
• PageSize
4-75
✓
✓
✓
• Orientation
4-75
✓
✓
✓
• Prompt
4-75
✓
✓
✓
C-8
Table C-3: User Interpreter Parameters
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Key
Page
Default
AccurateScreens
4-76
false
✓
✓
✓
CollatedCopies
4-76
Collation - Collated
Copies (QTY) value
✓
✓
✓
HalftoneMode
4-77
0
✓
✓
✓
IdiomRecognition
4-77
true
✓
✓
✓
JobName
4-77
()
✓
✓
✓
JobTimeout
4-77
JobTimeout system
parameter
✓
✓
✓
MaxDictStack
4-77
255
✓
✓
✓
MaxExecStack
4-77
10015
✓
✓
✓
MaxFontItem
4-77
12500
✓
✓
✓
MaxFormItem
4-77
100000
✓
✓
✓
MaxLocalVM
4-77
2147483647
✓
✓
✓
MaxOpStack
4-78
100000
✓
✓
✓
MaxPatternItem
4-78
20000
✓
✓
✓
MaxScreenItem
4-78
48000
✓
✓
✓
MaxSuperScreen
4-78
1024
✓
✓
✓
MaxUPathItem
4-78
5000
✓
✓
✓
MinFontCompress
4-78
2147483647
✓
✓
✓
PageCount
4-78
0
✓
✓
✓
UseOldcopypage
4-78
false
✓
✓
✓
VMReclaim
4-78
0
✓
✓
✓
VMThreshold
4-78
25000 per MB of RAM
✓
✓
✓
WaitTimeout
4-78
WaitTimeout system
parameter
✓
✓
✓
PostScript Support
C-9
Table C-4: System Interpreter Parameters
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Key
Page
BuildTime
4-79
✓
✓
✓
ByteOrder
4-79
false
false
false
CurDisplayList
4-79
0
0
0
CurFontCache
4-79
0
0
0
CurFormCache
4-79
0
0
0
CurInputDevice
4-80
✓
✓
✓
CurOutlineCache
4-80
0
0
0
CurOutputDevice
4-80
✓
✓
✓
CurPatternCache
4-80
0
0
0
CurScreenStorage
4-80
0
0
0
CurSourceList
4-80
0
0
0
CurUPathCache
4-80
0
0
0
DisableFastProcs
4-80
0
0
0
DoPrintErrors
4-81
DoStartPage
4-81
false
false
false
EnableExtraFonts
4-81
true
true
true
EngineBoot
4-81
✓
✓
✓
EngineCode
4-81
✓
✓
✓
EngineSpeed
4-81
✓
✓
✓
EnvironmentSave
4-81
FactoryDefaults
4-81
false
false
false
FatalErrorAddress
4-81
0
0
0
FontResourceDir
4-81
(fonts/)
(fonts/)
(fonts/)
FontVersion
4-81
✓
✓
✓
GenericResourceDir
4-81
GenericResourcePathSep
4-81
(/)
(/)
(/)
InstalledRam
4-82
✓
✓
✓
JobTimeout
4-82
Initialized from the Print PS Error
menu item
ResourceSave
(Resource/)
Initialized from the
Job Timeout menu item
PostScript Support
C-10
Table C-4: System Interpreter Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332n
Printer Model
Key
Page
languagelevel
4-82
MaxDisplayList
4-82
InstalledRam
MaxFontCache
4-82
InstalledRam
MaxFormCache
4-82
MaxImageBuffer
4-82
InstalledRam
MaxOutlineCache
4-82
InstalledRam
MaxPatternCache
4-82
MaxPermanentVM
4-82
InstalledRam
MaxRasterMemory
4-82
InstalledRam
MaxScreenStorage
4-82
InstalledRam
MaxSourceList
4-83
InstalledRam
MaxUPathCache
4-83
PageCount
4-83
PanelCode
4-83
✓
✓
✓
PrinterCode
4-83
✓
✓
✓
PrinterName
4-83
✓
✓
✓
RamSize
4-83
✓
✓
✓
RealFormat
4-83
(IEEE)
(IEEE)
(IEEE)
Revision
4-83
✓
✓
✓
SearchBuiltinFontsFirst
4-83
true
true
true
SerialNumber
4-83
✓
✓
✓
StartJobPassword
4-83
()
()
()
StartupMode
4-83
1
1
1
StaticRamSize
4-83
✓
✓
✓
SystemParamsPassword
4-84
()
()
()
UseOldcopypage
4-84
false
false
false
UseOldfonts
4-84
false
false
false
ValidNV
4-84
true
true
true
WaitTimeout
4-78
3
3
101000
101000
301000
101000
101000
301000
3
101000
101000
301000
Initialized from the
Page Count menu item
Initialized from the
Wait Timeout menu
PostScript Support
C-11
PostScript Support
Table C-5: Devices Supported
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
n Network version of the printer model
E332n
E330
E234n
E234
E232
4-79
E230,
%ParallelA%
X422
Page
C510n
Device
C510
Printer Model
✓
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
%ParallelB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%ParallelC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%ParallelD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%SerialA%
✘
✘
✘
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
%SerialB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%SerialC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%SerialD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LocalTalkA%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LocalTalkB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LocalTalkC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LocalTalkD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%EtherTalkA%
✘
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
%EtherTalkB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%EtherTalkC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%EtherTalkD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%IR_A%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%IR_B%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%IR_C%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%IR_D%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%USB_A%
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
%USB_B%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%USB_C%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%USB_D%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%TokenTalkA%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%TokenTalkB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%TokenTalkC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%TokenTalkD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%AppSocketA%
✘
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%AppSocketB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
C-12
PostScript Support
Table C-5: Devices Supported (Continued)
✓ Supported
✘ Not Supported
n Network version of the printer model
E332n
E330
E234n
E234
E232
4-79
E230,
%AppSocketC%
X422
Page
C510n
Device
C510
Printer Model
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%AppSocketD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%RemotePrinterA%
✘
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%RemotePrinterB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%RemotePrinterC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%RemotePrinterD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%PrintServerA%
✘
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%PrintServerB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%PrintServerC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%PrintServerD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LPR_A%
✘
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
%LPR_B%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LPR_C%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LPR_D%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LexLinkA%
✘
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LexLinkB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LexLinkC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%LexLinkD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%IP_A%
✘
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
%IP_B%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%IP_C%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%IP_D%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%EthernetPhysicalA%
✘
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%EthernetPhysicalB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%EthernetPhysicalC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%EthernetPhysicalD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%TokenRingPhysicalA%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%TokenRingPhysicalB%
✓
✓
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%TokenRingPhysicalC%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
%TokenRingPhysicalD%
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
✘
C-13
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters
✓ Supported
Page
X422
Key
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %Parallel%, %ParallelA%, %ParallelB%, %ParallelC%,
%ParallelD%
DelayedOutputClose
4-86
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-86
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-86
✓
✓
✓
Handshake
4-86
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-86
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-86
✓
✓
✓
On
4-86
✓
✓
✓
OutputDevice
4-86
✓
✓
✓
PCLSmartSwitch
4-86
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-86
✓
✓
✓
PSSmartSwitch
4-87
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-87
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %Serial%, %SerialA%, %SerialB%, %SerialC%,
%SerialD%
Baud
4-87
✓
✓
✓
CheckParity
4-87
✓
✓
✓
DataBits
4-87
✓
✓
✓
DelayedOutputClose
4-87
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-87
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-87
✓
✓
✓
FlowControl
4-87
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-87
✓
✓
✓
HonorDSR
4-87
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-88
✓
✓
✓
On
4-88
✓
✓
✓
Parity
4-88
✓
✓
✓
PCLSmartSwitch
4-88
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-88
✓
✓
✓
C-14
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Key
Page
PSSmartSwitch
4-88
✓
✓
✓
RobustXon
4-88
✓
✓
✓
SerialMode
4-88
✓
✓
✓
StopBits
4-89
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-89
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LocalTalk%, %LocalTalkA%, %LocalTalkB%,
%LocalTalkC%, %LocalTalkD%
DelayedOutputClose
4-89
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-89
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-89
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-89
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-89
✓
✓
✓
LocalTalkType
4-89
✓
✓
✓
NodeID
4-89
✓
✓
✓
On
4-89
✓
✓
✓
PCLSmartSwitch
4-90
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-90
✓
✓
✓
PSSmartSwitch
4-90
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-90
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %EtherTalk%, %EtherTalkA%, %EtherTalkB%,
%EtherTalkC%, %EtherTalkD%
DelayedOutputClose
4-90
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-90
✓
✓
✓
EthernetAddress
4-90
✓
✓
✓
EtherTalkType
4-90
✓
✓
✓
EtherTalkZone
4-90
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-91
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-91
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-91
✓
✓
✓
NodeID
4-91
✓
✓
✓
On
4-91
✓
✓
✓
PCLSmartSwitch
4-91
✓
✓
✓
C-15
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Key
Page
PortLocation
4-91
✓
✓
✓
PSSmartSwitch
4-91
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-91
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %IR%, %IR_A%, %IR_B%, %IR_C%, %IR_D%
DelayedOutputClose
4-91
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-92
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-92
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-92
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-92
✓
✓
✓
On
4-92
✓
✓
✓
PCLSmartSwitch
4-92
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-92
✓
✓
✓
PSSmartSwitch
4-92
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-92
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %USB%, %USB_A%, %USB_B%, %USB_C%, %USB_D%
DelayedOutputClose
4-92
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-93
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-93
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-93
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-93
✓
✓
✓
On
4-93
✓
✓
✓
PCLSmartSwitch
4-93
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-93
✓
✓
✓
PSSmartSwitch
4-93
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-93
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %TokenTalk%, %TokenTalkA%, %TokenTalkB%,
%TokenTalkC%, %TokenTalkD%
Address
4-93
✓
✓
✓
Bridging
4-93
✓
✓
✓
DelayedOutputClose
4-94
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-94
✓
✓
✓
C-16
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Key
Page
Filtering
4-94
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-94
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-94
✓
✓
✓
NodeID
4-94
✓
✓
✓
On
4-94
✓
✓
✓
PCLSmartSwitch
4-94
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-94
✓
✓
✓
PSSmartSwitch
4-94
✓
✓
✓
TokenTalkType
4-95
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-95
✓
✓
✓
Zone
4-95
✘
✘
✘
C-17
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
Page
X422
Key
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %AppSocket%, %AppSocketA%, %AppSocketB%,
%AppSocketC%, %AppSocketD%
DelayedOutputClose
4-95
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-95
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-95
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-95
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-95
✓
✓
✓
On
4-95
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-95
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-95
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %RemotePrinter%, %RemotePrinterA%,
%RemotePrinterB%, %RemotePrinterC%, %RemotePrinterD%
DelayedOutputClose
4-96
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-96
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-96
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-96
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-96
✓
✓
✓
On
4-96
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-96
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-96
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %PrintServer%, PrintServerA%, PrintServerB%,
%PrintServerC%, %PrintServerD%
DelayedOutputClose
4-97
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-97
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-97
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-97
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-97
✓
✓
✓
On
4-97
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-97
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-97
✓
✓
✓
C-18
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
Page
X422
Key
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LPR%, %LPR_A%, %LPR_B%, %LPR_C%, %LPR_D%
Enabled
4-98
✓
✓
✓
Filtering
4-98
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-98
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-98
✓
✓
✓
On
4-98
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-98
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-98
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LexLink%, %LexLinkA%, %LexLinkB%, %LexLinkC%,
%LexLinkD%
DelayedOutputClose
4-98
✓
✓
✓
Enabled
4-98
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-99
✓
✓
✓
Interpreter
4-99
✓
✓
✓
On
4-99
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-99
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-99
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %IP%, %IP_A%, %IP_B%, %IP_C%, %IP_D%
GatewayAddress
4-99
✓
✓
✓
IPAddress
4-99
✓
✓
✓
IPAddressDynamic
4-99
✓
✓
✓
NetworkMask
4-99
✓
✓
✓
On
4-99
✓
✓
✓
Physical
4-99
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-99
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-99
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %EthernetPhysical%, %EthernetPhysicalA%,
%EthernetPhysicalB%, %EthernetPhysicalC%, %EthernetPhysicalD%
EthernetAddress
4-100
✓
✓
✓
On
4-100
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-100
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-100
✓
✓
✓
C-19
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
Page
X422
Key
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %TokenRingPhysical%, %TokenRingPhysicalA%,
%TokenRingPhysicalB%, %TokenRingPhysicalC%, %TokenRingPhysicalD%
Address
4-100
✓
✓
✓
On
4-100
✓
✓
✓
PortLocation
4-100
✓
✓
✓
Speed
4-100
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-100
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Engine%
BSizeStandard
4-100
✓
✓
✓
Darkness
4-101
✓
✓
✓
PageCount
4-102
✓
✓
✓
TimeToStandby
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Console%
Language
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Calendar%, %CalendarA%, %CalendarB%, %CalendarC%,
%CalendarD%
Day
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Hour
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Minute
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Month
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Running
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Second
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Year
4-102
✓
✓
✓
DateTime
4-102
✓
✓
✓
DayOfWeekLong
4-102
✓
✓
✓
DayOfWeekNum
4-102
✓
✓
✓
DayOfWeekShort
4-102
✓
✓
✓
C-20
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
Page
X422
Key
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %disk1%
BlockSize
4-102
✓
✓
✓
Free
4-102
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-102
✓
✓
✓
InitializeAction
4-103
✓
✓
✓
LogicalSize
4-103
✓
✓
✓
Mounted
4-103
✓
✓
✓
PhysicalSize
4-103
✓
✓
✓
Removable
4-103
✓
✓
✓
Searchable
4-103
✓
✓
✓
SearchOrder
4-103
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-103
✓
✓
✓
Writeable
4-103
✓
✓
✓
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %flash1%
BlockSize
4-103
✓
✓
✓
Free
4-103
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-104
✓
✓
✓
InitializeAction
4-104
✓
✓
✓
LogicalSize
4-104
✓
✓
✓
Mounted
4-104
✓
✓
✓
PhysicalSize
4-104
✓
✓
✓
Removable
4-104
✓
✓
✓
Searchable
4-104
✓
✓
✓
SearchOrder
4-104
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-104
✓
✓
✓
Writeable
4-104
✓
✓
✓
C-21
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
✓ Supported
Page
X422
Key
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %rom%
BlockSize
4-105
✓
✓
✓
Free
4-105
✓
✓
✓
HasNames
4-105
✓
✓
✓
InitializeAction
4-105
✓
✓
✓
LogicalSize
4-105
✓
✓
✓
Mounted
4-105
✓
✓
✓
PhysicalSize
4-105
✓
✓
✓
Removable
4-105
✓
✓
✓
Searchable
4-105
✓
✓
✓
SearchOrder
4-105
✓
✓
✓
Type
4-105
✓
✓
✓
Writeable
4-105
✓
✓
✓
Table C-7: PostScript Commands: Message Keys
✓ Supported
X422
C510(n)
✘ Not Supported
Page numbers reference status message key and
value descriptions.
E230, E232,
E234(n),
E330, E332
Printer Model
Key
Page
job
4-107
✓
✓
✓
status
4-107
✓
✓
✓
source
4-107
✓
✓
✓
X-1
Index
Index
A
airflow requirement 7-1
altitude specifications 7-5
atmospheric pressure 7-5
attendance messages (PJL) 3-63, 3-67, 3-72, 3-75
B
bibliography 1-5
C
clearance requirements 7-4
Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts 2-10, 2-20
communications
computer-to-printer 8-11
ports, setting up 8-2
Windows 2000 8-4
Windows 95/98/Me 8-2
Windows NT 4.0 8-3
Windows XP 8-5
printer-to-computer 8-17
protocols 8-31
compatibility modes
backward and forward
Lexmark C510(n) 2-20
Lexmark E321 2-30
Lexmark E323 2-38, 2-43
Lexmark T634 2-38
Lexmark X422 2-10
compression
description, raster image graphics 2-88
raster compression mode command 2-88
set raster compression mode 2-78
connectors 8-1
D
device (flash memory or disk)
names (PostScript emulation) 6-9
search order 6-12
dimensions, printer 7-4
directory
description 6-4
example 6-4
printing
MarkVision Professional 6-3
operator panel 6-3
PJL 3-83
disk
description 6-1
directory of contents 6-4
job buffering 6-13
password protection 6-7
performance 6-13
Resource Data Collection mode 6-2
retrieval speed 6-13
storing fonts, macros, and symbol sets 6-2
viewing the contents 6-3
disk option, download target (PJL) 3-30
drivers
ACKNLG*
Lexmark C510 8-22, 8-23
ERROR*
Lexmark C510 8-22, 8-23
PE
Lexmark C510 8-22, 8-23
SLCT
Lexmark C510 8-22, 8-23
DSR protocol 8-32
DTR protocol 8-31, 8-32
DTR/DSR protocol 8-31, 8-32
E
edge to edge printing
See whole page setting
electrical specifications 7-2
envelope sizes supported 4-23
Lexmark C510(n) 2-4, 2-6
Lexmark X422 2-5
environmental commands and variables (PJL) 3-7
environmental conditions 7-5
errors, service 3-80
escape commands (PCL emulation)
categorized by function
X-2
color extensions 2-80
cursor positioning 2-68
font creation 2-73
font selection 2-70
job control 2-62
macros 2-73
miscellaneous commands 2-83
page control 2-64
picture frame 2-83
print model 2-74
raster graphics 2-77
rectangular area fill graphics 2-75
status readback 2-82
user-defined pattern 2-75
user-defined symbol set 2-72
external network adapter
See external print server
external print server
MarkNet Pro 8-42
MarkNet XLe 8-42
F
fastbytes protocol 8-16
file (flash memory or disk)
close 3-89
delete 3-92
format device 3-92
open 3-89
read 3-90
rename 3-92
run 3-91
write 3-91
filenames
file types 6-6
filename parameter (PJL) 3-88
macros, font, and symbol set ID 6-5
PostScript emulation conventions 6-9
searching 6-12
fit to page printing 2-7, 2-8
flash memory
description 6-1
directory of contents 6-4
download target (PJL) 3-30
password protection 6-7
performance 6-13
Resource Data Collection mode 6-2
retrieval speed 6-13
Index
rewriting contents 6-8
storing fonts, macros, and symbol sets 6-2
viewing the contents 6-3
fonts
PCL emulation
Lexmark C510(n) 2-19
Lexmark E321 2-29
Lexmark X422 2-9, 2-37
printing directory list for flash or disk 3-83, 6-3
saving on flash memory or disk 6-3
selecting
MarkVision Professional 2-9, 2-19
setting password protection 3-93
formatting flash or disk, PJL 3-92
G
GL/2 commands
character group 2-86
configuration group 2-84
line and fill attributes group 2-87
polygon group 2-85
vector group 2-85
H
hard disk
See disk
hardware specifications 7-1, 8-1
Honor DSR setting 8-32
I
information messages
status messages (PJL) 3-61
input buffer 8-43
interface
parallel 8-7
selecting 8-6
serial 8-25
SmartSwitch 5-2
internal network adapter
See internal print server
internal print server
MarkNet S 8-42
X-3
J
N
job buffering 6-13
creating a partition 6-14
disabling 6-15
enabling 6-14
recovering from a power loss 6-15
network support 8-42
noise emission levels 7-1
nonprintable areas 2-7
notation, commands
PCL emulation 2-59
PostScript emulation 4-14
Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-1
L
language switching
PCL emulation
MarkVision Professional 2-1
operator panel 2-1
software program 2-2
PostScript emulation 4-1
operator panel 4-1
software program 4-2
Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-3
setting for different interfaces 5-2
SmartSwitch 5-1
link buffer 8-43
logical page
PCL emulation 2-3, 2-7
PostScript emulation 4-3, 4-4
M
macros 2-95
printing directory list
flash memory or disk 6-3
setting password protection 3-93
storing on flash memory or disk 6-3
MarkNet Pro external print server 8-42
MarkNet S internal print server 8-42
MarkNet XLe external print server 8-42
MarkVision Professional
job buffering 6-13
passwords 6-8
Resource Data Collection mode 6-2
viewing contents of flash memory and disk 6-3
media sizes
status message codes 3-74
menus, printing settings from PJL 3-83
multipurpose feeder
paper source
PCL emulation 2-64
Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-39
Index
O
OCR fonts 2-10, 2-20
operator intervention
status messages (PJL) 3-72, 3-75
output bins
status message codes 3-75
P
page, printable
PCL emulation 2-3
PostScript emulation 4-3
paper handling 3-72
paper sizes
status message codes 3-74
paper sizes supported
Lexmark C510(n) 2-4, 2-6
Lexmark X422 2-5
paper trays
PCL emulation
paper size 2-64
paper source 2-64
PostScript emulation
automatic size sensing search order 4-18
operators 4-20
Printer Job Language (PJL)
paper size 3-14
paper source 3-39
status message codes 3-74
parallel interface 8-7
connector pin assignments 8-8
optional connector 8-8
signal descriptions 8-19
standard connector 8-8
parallel modes 8-18
parameters, PostScript emulation
interpreter 4-76
X-4
device 4-85
system 4-79
user 4-76
page device 4-62
password 6-7
directory of flash memory or disk 6-6
general notes 3-93
locking entire flash or disk 3-94
lost file or device password 3-98
read/write protection 6-7
relocking file or device 3-96
setting job password 3-5, 3-6
setting password for a file 3-93
unlocking file or device for current job 3-97
unlocking protection for flash or disk 3-95
write protection 6-7
PCL emulation
command structure 2-29, 2-60
control codes 2-59
escape control code 2-59
linking commands 2-61
parameters 2-60
relative positioning 2-61
syntax 2-60
commands
alphabetic 2-62
alphanumeric ID 2-68
color extensions
assign color index 2-81
color component one 2-81
color component three 2-81
color component two 2-81
color lookup tables 2-80
configure image data 2-81
driver configuration command 2-80
foreground color 2-81
gamma correction 2-81
monochrome print mode 2-80
palette control 2-80
palette ID 2-80
push/pop palette 2-80
render algorithm 2-81
select palette by ID 2-80
simple color 2-80
user-defined dither matrix 2-80
viewing illuminant 2-81
cursor positioning
half line-feed 2-69
Index
horizontal (columns) 2-68
horizontal (decipoints) 2-68
horizontal (PCL units) 2-68
line termination 2-69
push/pop cursor position 2-69
vertical (decipoints) 2-69
vertical (PCL units) 2-69
vertical (rows) 2-69
font creation
character code 2-73
font control 2-73
font descriptor 2-73
font ID 2-73
load character 2-73
font selection
height (primary) 2-70
height (secondary) 2-70
pitch (primary) 2-70
pitch (secondary) 2-70
primary and secondary pitch 2-72
select default font (primary) 2-71
select default font (secondary) 2-71
select download font (primary) 2-71
select download font (secondary) 2-71
spacing (primary) 2-70
spacing (secondary) 2-70
stroke weight (primary) 2-71
stroke weight (secondary) 2-71
style (primary) 2-70
style (secondary) 2-70
symbol set (primary) 2-70
symbol set (secondary) 2-70
text parsing method 2-72
transparent print data 2-71
typeface selection (primary) 2-71
typeface selection (secondary) 2-71
underline disable 2-71
underline enable 2-71
job control
job separation 2-65
long-edge offset registration 2-62
number of collated copies 2-62
number of copies 2-62
output bin 2-66
printer reset 2-62
short-edge offset registration 2-62
simplex/duplex print 2-62
unit of measure 2-63
X-5
Universal Exit Language 2-63
macros
macro control 2-73
macro ID 2-73
miscellaneous commands
display functions off 2-84
display functions on 2-83
end-of-line wrap 2-83
paper type 2-84
print quality 2-84
print test page 2-84
page control
character text path 2-65
clear horizontal margins 2-65
duplex page side selection 2-67
horizontal motion index 2-66
left margin 2-65
line spacing (alternative method) 2-67
page orientation 2-65
page size 2-64
paper source 2-64
print direction 2-65
right margin 2-65
set page length 2-67
set universal custom name 2-65
set universal feed direction 2-65
set universal height 2-64
set universal width 2-64
skip perforation 2-66
text length 2-66
text scale mode 2-67
top margin 2-65
vertical motion index 2-66
picture frame
enter GL/2 language 2-83
enter PCL emulation 2-83
GL/2 plot horizontal size 2-83
GL/2 plot vertical size 2-83
picture frame horizontal size 2-83
picture frame vertical size 2-83
set picture frame anchor point 2-83
print model
area fill ID 2-74
logical operation 2-74
pattern control 2-75
pattern transparency mode 2-74
pixel placement 2-74
select current pattern 2-74
Index
set pattern reference point 2-75
source transparency mode 2-74
user-defined pattern 2-75
raster graphics
destination raster height 2-79
destination raster width 2-78
end raster graphics (version B) 2-78
end raster graphics (version C) 2-78
raster graphics presentation 2-77
raster resolution 2-77
set raster compression mode 2-78
set raster configuration 2-79
source raster height 2-77
source raster width 2-77
start raster graphics 2-77
transfer raster data by plane 2-77
transfer raster data by row/block 2-78
Y offset 2-77
rectangular area fill graphics
area fill ID 2-76
fill rectangular area 2-76
horizontal rectangle size 2-75
vertical rectangle size (decipoints) 2-75
vertical rectangle size (PCL Units) 2-75
status readback
echo 2-82
flush all pages 2-82
free space 2-82
inquire status readback entity 2-82
set status readback location type 2-82
set status readback location unit 2-82
user-defined symbol set
define symbol set 2-72
symbol set control 2-72
symbol set ID code 2-72
control codes 2-59
font and symbol set support
Lexmark C510(n) 2-19
Lexmark E321 2-29
Lexmark X422 2-9, 2-37
GL/2 Language 2-84
linking commands 2-60
paper and envelope dimensions
Lexmark C510(n) 2-4, 2-6
Lexmark X422 2-5
password protection 3-93
saving files on flash memory or disk 6-3
selecting
X-6
MarkVision Professional 2-1
operator panel 2-1
SmartSwitch 2-1
software program 2-2
SmartSwitch 2-1
specialty fonts 2-31, 2-42
standard fonts 2-10, 2-20, 2-30, 2-38
Type 1 fonts 2-13, 2-23, 2-40
variables, PJL
common 3-48
printer unique 3-49
physical page
PCL emulation 2-3
PostScript emulation 4-3
physical page border 2-7
physical specifications 7-4
ports, communication 8-2
Windows 2000 8-4
Windows 95/98/Me 8-2
Windows NT 4.0 8-3
Windows XP 8-5
PostScript emulation
accessing files 6-9
command format 4-14
device names 6-9
device parameters 4-85
device search order 6-12
envelope size support 4-23
filenames 6-9
fonts
Lexmark C510(n) 4-9
Lexmark E323 4-12
Lexmark X422 4-7
interpreter parameters 4-76
page device parameters 4-62
page formatting 4-3
paper size commands
currentuniversalsize 4-17
ignoresize 4-17
setignoresize 4-17
setuniversalsize 4-18
paper sizes supported 4-15
paper tray commands
manualfeed 4-21
papertray 4-21
setpapertray 4-22
paper tray support 4-18
password protecting
Index
Type 1 fonts on flash memory or disk 3-93
printable areas 4-3
saving fonts on flash memory or disk 6-3
selecting language 4-1
SmartSwitch 4-1
status and error messages 4-106, 4-107
supplemental operators 4-27
appletalktype 4-27
buildtime 4-27
byteorder 4-27
checkpassword 4-28
currentfilenameextend 4-28
currentmanualduplexmode 4-28
defaulttimeouts 4-29
deletefile 4-29
devcontrol 4-30
devdismount 4-31
devforall 4-32
devformat 4-32
devmount 4-33
devstatus 4-33
diskonline 4-34
diskstatus 4-35
displayoperatormsg 4-35
doidlefonts 4-35
dojamrecovery 4-36
doprinterrors 4-36
doret 4-36
dostartpage 4-37
dosysstart 4-37
duplexer 4-37
duplexmode 4-38
enginesync 4-38
file 4-39
filenameforall 4-39
fileposition 4-39
firstside 4-40
fontnonzerowinding 4-40
hardwareiomode 4-40
idlefonts 4-40
ignoresize 4-41
initializedisk 4-41
jobname 4-41
jobsource 4-42
jobtimeout 4-43
manualfeed 4-43
manualfeedtimeout 4-44
newsheet 4-44
X-7
pagecount 4-44
pagesprinted 4-45
papertray 4-45
printername 4-45
product 4-45
PS2fonts 4-46
PS3fonts 4-46
quiet 4-46
ramsize 4-47
realformat 4-47
renamefile 4-47
resolution 4-48
revision 4-48
sccbatch 4-49
sccinteractive 4-50
setcoverpage 4-50
setdefaulttimeouts 4-50
setdoidlefonts 4-51
setdojamrecovery 4-51
setdoprinterrors 4-51
setdoret 4-52
setdostartpage 4-52
setdosysstart 4-53
setduplexmode 4-53
setenginesync 4-54
setethernetaddress 4-54
setfilenameextend 4-54
setfileposition 4-55
sethardwareiomode 4-55
setidlefonts 4-55
setignoresize 4-55
setjobtimeout 4-56
setmanualduplexmode 4-56
setpapertray 4-56
setprintername 4-57
setquiet 4-57
setresolution 4-58
setsccbatch 4-58
setsccinteractive 4-59
setsoftwareiomode 4-59
settumble 4-59
setuserdiskpercent 4-60
softwareiomode 4-60
tumble 4-60
userdiskpercent 4-61
waittimeout 4-61
system parameters 4-79
unsolicited messages 4-108
Index
user parameters 4-76
using the operator panel 4-1
power requirements 7-2
printable areas 2-3, 2-7, 4-3
Printer Job Language (PJL)
attendance messages 3-67
30 Print Unit Missing 3-67
30 Coating Roll Missing 3-67
31 Defective Cartridge XXXX 3-67
31 Defective Print Cartridge 3-67
31 Missing Cartridge XXXX 3-68
31 Missing Printhead 3-68
31 PerfectFinish Missing 3-70
32 Unsupported Cartridge 3-67
32 Unsupported Cartridge 3-67
32 Unsupported Print Cartridge 3-67
32 Unsupported Printhead 3-68
33 Tray x Config Error 3-69
40 Tray x Size Sense Error 3-68
41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray 3-68
58 Input Config Error 3-69
58 Too Many Bins Attached 3-69
58 Too Many Disks Installed 3-69
58 Too Many Trays Attached 3-69
59 Incompatible Bin x 3-71
84 All Photo Devs Exhausted 3-70
84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted 3-70
84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning 3-70
84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning 3-70
87 PerfectFinish Empty 3-70
88 Black Print Cartridge Low 3-70
88 Black Toner Empty 3-70
88 Black Toner Low 3-70
88 Cartridge Low <CMYK> 3-71
88 Color Print Cartridge Low 3-70
88 Cyan Toner Empty 3-70
88 Cyan Toner Low 3-70
88 Magenta Toner Empty 3-70
88 Magenta Toner Low 3-70
88 Photo Print Cartridge Low 3-70
88 Toner Low 3-70
88 Yellow Toner Empty 3-70
88 Yellow Toner Low 3-70
89 Cartridge Empty <CMYK> 3-71
2xx Paper Jam 3-69
Cartridge Life Expired XXXX 3-67
Cartridge Life Warning XXXX 3-68
Change Cartridge Invalid Refill 3-67
X-8
Check Duplex Connection 3-71
Check Finisher Installation 3-69
Check Mailbox Installation 3-69
Check Tray <source #> Connection 3-69
Close Cover 3-68
Close Cover <c> 3-68
Close Cover A 3-67
Close Deflector G 3-68
Close Door 3-67
Close Door <d> 3-68
Close Duplex Door 3-72
Close Finisher Door 3-68
Close Finisher Side Door 3-68
Close Finisher Top Cover 3-68
Close Front Door 3-68
Close Side Door 3-68
Close Top Covers 3-67
Close Tray x Top Cover 3-68
Cover Open 3-67
Incompatible Duplex 3-71
Incompatible Envelope Feeder 3-71
Incompatible Tray x 3-71
Insert Cartridge 3-67
Insert Duplex Option 3-72
Insert Hole Punch Box 3-67
Insert PC Cartridge 3-67
Insert Print Cartridge 3-69
Install Bin x or Cancel Job 3-69
Install Duplex or Cancel Job 3-72
Install Env Feed or Cancel Job 3-69
Install Tray x or Cancel Job 3-69
Load Staples 3-71, 3-72
Open Cover 3-68
Open Rear Door 3-68
OPMSG message 3-71
paper handling
34 Incorrect Media 3-73
34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x 3-73
34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed 373
Change <source> 3-73
Check <source> Paper Guide 3-73
Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go. 3-73
Insert Tray <source #> 3-73
Load <source> 3-73
Load Manual 3-73
Remove Paper <linked set bin
name> 3-73
Index
Remove Paper All Output Bins 3-73
Remove Paper Output Bin <bin #> 373
Remove Paper Standard Bin 3-73
paper jams
200 Paper Jam 3-76
201 Paper Jam 3-76
202 Paper Jam 3-76
203 Paper Jam 3-76
204 Paper Jam 3-76
205 Paper Jam 3-76
206 Paper Jam 3-76
207 Paper Jam 3-76
208 Paper Jam 3-76
220 Paper Jam 3-76
221 Paper Jam 3-76
222 Paper Jam 3-76
230 Paper Jam 3-76
231 Paper Jam 3-76
232 Paper Jam 3-77
241 Paper Jam 3-77
242 Paper Jam 3-77
243 Paper Jam 3-77
244 Paper Jam 3-77
245 Paper Jam 3-77
246 Paper Jam 3-77
247 Paper Jam 3-77
248 Paper Jam 3-77
249 Paper Jam 3-77
24y Paper Jam 3-77
250 Paper Jam 3-77
251 Paper Jam 3-77
252 Paper Jam 3-77
253 Paper Jam 3-78
254 Paper Jam 3-78
255 Paper Jam 3-78
256 Paper Jam 3-78
257 Paper Jam 3-78
258 Paper Jam 3-78
259 Paper Jam 3-78
260 Paper Jam 3-78
261 Paper Jam 3-78
271 Paper Jam 3-78
272 Paper Jam 3-78
273 Paper Jam 3-78
27z Paper Jam 3-78
280 Paper Jam 3-78
281 Paper Jam 3-79
X-9
282 Paper Jam 3-79
283 Paper Jam 3-79
284 Paper Jam 3-79
285 Paper Jam 3-79
286 Paper Jam 3-79
287 Paper Jam 3-79
288 Paper Jam 3-79
289 Paper Jam 3-79
290 Paper Jam 3-79
291 Paper Jam 3-79
292 Paper Jam 3-79
293 Paper Jam 3-79
294 Paper Jam 3-80
295 Paper Jam 3-80
Priming Failed. Retry? 3-71
Reattach Bins <bin #x - bin #y> 3-69
Reattach Envelope Feeder 3-69
Reattach MP Feeder 3-69
Reattach Output Bin <bin #> 3-69
Replace Fuser 3-71
Replace Oil Coating Roll 3-71
Replace PC Kit 3-71
Replace PC Kit To Continue 3-71
Replace Toner Cartridge 3-71
Replace Toner Cartridge To Continue 3-71
Replace Transfer Kit 3-71
STMSG message 3-71
auto-continuable messages 3-63
34 Short Paper 3-64
35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory 3-64, 365
36 Resolution Reduced 3-64
37 Insufficient Collation Area 3-63, 3-65
37 Insufficient Defrag Memory 3-63
37 Insufficient Memory 3-63
38 Memory Full 3-63
39 Complex Page 3-63
50 PPDS Font Error 3-63
51 Defective Flash 3-64, 3-66
52 Flash Full 3-64, 3-65
53 Unformatted Flash 3-64, 3-66
54 Network x Software Error 3-65
54 Par x ENA Connection Lost 3-65
54 Parallel Error 3-63
54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost 3-65
54 Serial Option 1 Error 3-63
54 Serial Option x Error 3-65
54 Standard Serial Error 3-63
Index
54 Std Network Software Error 3-63
54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost 3-64
54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost 3-63
55 Insufficient Fax Buffer 3-64
56 Parallel Port Disabled 3-64
56 Parallel Port x Disabled 3-65
56 Serial Port 1 Disabled 3-64
56 Serial Port x Disabled 3-65
56 Standard Parallel Port Disabled 3-64
56 Standard Serial Disabled 3-63
56 Standard USB Port Disabled 3-64
56 Std Parallel Port Disabled 3-64
56 USB Port x Disabled 3-65
57 Configuration Change 3-63
58 Too Many Flash Options 3-66
61 Defective Disk 3-64, 3-66
61 Unformatted Disk 3-64
62 Disk Full 3-64, 3-66
63 Unformatted Disk 3-66
64 Unsupported Disk Format 3-66
80 Belt Exhausted 3-66
80 Belt Life Warning 3-66
80 Fuser Exhausted 3-66
80 Fuser Life Warning 3-66
80 Fuser Maintenance 3-66
80 Fuser/Belt Exhausted 3-66
80 Fuser/Belt Life Warning 3-66
80 Scheduled Maintenance 3-65, 3-66
81 Scheduled Maintenance 3-66
83 ITU Maintenance 3-66
Disk Corrupted. Reformat? 3-66
Empty Box M 3-65
Held Jobs May Not Be Restored 3-63
Insert Box M 3-65
Insert Staple Cartridge 3-65
Insert Stapler 3-65
Operation Failed Faxes on Disk 3-65
Operation Failed Jobs on Disk 3-65
Priming Failed, Retry. Go/Stop? 3-65
Print Jobs on Disk. Go/Stop? 3-64
Print Jobs on Disk? 3-64
Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop? 3-64
command categories
device attendance 3-80
file and device protection 3-93
file commands for flash and disk 3-86
job separation commands 3-4
kernel commands 3-2
X-10
miscellaneous 3-82
status readback 3-53, 3-54
command syntax
command codes 3-1
optional parameters 3-2
commands
COMMENT 3-3
DEFAULT 3-8, 3-94
DINQUIRE 3-54
ECHO 3-55
ENTER LANGUAGE 3-3
EOJ 3-6
INFO 3-56
INITIALIZE 3-11
INQUIRE 3-58
JOB 3-4
LBEEP 3-82
LBYPASSPASSWORD 3-97
LCLOSEFILE 3-89
LDECLARE 3-95, 3-97
LDELETEFILE 3-92
LDELETEPASSWORD 3-96
LDOWNLOADTARGET 3-86
LESCAPECHAR 3-83
LFAX PHONENUMBER 3-85
LFORMAT 3-92
LOPENFILE 3-89
LPORTROTATE 3-82
LPRINTDIRECTORY 3-83, 6-4
LPRINTMENUS 3-83
LPRINTPCLFONTS 3-83
LPRINTPSFONTS 3-83
LPRINTTESTPAGE 3-83
LREADFILE 3-90
LRENAMEFILE 3-92
LRUNFILE 3-91
LWRITEFILE 3-91
OPMSG 3-81
RDYMSG 3-80
RESET 3-11
SET 3-9
STMSG 3-81
USTATUS 3-59
USTATUSOFF 3-60
information messages
88 Black Print Cartridge Low 3-61
88 Black Toner Low 3-61
88 Color Print Cartridge Low 3-61
Index
88 Cyan Toner Low 3-61
88 Magenta Toner Low 3-61
88 Photo Print Cartridge Low 3-61
88 Toner Low 3-61, 3-62
88 Yellow Toner Low 3-61
Bin <bin #> Full 3-62
Busy 3-62
Cancelling Job 3-62
Not Ready 3-61
Power Saver with 88 Ink Low 3-62
Powersaver 3-62
RDYMSG 3-61
Ready 3-61
Ready with 88 Ink Low 3-61
Replace Fuser 3-61, 3-62
Replace PC Kit 3-61, 3-62
Replace Toner 3-61, 3-62
Replace Transfer 3-62
Res Reduced 3-62
Resetting the Printer 3-61
Tray <source #> Empty 3-62
Tray <source #> Missing 3-62
Waiting 3-62
status messages and codes 3-61
variable categories 3-7
common variables
all printer languages 3-12
PCL emulation 3-48
PostScript emulation 3-51
printer unique
all printer languages 3-19
LRESOURCE 3-52
PCL emulation 3-49
PostScript emulation 3-52
variables
AUTOCONT 3-12
BINDING 3-12
BITSPERPIXEL 3-12
CLEARABLEWARNINGS 3-12
COPIES 3-12
CPLOCK 3-13
DENSITY 3-13
DUPLEX 3-13
ECONOMODE 3-13
FONTNUMBER 3-48
FONTSOURCE 3-48
FORMATTERNUMBER 3-13
FORMLINES 3-13
X-11
HOLD 3-13
HOLDKEY 3-13
HOLDTYPE 3-14
IMAGEADAPT 3-14
INTRAY1SIZE 3-14
INTRAY2 3-14
INTRAY2SIZE 3-14
INTRAY3 3-14
INTRAY3SIZE 3-14
INTRAY4 3-14
INTRAY4SIZE 3-14
INTRAY5 3-14
INTRAY5SIZE 3-14
JAMRECOVERY 3-51
JOBNAME 3-14
JOBOFFSET 3-15
LA4WIDTH 3-49
LACTIVEBINRESET 3-19
LADVANCEDSTATUS 3-19
LALARMCONTROL 3-19
LANG 3-15
LASSIGNFEEDER 3-49
LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE 3-49
LASSIGNMANUALPAPER 3-49
LASSIGNMPFEEDER 3-49
LASSIGNTRAY1 3-50
LASSIGNTRAY2 3-50
LASSIGNTRAY3 3-50
LASSIGNTRAY4 3-50
LASSIGNTRAY5 3-50
LAUTOCRLF 3-19
LAUTOLFCR 3-19
LBITMAPROUNDING 3-50
LBLANKPAGES 3-19
LBONDLENGTH 3-19
LBONDLOADING 3-19
LBONDOUTBIN 3-20
LBONDTEXTURE 3-20
LBONDWEIGHT 3-20
LBWLOCK 3-20
LCANCEL 3-20
LCARDSTOCKLENGTH 3-20
LCARDSTOCKLOADING 3-20
LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN 3-21
LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE 3-21
LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT 3-21
LCOLLATION 3-21
LCOLORCORRECTION 3-21
Index
LCOLOREDLENGTH 3-21
LCOLOREDLOADING 3-22
LCOLOREDOUTBIN 3-22
LCOLOREDTEXTURE 3-22
LCOLOREDWEIGHT 3-22
LCOLOREXTENSIONS 3-50
LCOLORMODEL 3-22
LCUSTOMPAPERFEED 3-23
LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT 3-23
LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS 3-22
LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH 3-22
LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH 3-23
LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING 3-23
LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA 3-23
LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME 3-23
LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN 3-24
LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE 3-24
LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT 3-24
LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH 3-24
LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING 3-24
LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA 3-24
LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME 3-25
LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN 3-25
LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE 3-25
LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT 3-25
LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH 3-25
LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING 3-25
LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA 3-26
LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME 3-26
LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN 3-26
LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE 3-26
LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT 3-26
LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH 3-26
LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING 3-27
LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA 3-27
LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME 3-27
LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN 3-27
LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE 3-27
LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT 3-27
LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH 3-28
LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING 3-28
LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA 3-28
LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME 3-28
LCUSTOMTYPE5OUTBIN 3-28
LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE 3-28
LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT 3-29
LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH 3-29
LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA 3-29
X-12
LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME 3-29
LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN 3-29
LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE 3-30
LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT 3-30
LDESCRIPTION 3-53
LDOWNLOADTARGET 3-30
LDRYTIMEDELAY 3-30
LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS 3-30
LENVELOPEENHANCE 3-30
LENVELOPELENGTH 3-30
LENVELOPEOUTBIN 3-30
LENVELOPETEXTURE 3-31
LENVELOPEWEIGHT 3-31
LESCCHAR 3-31
LFAXREDIAL 3-31
LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY 3-31
LFAXRESOLUTION 3-31
LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG 3-31
LFEEDERPAPERTYPE 3-31
LFONTCOMPATIBILITY 3-51
LFONTPRIORITY 3-51
LGLOSSYLOADING 3-31
LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN 3-32
LGLOSSYTEXTURE 3-32
LGLOSSYWEIGHT 3-32
LHOLEPUNCHALARM 3-32
LHOLEPUNCHMODE 3-32
LHONORINIT 3-32
LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS 3-32
LIMAGECONTRAST 3-32
LIMAGEENHANCE 3-32
LIMAGEENHANCETYPE 3-33
LIMAGEORIENTATION 3-33
LIMAGESMOOTHING 3-33
LINFEEDERSIZE 3-33
LINKALERT 3-33
LINMPFEEDERSIZE 3-33
LJAMRECOVERY 3-33
LLABELSLENGTH 3-33
LLABELSLOADING 3-33
LLABELSOUTBIN 3-34
LLABELSTEXTURE 3-34
LLABELSWEIGHT 3-34
LLASTTRAYRENUMBER 3-34
LLEFTMARGINOFFSET 3-34
LLETTERHEADLENGTH 3-34
LLETTERHEADLOADING 3-34
LLETTERHEADOUTBIN 3-35
Index
LLETTERHEADTEXTURE 3-35
LLETTERHEADWEIGHT 3-35
LMANUALENVELOPESIZE 3-36
LMANUALENVELOPETYPE 3-36
LMANUALPAPERSIZE 3-36
LMANUALPAPERTYPE 3-36
LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE 3-36
LMULTIPAGEBORDER 3-36
LMULTIPAGEORDER 3-36
LMULTIPAGEPRINT 3-37
LMULTIPAGEVIEW 3-37
LNPAP 3-37
LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME 3-37
LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME 3-37
LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME 3-37
LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME 3-37
LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME 3-37
LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME 3-38
LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME 3-38
LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME 3-38
LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME 3-38
LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME 3-38
LOUTBINCONFIG 3-38
LOVERFLOWOUTBIN 3-39
LOVERFLOWTIMER 3-39
LOWTONER 3-15
LPAGECOUNT 3-39
LPAGEMODE 3-39
LPAPERSOURCE 3-39
LPICTUREGRADE 3-40, 3-52
LPLAINLENGTH 3-40
LPLAINOUTBIN 3-40
LPLAINTEXTURE 3-40
LPLAINWEIGHT 3-40
LPOWERSAVER 3-40
LPPDS 3-41
LPPDSFORMLINES 3-41
LPPDSLINESPERINCH 3-41
LPREPRINTEDLENGTH 3-41
LPREPRINTEDLOADING 3-41
LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN 3-42
LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE 3-42
LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT 3-42
LPRINTBUFFER 3-42, B-9
LPRINTERUSAGE 3-42
LPRINTHEADIDLETIME 3-42
LPRINTMENUSBUTTON 3-42, B-9
LPRINTQUALITY 3-43
X-13
LPSFONTPRIORITY 3-52
LPUNCH 3-43
LREAROUTBINNAME 3-43
LREPEATLIMIT 3-43
LRESET 3-43
LRESOURCESAVE 3-43, B-9
LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET 3-43
LRWLOCK 3-53
LSCREENING 3-43
LSEPARATORSHEETS 3-43
LSEPARATORSOURCE 3-43
LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME 3-44
LSTAPLE 3-44
LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM 3-44
LSTAPLETESTBIN 3-44
LSTAPLETESTSOURCE 3-44
LSTROKEWIDTH 3-44
LSUBSTITUTESIZE 3-44
LTHINCOAT 3-44
LTOPBINROTATE 3-44
LTOPMARGINOFFSET 3-44
LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH 3-44
LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN 3-45
LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE 3-45
LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT 3-45
LTRAY1AUTOSIZE 3-46
LTRAY1PAPERTYPE 3-46
LTRAY1RENUMBER 3-47
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3-45
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-45
LTRAY2AUTOSIZE 3-46
LTRAY2PAPERTYPE 3-47
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3-45
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-45
LTRAY3AUTOSIZE 3-46
LTRAY3PAPERTYPE 3-47
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3-46
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-46
LTRAY4AUTOSIZE 3-46
LTRAY4PAPERTYPE 3-47
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3-46
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-46
LTRAY5AUTOSIZE 3-46
LTRAY5PAPERTYPE 3-47
Index
LTYPE1FONTS 3-47
LUSDEFAULTS 3-47
LWLOCK 3-53
MANUALFEED 3-15
MEDIATYPE 3-15
MPTRAY 3-15
ORIENTATION 3-15
OUTBIN 3-16
PAGEPROTECT 3-16
PAPER 3-16
PARALLEL 3-17
PASSWORD 3-17
PERSONALITY 3-17
PITCH 3-48
POWERSAVE 3-17
POWERSAVETIME 3-18
PRTPSERRS 3-51
PTSIZE 3-48
QTY 3-18
REPRINT 3-18
RESOLUTION 3-18
RESOURCESAVE 3-18
RET 3-18
SYMSET 3-48
TIMEOUT 3-18
USERNAME 3-19
WIDEA4 3-19
printer languages, selecting
MarkVision Professional 2-1
methods 5-1
operator panel 2-1, 4-1
PCL emulation 2-1
Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-3
setting for different interfaces 5-2
SmartSwitch 5-1
software program 2-2
switching 5-1
printer specifications
airflow requirement 7-1
altitude 7-5
atmospheric pressure 7-5
clearance requirements 7-4
dimensions 7-4
electrical 7-2
environmental conditions 7-5
flash memory and disk retrieval speeds 6-13
interfaces 8-1
noise emission levels 7-1
X-14
power requirements 7-2
size 7-4
time to power on to Ready state 7-6
time to print first page 7-6
weight 7-4
protocol
DTR/DSR 8-32
fastbytes data transfer sequence 8-16
Robust XON 8-31
RS-232C 8-33
standard data transfer sequence 8-15
XON/XOFF 8-34
R
raster compression mode 2-88
adaptive compression 2-92
delta row 2-91
group 3 and 4 2-93
Lexmark adaptive 2-94
run-length encoded data 2-90
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) 2-90
uncoded data 2-89
raster image graphics 2-88
receivers
AUTOFD*
Lexmark C510 8-20
BUSY driver
Lexmark C510 8-23, 8-24
DATA 1-8 Signal
Lexmark C510 8-21
INIT*
Lexmark C510 8-23, 8-24
SLCTIN*
Lexmark C510 8-24, 8-25
STROBE
Lexmark C510 8-19, 8-20, 8-21, 8-22, 823, 8-24, 8-25
required clearance 7-4
Resource Data Collection 6-2, 6-3
Robust XON protocol 8-31
RS-232C
cable pin assignments 8-26
connecting 8-26
port compatibility 8-36
protocol timing 8-33
XON/XOFF protocol timing 8-34
RS-422
Index
cable pin assignments 8-37
connecting 8-36
serial communication parameters 8-38
using 8-36
XON/XOFF protocol timing 8-40
S
selecting printer languages
setting for different interfaces 5-2
SmartSwitch 5-1
serial interface
link buffer 8-43
network support 8-42
RS-232C
cable pin assignments 8-26
communication parameters 8-29
DTR and DTR/DSR protocol timing 8-33
port compatibility 8-36
protocol 8-32
serial configuration recommendations 8-35
RS-422 cable pin assignments 8-37
using RS-232C 8-26
using RS-422 8-36
when to use 8-25
service errors 3-80
signal descriptions 8-19
size, printer 7-4
SmartSwitch 5-1
setting for different interfaces 5-2
switching printer languages 5-1
sniffing 5-3
specialty PCL emulation fonts
forward/backward compatibility modes 2-31, 242
specialty PCL fonts 2-31, 2-42
specifications
See printer specifications
standard PCL emulation fonts 2-10, 2-20, 2-30, 238
forward/backward compatibility modes 2-10, 220, 2-30, 2-38
standard protocol 8-15
status messages
attendance conditions 3-67
auto-continuable conditions 3-63
information messages 3-61
operator intervention - paper handling 3-72
X-15
operator intervention - paper jams 3-75
PostScript emulation 4-107
switching printer languages
MarkVision Professional 2-1
methods 5-1
operator panel 2-1, 4-1
PCL emulation 2-1
PostScript emulation 4-1
Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-3
setting for different interfaces 5-2
SmartSwitch 5-1
software program 2-2, 4-2
Symbol Set Tables, locating ID values 2-60
symbol sets
printing directory list
flash memory or disk 6-3
selecting
Lexmark C510(n) 2-25
Lexmark E321 2-32
Lexmark E323 2-43
Lexmark T630 2-43
Lexmark T632 2-43
Lexmark T634 2-43
Lexmark X422 2-15
setting password protection 3-93
storing on flash memory or disk 6-3
support
ISO fonts 2-18, 2-28, 2-36, 2-58
non-text fonts 2-17, 2-27
text fonts 2-15, 2-25
syntax, commands
PCL emulation 2-59
PostScript emulation 4-14
Printer Job Language 3-1
T
test page, printing from PJL
flash memory and disk directory 3-83, 6-4
menu settings page 3-83
PCL emulation font list 3-83
PostScript emulation font list 3-83
printer test page 3-83
time
to power on to Ready state 7-6
to print the first page 7-6
trays
PCL emulation
Index
page size 2-64
paper source 2-64
PostScript emulation
automatic size sensing search order 4-18
operators 4-20
Printer Job Language (PJL)
paper size 3-14
paper source 3-39
status message codes 3-74
Type 1 fonts
description 2-13, 2-23, 2-40
forward/backward compatibility modes 2-13, 223, 2-40
U
Universal Exit Language 3-2
unsolicited messages 4-108
V
variables, PJL
common for all printer languages 3-12
common for PCL emulation 3-48
common for PostScript emulation 3-51
environment 3-7
printer unique for all printer languages 3-19
printer unique for PCL emulation 3-49
W
weight, printer 7-4
whole page setting 2-8
X
XON/XOFF protocol 8-31
RS-232C 8-34
RS-422 8-40
Download PDF

advertising